Home

AIS Router AI2524 User's Manual

1. bfe For manual emergency modes setting clear Reset functions clock anage the system clock configure Enter configuration mode connect Open a terminal connection copy Copy a config file to or from a tftp server debug Debugging functions disable Turn off privileged commands disconnect Disconnect an existing telnet session enable Turn on privileged commands exit Exit from the EXEC help Description of the interactive help system lat Open a lat connection llc2 Execute llc2 tests lock Lock the terminal login Log in as a particular use logout Exit from the EXEC menu Start a menu based user interf name connection Name an existing telnet connection ping Send echo messages reload Halt and perform a cold restart resume Resume an active telnet connection send Send a message to other tty lines setup Run the SETUP command facility show Show running system information systat Display information about terminal lines telnet Open a telnet connection terminal Set terminal line parameters test Test subsystems memory and interfaces tn3270 Open a tn3270 connection trace Trace route to destination where List active telnet connections which route Do route table lookup and display results write Write running configuration to memory network or terminal x3 Set X 3 parameters on PAD xremote Enter XRemote mod ROM Monitor Mode Commands If your router or access
2. Entry Aa Next Hop NET 1 47 0005 000c 0001 47 0005 000c 0001 0000 1234 00 2 47 0004 47 0005 000c 0002 0000 023 1 00 3 47 0005 0003 47 0005 000c 000 1 0000 1234 00 4 47 0005 000c 47 0005 000c 0004 0000 0011 00 5 47 0005 47 0005 000c 0002 0000 023 1 00 This table offers examples of how the longest matching NSAP prefix can be matched with routing table entries in the table above Datagram Destination NSAP Table Entry Address Number Used 47 0005 000c 0001 0000 3456 01 1 47 0005 000c 0001 6789 2345 01 1 47 0004 1234 1234 1234 1234 01 2 47 0005 0003 4321 4321 4321 01 3 47 0005 000c 0004 5678 5678 01 4 47 0005 0001 0005 3456 3456 01 5 Octet boundaries must be used for the internal boundaries of NSAP ad dresses and NETs August 1997 Page 9 7 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Understand Routing Processes The basic function of a router is to forward packets receive a packet in one interface and send it out another or the same interface to the proper destination All routers do this by looking up the destination ad dress in a table The tables can be built either dynamically or statically If you are configuring all the entries in the table yourself you are using static routing If you use a routing process to build the tables you ar using dynamic routing It is possible and sometimes necessary to use both static and dynamic routing simultaneously
3. Page 2 8 August 1997 AI2524UM Chapter 3 Configuration Overview Chapter 3 Configuration Overview Introduction Boot Router for First Time This chapter provides a brief overview of three ways that the AI2524 can be configured including e Configuration Mode e Autolnstall e System Configuration Dialog These three and other procedures are described in detail in this manual The first time the router is powered and booted you must enter basic configuration information and save the configuration to a file in NVRAM Each time you power on the router it goes through the boot sequence 1 The router goes through power on self test diagnostics to verify basic operation of the CPU memory and interfaces The system bootstrap software boot image executes and searches for a valid Cisco IOS image router operating system software The source of the Cisco IOS image Flash memory or a Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP server is determined by the configura tion register setting The factory default setting for the configura tion register is 0x2102 which indicates that the router should attempt to load a Cisco IOS image from Flash memory If after five attempts a valid Cisco IOS image is not found in Flash memory the router reverts to boot ROM mode which is used to install or upgrade a Cisco IOS image If a valid Cisco IOS image is found then the router searches for a valid configuration file Augu
4. The image was downloaded as the first file by a relocatabl image The image will execute in place from Flash memory like a run from Flash image The image was downloaded not as the first file by a relocat able image including down load into the second partition The relocatable image relocates the image before storage in Flash memory Hence the image will execute in place from Flash memory like any other run from Flash image Page 7 28 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images Configure the Router to Automatically Boot from Flash Memory To configure the router to boot automatically from Flash memory per form one of these tasks in global configuration mode e Boot the first bootable file found in any partition boot system flash flash flash e Boot the first bootable file from the specified partition boot system flash flash flash partition number e Boot the specified file from the first partition boot system flash flash flash filename e Boot the specified file from the specified partition boot system flash flash flash partition number filename The result of booting a relocatable image from Flash memory depends on where and how the image was downloaded into Flash memory Configure a Flash Partition as a TFTP Serve To configure a Flash partition as a TFTP server perform one of these tasks in global configuration mode e Sp
5. Page 7 12 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images ever you can list the comments in configuration files stored on a TFTP server Configure the Cisco IOS software from the Terminal When you configure the software from the terminal it executes the commands you enter at the system prompts To configure the software from the terminal 1 Enter configuration mode and select the terminal option configure terminal 2 Enter the necessary configuration commands 3 To exit configuration mode press lt Ctrl Z gt 4 Save the configuration file to your startup configuration This step saves the configuration to NVRAM copy running config startup config In this example the software is configured from the terminal The comment The following command provides the router host name identifies the purpose of the next command line The hostname command changes the router name from router to router2 By pressing lt Ctrl Z gt the user quits configuration mode Fi nally the copy running config startup config com mand saves the current configuration to the startup configuration Routerl configure terminal Routerl config The following command provides the router host name Routerl config hostname router2 Z Router2 copy running config startup config When the startup configuration is NVRAM it stores the current con figuration information in text format as configuration commands re
6. Specify Preferred Routes When multiple routing processes are running in the same router for CLNS it is possible for the same route to be advertised by more than one routing process The Cisco IOS software always picks the route whose routing protocol has the lowest administrative distance The lower the value of the distance the more preferred the route By default these administrative distances are assigned e Static routes 10 e ISO IGRP routes 100 e IS IS routes 110 In router configuration mode change an administrative distance for a route distance value clns If you want an ISO IGRP prefix route to override a static route you must set the distance for the routing process to be lower than 10 Configure ES IS Hello Packet Parameters You can configure ES IS parameters for communication between end systems and routers In general you should leave these parameters at their default values When configuring an ES IS router be aware of these items e ES IS does not run over X 25 links unless the broadcast facility is enabled August 1997 Page 9 49 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit e ES hello packets and IS hello packets are sent without options Op tions in received packets are ignored ISs and ESs periodically send out hello packets to advertise their avail ability The frequency of these hello packets can be configured The recipient of a hello packet creates an adjacency entry for t
7. IP address pooling consists of a pool of IP addresses from which an in coming interface can provide an IP address to a remote node through the IP Control Protocol IPCP address negotiation process It also en hances the flexibility of configuration by allowing multiple types of pooling to be active simultaneously IP address pooling allows the configuration of a global default address pooling mechanism per interface configuration of the mechanism and per interface configuration of a specific address or pool name Peer Address Allocation A peer IP address can be allocated to an interface through several methods e Dialer map lookup This method is used only if the peer requests an IP address if no other peer IP address has been assigned and if the interface is a member of a dialer group e PPP or SLIP EXEC command An asynchronous dial up user can enter a peer IP address or host name when PPP or SLIP is invoked from the command line The address is used for the current session and then discarded e IPCP negotiation If the peer presents a peer IP address during IPCP address negotiation and if no other peer address is assigned the presented address is acknowledged and used in the current ses sion e Chat script The IP address in the dialer map command entry that started the script is assigned to the interface and overrides any previously assigned peer IP address e VTY Protocol translation Th translate command can defin th
8. Page 9 44 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps 2 In interface configuration mode apply filter expressions to an in terface e Apply a filter expression to frames forwarded in or out of an inter face clns access group name in out e Apply a filter expression to ISIS adjacencies isis adjacency filter name match all e Apply a filter expression to ISO IGRP adjacencies iso igrp adjacency filter name e Apply a filter expression to ES or IS adjacencies clns adjacency filter es is name Examples CLNS Filter This example allows packets if the address starts with either 47 0005 or 47 0023 It implicitly denies any other address clns filter set US OR NORDUNET permit 47 0005 clns filter set US OR NORDUNET permit 47 0023 Redistribute Routing Information In addition to running multiple routing protocols simultaneously the Cisco IOS software can redistribute information from one routing pro cess to another You can also configure the Cisco IOS software to do interdomain d ynamic routing by configuring two routing processes and two NETs thereby putting the router into two domains and redis tributing the routing information between the domains Routers con figured this way are referred to as border routers If you have a router that is in two routing domains you might want to redistribute routing information between the two domains Warning It is not necessary to u
9. ROM Monitor Mode Commands Global Configuration Mode Commands These command modes are accessible from global configuration mode e Interface Configuration Mode Commands e Subinterface Configuration Mode Commands e Router Configuration Mode e IPX Router Configuration Mode e Route Map Configuration Mode e Key Chain Configuration Mode e Key Chain Key Configuration Mode e Response Time Reporter Configuration Mod e Access List Configuration Mode The following table lists the command modes how to access each mode the prompt while in each mode and how to exit each mode The prompts listed assume that the default device name is Router unless it has been changed during initial configuration using the setup com mand Refer to the product user guide for information on the setup fa cility You can also change the host name using thehostname global August 1997 2524UM Page 4 3 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit configuration command The following table does not include all o the possible ways to access or exit each command mode For all command modes typing a question mark at the prompt will list the commands available Refer to Context Sensitive Help for more information Page 4 4 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 4 Understanding the User Interface ration mode type configure Command Mode Access Method Prompt Exit Method User EXEC Log in Router
10. e Configure XOT Remote X 25 Rout e Configure a Locally Switched PVC e Configure an XOT Remote PVC You may also need to configure additional X 25 routing features as re quired for your network Enable X 25 Routing In global configuration mode enable X 25 routing to use local switch ing or XOT by typing x25 routing use tcp if defs The use tcp if defs keyword is used by some routers that re ceive remote routed calls from older versions of XOT it might be needed if the originating router cannot be migrated to a new softwar release Example X 25 Route Address Pattern Matching This example shows how to route X 25 calls with addresses whos first four Data Network Identification Code DNIC digits are 1111 to interface serial 3 and to change the DNIC field in the addresses pre sented to the equipment connected to that interface to 2222 The 1 in Page 12 30 August 1997 2524UM Pil Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps the rewrite pattern indicates the portion of the original address matched by the digits following the 1111 DNIC x25 route 1111 substitute dest 2222 1 interface serial 3 Figure 12 3 shows a more contrived command intended to illustrate the power of the rewriting scheme Figure 12 3 X 25 Route Address Pattern Matching y25 route i 3 1 1 1 11 substtute dest AAA interface senal 0 4 l The command in Figure 12 3 causes all X 25 calls with 14 di
11. Configure TCP IP Header Compression TCP IP header compression as described by RFC 1144 is designed to improve the efficiency of bandwidth use over low speed serial links August 1997 2524UM Page 13 39 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit A typical TCP IP packet includes a 40 byte datagram header Once a connection is established the header information need not be repeated in every packet that is sent Reconstructing a smaller header that iden tifies the connection and indicates the fields that changed and the amount of change reduces the number of bytes transmitted The aver age compressed header is 10 bytes long For this algorithm to function packets must arrive in order If packets arrive out of order the reconstruction will appear to create regular TCP IP packets but the packets will not match the original Note Because priority queuing changes the order in which packets are transmitted enabling priority queueing on th interface is not recommended You can configure TCP IP header compression in either of two ways e Configure an Individual IP Map for TCP IP Header Compression e Configure an Interface for TCP IP Header Compression Note If you configure an interface with Cisco encapsulation and TCP IP header compression Frame Relay IP maps inherit the compression characteristics of the interface However if you configure the interface with IETF encapsulation the interface cannot be configured for compres
12. Display information about the CLNS network show clns Display the entries in the CLNS routing cache show clns cache Display ES neighbor entries including the associated areas show clns es neighbors type number detail Display filter expressions show clns filter expr name detail Display filter sets show clns filter set name List the CLNS specific or ES IS information about each interface show clns interface type number Display IS neighbor entries according to the area in which they are located show clns is neighbors type number detail August 1997 2524UM Page 9 57 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit e Display both ES and IS neighbors show clns neighbors type number detail e List the protocol specific information for each IS IS or ISO IGRP routing process in this router show clns protocol domain area tag e Display all the destinations to which this router knows how to route packets show clns route nsap e Display information about the CLNS packets this router has seen show clns traffic e Display the IS IS link state database show isis database level 1 level 2 11 12 detail 1spid e Display the IS IS Leve 11 routing table show isis routes e Display a history of the SPF calculations for IS IS show isis spf log e Display all route maps configured or only the one specified show route map map name e Discover the paths take
13. Once you have configured Flash memory you might want to configure the system using th configure terminal command with the Page 7 22 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images no boot system flash configuration command to revert to booting from ROM For example you might want to revert to booting from ROM if you do not yet need this functionality if you choose to boot from a network server or if you do not have the proper image in Flash memory After you enter the no boot system flash com mand use the copy running config startup config command to save the new configuration command to the startup con figuration Copy Configuration Files from the Router to a Network Server You can copy configuration files from the router to a TFTP server You might do this to back up a current configuration file to a server before changing its contents allowing you to later restore the original Usually the configuration file that you copy to must already exist on the TFTP server and be globally writable before the TFTP server al lows you to write to it To store configuration information on a TFTP network server com plete these tasks in the EXEC mode 1 Specify that the running or startup configuration file be stored on a network server copy running config startup config tftp 2 Enter the IP address of the network server ip address 3 Enter the name of the configuration file to store on the se
14. Serial Interfaces eae 1 Press lt Enter gt or enter yes to configure serial port 0 Configuring interface Serialo Is this interface in use yes 2 Determine which protocols you want on the synchronous serial in terface and enter the appropriate responses In this example th system is being configured for IP AppleTalk and IPX Configure IP on this interface yes Configure IP unnumbered on this interface Loo IP address for this interface 172 16 73 1 Number of bits in sunned field 8 Class B network is 172 16 0 0 8 subnet bits mask is 255 255 255 0 Configure AppleTalk on this interface no yes Extended AppleTalk network yes AppleTalk starting cable range 2 4 AppleTalk ending cable range 3 4 AppleTalk zone name myzone ZZ Serial AppleTalk additional zone name Configure IPX on this interface no yes IPX network number 2 B002 August 1997 Page 16 11 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 3 Configure the second synchronous serial interface for example as Configuring interface Seriall Is this interface in use yes Configure IP on this interface yes Configure IP unnumbered on this interface no IP address for this interface 172 16 74 2 Number of bits in subset field 8 Class B network is 172 16 0 0 8 subset bits mask is 255 255 255 0 Configure AppleTalk on this interface no yes AppleTalk starting cable range 3 5 AppleTalk ending c
15. To specify the access conditions restrict incoming and outgoing con nections between a particular Virtual Terminal VTY line into a Cisco access server and the addresses in an access list by typing in global configuration mode x29 access list access list number deny permit x121l address An access list can contain any number of lines The lists are processed in the order in which you type the entries The first match causes the permit or deny condition If an X 121 address does not match any of the entries in the access list access is denied Example X 29 Access List This example illustrates an X 29 access list Incoming permit condi tions are set for all IP hosts that have specific characters in their names All X 25 connections to a printer are denied Outgoing connections are list restricted Permit all IP hosts beginning with VMS Deny X 25 connections to th printer on line 5 access list 1 permit 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 lat access list 1 permit VMS x29 access list 1 deny line vty 5 access class 1 i Permit outgoing connections for other lines Permit IP access with the network 172 30 access list 2 permit 172 30 0 0 0 0 255 255 Permit X 25 connections to Infonet hosts only x29 access list 2 permit 31370 line vty 0 16 access class 2 ou Page 12 46 August 1997 2524UM Create an X 29 Profile Script Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps Apply an Access List to a Line
16. When you configure only ISO CLNS and not routing protocols the Cisco IOS software only makes forwarding decisions It does not per form other routing related functions In such a configuration the soft ware compiles a table of adjacency data but does not advertise this information The only information that is inserted into the routing table is the NSAP and NET addresses of this router static routes and adja cency information You can route ISO CLNS on some interfaces and transparently bridge it on other interfaces simultaneously To do this you must enable con current routing and bridging by using th bridge crb command Dynamic Routing Cisco supports these two dynamic routing protocols for ISO CLNP networks e ISOIGRP e IS IS When dynamically routing you can choose either ISO IGRP or IS IS or you can enable both routing protocols at the same time Both routing protocols support the concept of areas Within an area all routers know how to reach all the system IDs Between areas routers know how to reach the proper area ISO IGRP supports three levels of routing system routing area rout ing and interdomainrout ing Routing across domains interdomai nrouting can be static or dynamic with ISO IGRP IS IS supports two levels of routing station routing within an area and are routing between areas Intermediate Systems IS and End Systems ES Some ISs keep track of how to communicate with all the ESs in their
17. map list bermuda source addr E164 123456 dest addr E164 654321 map class frame rel ip 131 108 177 100 appletalk 1000 2 class rainbow frame relay idle timer 60 map class frame rel frame relay cir in 64000 frame relay cir out 64000 class hawaii lay rainbow lay hawaii Configure SVCs on a Subinterface optional To configure Frame Relay SVCs on a subinterface perform all th tasks in the previous section except assigning a map group Then be ginning in global configuration mode complete these tasks 1 Specify a subinterface of the main interface configured for SVC operation interface serial number subinterface number multipoint point to point August 1997 2524UM Page 13 9 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 2 Specify the subinterface IP address if needed ip address ip address mask 3 Assign a map group to the subinterface map group group name Example SVCs on a Subinterface This example configures a point to point interface for SVC operation This example assumes that the main serial 0 interface has been config ured for signalling and that SVC operation has been enabled on th main interface int s 0 1 point point Define the map group details are specified under the map list holiday command map group holiday Associate the map group with a specific source and destination map list holiday local addr X121 lt xX12l addr gt dest addr E164
18. other routers reached by the same physical interface might not have received the routing update Rathe than forcing you to connect routers by separate physical interfaces the AI2524 provides subinterfaces that are treated as separate interfaces You can separate hosts into subinterfaces on a physical interface Sep aration does not affect the X 25 protocol and routing processes recog nize each subinterface as a separate source of routing updates enabling all subinterfaces to receive routing updates Understand Point to Point and Multipoint Subinterfaces There are two types of subinterfaces point to point and multipoint Subinterfaces are implicitly multipoint unless configured as point to point A point to point subinterface is used to encapsulate protocols between two hosts An X 25 point to point subinterface will accept only a sin gle encapsulation command such as x25 map or x25 pvc fora given protocol so there can be only one destination for the protocol However you can use multiple encapsulation commands one for each protocol or multiple protocols for one map or PVC All protocol traf fic routed to a point to point subinterface is forwarded to the one des Page 12 14 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps tination host defined for the protocol Because only one destination is defined for the interface the routing process need not consult the des tination address in the datagrams
19. yes interface rnetO no yes Configure AppleTalk on this inte Extended AppleTalk network AppleTalk AppleTalk AppleTalk zone name AppleTalk additional zone name Configure IPX on this interface IPX network number 2 3 starting cable range ending cable range myzone Configuring interface Seriall Is this interface in use yes Configure IP on this interface Configure IP unnumbered on this Assign to which interface Eth ESTs ZZ Serial rface no yes yes 2 3 3 no yes yes interface rnetO yes Configure AppleTalk on this inte Extended AppleTalk network rface yes yes Page 5 22 August 1997 2524UM Con Con Con Con Con Con Con Con Con Con Con Con Con Con Con Con AppleTalk starting cable range AppleTalk ending cable range 2 AppleTalk zone name 1k additional zone name IPX on this interface IPX network number 2 face Asyncl IPX network number 4 AppleTa Configure figuring inter Default client figuring inter Default client figuring inter Default client figuring inter Default client figuring inter Default client figuring inter Default client figuring inter Default client figuring inter Default client figuring inter Default client figuring inter Default client figuring inter Default client figuring inter Default client
20. 172 16 72 11 172 16 72 12 172576272013 172 16 72 14 172576272315 172 16 72 16 17271672 7 172 16 72 18 August 1997 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Default client IP address for this interface The following configuration command script was created hostname Router enable secret 5 1S krIgSemfYm 1OwHVspDuS8Gy0K enable password ww line vty 0 4 password ww snmp server community public no decnet routing ip routing line 1 16 speed 57600 appletalk routing ipx routing flowcontrol hardware modem inout arap network 20 ARA Dialins line 1 16 arap enable autoselect Turn off IPX to prevent network conflicts Ethernet0 inter face no ipx network inter face Serialo no ipx network inter face Seriall no ipx network inter ip address 172 16 72 2 255 255 255 0 appletalk cable range 1 1 1 204 face Etherneto0 appletalk zone Sales ipx network 1 no mop enabled interface Serialo no shutdown no ip address ip unnumbered Ethernet0O appletalk cable range 3 3 appletalk zone ZZ Serial ipx network 3 no mop enabled interface Seriall no ip address ip unnumbered Ethernet0 172 16 72 19 Page 5 24 August 1997 2524UM rid Chapter 5 Using AutoInstall appletalk cable range 2 2 2 2 appletalk zone ZZ Serial ipx network 2 no mop enabled I Interface Asyncl ipx network 4 ip unnumbered Ethernet0 async
21. 2 Associate networks with an IGRP routing process network network number IGRP sends updates to the interfaces in the specified networks If an interface s network is not specified it will not be advertised in any IGRP update It is not necessary to have a registered autonomous system number to use IGRP If you do not have a registered number you can create your own We recommend that if you do have a registered number you use it to identify the IGRP process Allow Point to Point Updates for IGRP Because IGRP is normally a broadcast protocol in order for IGRP routing updates to reach point to point or nonbroadcast networks you must configure the Cisco IOS software to permit this exchange of rout ing information To permit information exchange define a neighboring router by typ ing this command in router configuration mode neighbor ip address To control the set of interfaces with which to exchange routing up dates you can disable the sending of routing updates on specified in terfaces by configuring th passive interface command Define Unequal Cost Load Balancing IGRP can simultaneously use an asymmetric set of paths for a given destination This feature is known as unequal cost load balancing Un equal cost load balancing allows traffic to be distributed among up to four unequal cost paths to provide greater overall output and reliabil ity Alternate path variance that is the difference in desirability be twee
22. 3 dialer load threshold 128 In this example the value of 128 means that when the first B chan nel reaches 50 percent of its bandwidth capacity 128 equals 50 percent of 255 the second B channel will be activated to assist with the bandwidth load 7 Enter the access list command to configure the ISDN line to come up whenever IP packets are to be sent Router config if access list access list number permit ip sourcerouter ipnetwork sourcerouter subnetmask targetrouter ipnetwork targetrouter subnetmask Router config dialer list groupnumber list access list number 8 Configure a static route to allow connectivity to the target router s local network Enter the network number of the target router s local IP network and subnet mask and the IP address of the target router s BRI port Router config 3 ip route targetrouter_ipnetwork subnetmask targetBRIport_ipaddress 9 Enter the exit command to exit configuration mode 10 Enter the copy running config startup config command to save the configuration to NVRAM Configuring This section explains how to configure the 4 wire 56 64 kbps DSU Switched 56 CSU WAN modules for switched 56 kbps circuit switched service The 4 wire 56 64 kbps DSU CSU WAN module is configured for DDS as the factory default but it can be configured for either switched 56 64 kbps service or DDS Take these steps to configure the 4 wire 56 64 kbps DSU CSU WAN module for circuit s
23. August 1997 2524UM Page 8 15 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit AI2524 RIP TCP IP Configuration Routing Information Protocol RIP uses broadcast User Datagram Protocol UDP data packets to exchange routing information The Cisco IOS software sends routing information updates advertise ments every 30 seconds If a router does not receive an update from another router for 180 seconds or more it marks the routes served by the nonupdating router as being unusable If there is still no update after 240 seconds the router removes all routing table entries for the nonupdating router RIP sends updates to the interfaces in the specified networks If an in terface s network is not specified it will not be advertised in any RIP update RIP Configuration Task List To configure RIP complete the tasks outlined in the nest sections You must enable RIP The remaining tasks are optional e Enable RIP e Allow Point to Point Updates for RI e Specify a RIP Version e Enable RIP Authentication e Disable Route Summarization e Run IGRP and RIP Concurrently e Disable the Validation of Source IP Addresses Enable RIP To enable RIP perform these tasks starting in global configuration mode 1 Enable a RIP routing process which places you in router configu ration mode router rip 2 Associate a network with a RIP routing process network network number Allow Point to Point Updates for RIP R
24. Chapter 5 Using AutoInstall The network confg file is a configuration file generally shared by sev eral routers In this case it maps the IP address of the new router just obtained dynamically to the name of the new router The file network confg must reside on a reachable TFTP server and must be globally readable This is an example of a minimal network confg file that maps the IP address of the new router 131 108 10 2 to the name newrouter The address of the new router was learned via SLARP and is based on ex isting s IP address of 131 108 10 1 ip host newrouter 131 108 10 2 If you are not using AutoInstall over Frame Relay the host portion of the address must be 1 or 2 AutoInstall over Frame Relay does not hav this addressing constraint If newrouter does not receive a network confg or a cisconet cfg file or if the IP address to host name mapping does not match the newly ac quired IP address newrouter sends a DNS broadcast If DNS is con figured and has an entry that maps newrouter s SLARP BOOTP or RARP acquired IP address to its name newrouter successfully re solves its name If DNS does not have an entry that maps the new router s SLARP BOOTP or RARP acquired address to its name the new router cannot resolve its host name The new router attempts to download a default configuration file as described in the next section and failing that en ters setup mode or enters user EXEC mode with AutolInstall over Fra
25. Enable keepalive X 25 Level 2 parameters Link Access Procedure Balanced LLC2 Interface Subcommands IBM Lan Manager Assign a priority group Configure internal loopback on an interface Manually set interface MAC address DEC MOP server commands Set the interface Maximum Transmission Unit MTU Use a defined NETBIOS access list or enable name caching Negate a command or set its defaults Configure NTP Point to point protocol Assign a priority group to an interface Enables pulsing of DTR during resets PUP interface subcommands SDLC commands Configure SDLC to LLC2 translation Shutdown the selected interfac Modify SMDS parameters Configure interface for source route bridging STUN interface subcommands Assign a transmit interface to a receive only interface xpression August 1997 2524UM Page 4 13 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit transmitter delay Set dead time after transmitting a datagram tunnel protocol over protocol tunneling tx queue limit Configure card level transmit queue limit vines Vines interface subcommands xns XNS interface subcommands Subinterface Configuration Mode Commands You can configure multiple virtual interfaces called subinterfaces on a single physical interface This feature is supported on serial inter faces with Frame Relay encapsulation Subinterfaces appear to be distinct physical interfaces to the various protocols For example Fr
26. In line configuration mode apply an access list to a virtual line by re stricting incoming and outgoing connections between a particular vir tual terminal line into a Cisco access server and the addresses in an access list access class access list number in The access list number is used for incoming TCP access and for in coming PAD access For TCP access the protocol translator uses the defined IP access lists For incoming PAD connections the protocol translator uses the defined X 29 access list If you want to have access restrictions only on one of the protocols create an access list that per mits all addresses for the other protocols You can create an X 29 profile script for th translate command When an X 25 connection is established the protocol translator acts as if an X 29 Set Parameter packet had been sent containing the parame ters and values set by this command In global configuration mode create an X 29 profile script x29 profile name parameter value parameter value Example X 29 Profile Script This profile script turns local edit mode on when the connection is made and establishes local echo and line termination upon receipt of a Return The name linemode is used with the translate command to activate this script x29 profile linemode 2 1 3 2 15 1 translate tcp 172 30 1 26 x25 55551234 profile linemode August 1997 2524UM Page 12 47 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Configure LAP
27. Press the lt Space gt bar Redisplay the current command line Press lt Ctrl L gt or lt Ctrl R gt Transpose mistyped characters The character to the left of the cursor will be transposed with the characte located at the cursor Press lt Ctrl T gt Capitalize at the cursor Press lt Esc gt then lt C gt Change the word at the cursor to low ercase Press lt Esc gt then lt L gt Capitalize letters from the cursor to the end of the word Press lt Esc gt then lt U gt Insert a system code for this purpose Press lt Ctrl V gt or lt Esc Q gt Disable enhanced editing mode and revert to the editing mode of previous releases terminal no edit ing Page 4 25 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Edit Command Lines that Wrap The Cisco IOS software assumes that you have a terminal screen that is 80 characters wide If your terminal displays a different number of characters on each line use the terminal width command When the cursor reaches the right margin the command line shifts 10 spaces to the left You cannot see the first ten characters of the line but you can scroll back and check the syntax at the beginning of the com mand To scroll back press lt Ctrl B gt or the left arrow key repeatedly until you scroll back to the beginning of the command entry or press lt Ctrl A gt to return directly to the beginning of the line In this example
28. To reexecute the commands located in the startup configuration type this command in privileged EXEC mode configure memory Clear the Configuration Information To clear the contents of your startup configuration type this command in EXEC mode erase startup config If you try to erase or delete the configuration file specified by the CONFIG_FILE or BOOTLDR environment variable the system prompts you to confirm the deletion Also if you try to erase or delete the last valid system image specified in the BOOT environment vari able the system prompts you to confirm this deletion This example erases the myconfig file from a Flash memory card in serted in slot 0 Router erase slot0O myconfig This example deletes the myconfig file from a Flash memory card in serted in slot 0 Router delete slot0 myconfig August 1997 Page 7 11 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Perform General Startup Tasks When modifying your routing environment you perform general star tup tasks For example to modify a configuration file you enter con figuration mode You also modify the configuration register boot field to tell the router if and how to load a system image upon startup Also instead of using the default system image and configuration file to start up you can specify a particular system image and configuration file that the router uses to start up General Startup Task List General startup tasks include e E
29. Using AutoInstall Introduction Preparing for AutoInstall This chapter provides information about AutoInstall a procedure that allows you to configure a new router automatically and dynamically The AutoInstall procedure involves connecting a new router to a net work where an existing router is preconfigured turning on the new router and enabling it with a configuration file that is automatically downloaded from a Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP server Take these steps to prepare your router for the AutoInstall process 1 Attach the WAN cable to the router 2 Turn ON power to the router The router will load the operating system image from Flash mem ory If the remote end of the WAN connection is connected and properly configured the AutoInstall process will begin If AutoInstall successfully completes you can write the configu ration data to the router s NVRAM Perform the following step to complete this task 3 Enterthe copy running config startup config com mand Router copy running config startup config Taking this step saves the configuration settings that the AutoIn stall process created in the router If you do not do this your con figuration will be lost the next time you reload the router The next sections provide AutoInstall requirements and an overview of its procedure For information about starting Autolnstall refer to Perform the AutoInstall Procedur August 1997 2524UM Page 5
30. Using the System Configuration Dialog Refer to this table for ISDN switch types Country ISDN Switch Type Description Australia basic ts013 Australian TS013 switches Europe basic 1tr6 German ITR6 ISDN switches basic nwnet3 Norwegian NET3 ISDN switches phase 1 basic net3 NET3 ISDN switches UK and others vn2 French VN2 ISDN switches vn3 French VN3 ISDN switches Japan ntt Japanese NTT ISDN switches North basic 5ess AT amp T basic rate switches America basic dms100 NT DMS 100 basic rate switches basic nil National ISDN 1 switches New basic nznet3 New Zealand NET3 switches Zealand August 1997 2524UM Page 6 5 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Page 6 6 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images Introduction This chapter outlines the steps to load and maintain system images microcode images and configuration files These instructions describe copying system images from routers to network servers and vice versa displaying and comparing different configuration files and listing the Cisco IOS software version running on the router This chapter also explains how to manually load system images from ROM monitor so you can successfully boot the router when typical startup processes malfunction e System images contain the system software e Microcode images contain microcode to be downloade
31. a Router A Routerp 7 a T T DTEJIII DEM Router A router iso igrp test proc net 49 0001 aaaa aaaa aaaa 00 interface serial 1 clns router iso igrp test proc 1 Assume the host is a DTE and encapsulates x 25 encapsulation x25 2 Define the X 121 address of 31101 for serial 1 X25 address 31101 3 Setup an entry for the other side of the X 25 link Router B x25 map clns 31101 broadcast Page 9 52 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps Router B router iso igrp test proc net 49 0001 bbbb bbbb bbbb 00 interface serial 2 clns router iso igrp test proc 1 encapsulation x25 dce 2 X25 address 31102 3 Configure this side as a DCE Define the X 121 address of 31102 for serial 2 Configure the NSAP of Router A and accept reverse charges x25 map clns 31101 broadcast accept reverse Enhance ISO Generally you do not need to change the router s default settings for y y 8 8 CLNS CLNS packet switching but there are some modifications you can Performance make when you decide to make changes in your network s perfor mance The following sections describe ISO CLNS parameters that you can change Specify the MTU Size Disable Checksums Disable Fast Switching Through the Cache Set the Congestion Threshold Transmit Error Protocol Data Units ERPDUs Control Redirect Protocol Data Units RDPDUs Configure Parameters for Locally
32. address 131 108 6 123 255 255 255 0 1 OP O interface Serial0 p address 150 150 150 123 255 255 255 0 encapsulation ppp interface Tunnell tunnel source Serial0 tunnel destination 108 131 123 231 fis interface Seriall ip address 131 108 7 123 255 255 255 0 encapsulation frame relay frame relay intf type dce frame relay route 300 interface Tunnell 200 August 1997 Page 13 37 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual rit Disable or Reenable Frame Relay Inverse ARP Frame Relay Inverse ARP is a method of building dynamic address mappings in Frame Relay networks running IP and Novell IPX In verse ARP allows the router or access server to discover the protocol address of a device associated with the virtual circuit Inverse ARP creates dynamic address mappings as contrasted with the frame relay map command which defines static mappings between a specific protocol address and a specific DLCI Inverse ARP is enabled by default but can be disabled explicitly for a given protocol and DLCI pair Disable or reenable Inverse ARP under these conditions e Disable Inverse ARP for a selected protocol and DLCI pair when you know that the protocol is not supported on the other end of th connection e Reenable Inverse ARP for a protocol and DLCI pair if conditions or equipment change and the protocol is then supported on the oth er end of the connection Note If you change from a point to point
33. config ISDN switch type switch type 4 Enter the BRI interface encapsulation method PPP authentica tion type target router s IP address and ISDN number to dial and the dialer group number Router config interface bri 0 Router config if encapsulation ppp Router config if ppp authentication chap Router config if dial map ip targetrouter_ipaddress targetrouter_phonenumber Router config if dialer group groupnumber se OSE Do not use periods or hyphens when you are entering dialing num bers Note The ISDN BRI interface provides dial backup for the AI2524 card When a connection is requested the system checks the username presented for validity then dials back the number associated with the username 5 Some ISDN switch types such as Basic NI1 or DMS 100 switch service require you to configure a service profile identifie SPID Enter the SPID information substituting the appropriat entries for your installation Router config if isdn spidl SPID_no phone_number Router config if isdn spid2 SPID_no phone_number August 1997 Page 16 13 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 6 To set up a second B channel for bandwidth on demand enter the load threshold command to set the ISDN load threshold The load threshold determines the percentage of network loading at which the second ISDN B channel is triggered The value ranges from 1 to 255 100 percent Router config if
34. face defaults for the flow control parameters these options must b used to specify the values Not all networks will allow a PVC to be de fined with arbitrary flow control values Additionally the Data bit D bit is supported if negotiated PVCs allow the D bit procedure because there is no call setup to negotiate its use Both restricted and unrestricted fast select are also supported and are transparently handled by the software No configuration is required for use of the D bit or fast select facilities Define the Virtual Circuit Packet Hold Queue Size To define the maximum number of packets that can be held whil virtual circuit is unable to send data type in interface configuration mode x25 hold queue queue size An encapsulation virtual circuit s hold queue size is determined when itis created the x25 hold queue command does not affect ex isting virtual circuits This command also defines the hold queue siz of encapsulation PVCs Restrict Map Usage An X 25 map can be restricted so that it will not be used to place calls or so that it will not be considered when incoming calls are mapped To restrict X 25 map usage use the following map options as needed e Restrict incoming calls from a map x25 map protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address no incoming e Restrict outgoing calls from a map x25 map protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 addr
35. lt E164 addr gt Specify destination protocol addresses for a map class ip 131 108 177 100 class hawaii IETF appletalk 1000 2 class rainbow IETF broadcast Define a map class and its QOS settings map class hawaii frame relay cir in 2000000 frame relay cir out 56000 frame relay be 9000 Page 13 10 August 1997 2524UM map class rainbow Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps Define another map class and its QOS settings frame relay cir in 64000 frame relay idle timer 2000 Configure a Map Class Beginning in global configuration mode configure a map class 1 10 11 Specify the Frame Relay map class name and enter map class con figuration mode map class frame relay map class name Specify a custom queue list to be used for the map class frame relay custom queue list list number Assign a priority queue to virtual circuits associated with the map class frame relay priority group list number Enable BECN feedback to throttle the frame transmission rate frame relay becn response enable Specify the inbound committed information rate CIR frame relay cir in bps Specify the outbound committed information rate CIR frame relay cir out bps Set the minimum acceptable incoming CIR frame relay mincir in bps Set the minimum acceptable outgoing CIR frame relay mincir out bps Set the incoming committed burst size Bc frame relay bc in bits Set the outgoing committ
36. setup command facility Refer to Use Setup for Configuration Change for details on the setup command After modifying and saving your routing environment s unique config urations you might want to store them on a network server You can use these network server copies of system images and configuration files as backup copies Store System Images and Configuration Files Task List To store system images and configuration files e Copy System Images from Flash Memory to a Network Server e Copy Configuration Files from the Router to a Network Server Copy System Images from Flash Memory to a Network Server You can copy system images from Flash memory to a TFTP server You can use this server copy of the system image as a backup copy or you can use it to verify that the copy in Flash is the same as the original file on disk In some implementations of TFTP you must first create a dummy file on the TFTP server and give it read write and execute permis sions before copying a file over it Refer to your TFTP documentation for more information To copy a system image to a TFTP network server perform these tasks in EXEC mode 1 Optional If you do not already know it learn the exact spelling of the system image filename in Flash memory show flash all August 1997 2524UM Page 7 21 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Router show flash all 2 Copy the system image from Flash memory to a TFTP server
37. terfaces that are being used with IGRP in areal environment will have bandwidth settings This is a 9 6 Kbaud line These Level 3 parameters are default flow control values they need to match the PDN defaults The values used by anSVC are negotiable on a per call basis You must specify an X 121 address to be assigned to the X 25 inter face by the PDN These Level 3 parameters have been set to match the network You generally need to change some Level 3 parameters most often those listed below You might not need to change any Level 2 parameters however Page 12 8 August 1997 2524UM x25 map IP 172 25 9 3 31370019134 ACCEPT REVERSE Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps These commands configure the X 25 map If you want to exchange routing updates with any of the routers they would need broadcast flags If the X 25 network is the only path to the routers static routes are generally used to save on packet charges If there is a redundant path it might be desirable to run a dynamic routing protocol x25 map IP 172 25 9 2 31370053087 transmitter delay 1000 Configure Additional X 25 Interface Parameters ACCEPT REVERSE allows collect calls If the PDN cannot handle fast back to back frames use the trans mitter delay command to slow down the interface Some X 25 applications have less common or special needs Several X 25 parameters are available to modify the X 25 protocol behavio
38. 1 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit AutoInstall Requirements The AutoInstall process is designed to configure the router automati cally after connection to your WAN In order for AutoInstall to work properly a Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP host on your network must be preconfigured to provide the required configuration files The TCP IP host may exist anywhere on the net work as long as these two conditions are maintained The host must be on the remote side of the router s synchronous serial connection to the WAN User Datagram Protocol UDP broadcasts to and from the router and the TCP IP host must be enabled This functionality is coordinated by your system administrator at the site where the TCP IP host is located You should not attempt to use Autolnstall unless the required files have been provided on the TCP IP host Note AutoInstall works on synchronous serial connections only The 2 wire switched 56 kbps DSU CSU module op erates on switched 56 kbps circuits only therefore you cannot use it for AutoInstall In addition your system must meet these requirements Routers must be physically attached to the network using one o more of the following interface types Ethernet Token Ring Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI serial with High Level Dat Link Control HDLC encapsulation or serial with Frame Relay encapsulation HDLC is the default serial encapsulation If the Au toIn
39. 23 February lt 1997 2035 gt Year Router clock set 13 32 00 23 February Page 4 22 August 1997 2524UM Router clock set 13 32 Command History Features Chapter 4 Understanding the User Interface Enter the year using the correct syntax and press lt Enter gt to execut the command 00 23 February 1997 The Cisco IOS software user interface provides a history or record o commands that you have entered This feature is particularly useful fo recalling long or complex commands or entries including access lists By default the system records 10 command lines in its history buffer The following commands are entered from user EXEC mode Warning Many of the commands described in this section refer to arrow keys as well as alternate keystrokes Please note that arrow keys function only on ANSI compatible termi nals suchas VT100s History Commands Command Format Set the number of command lines the system will record during the current terminal session terminal history size number of lines Reset the number of lines saved in th history buffer to the default of 10 lines terminal no his tory size Recall commands in the history buffer beginning with the most recent command Repeat the key sequence to recall successively older commands Press lt Ctrl P gt or the up arrow key Return to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling com mands with lt Ctrl P gt or th
40. 3 Enable the router to operate as a station router and an interare router is type level 1 2 interfac thernet 0 clns router isis areal 4 Specify a cost of 5 for the level 1 routes isis metric 5 level 1 5 Establish a level 1 adjacency isis circuit type level 1 I interfac thernet 1 clns router isis areal isis metric 2 level 2 isis circuit type level 2 only I interface serial 0 clns router isis areal isis circuit type level 1 2 6 Set the priority for serial 0 to 3 fora level 1 adjacency isis priority 3 level isis priority 1 level ISO CLNS Dynamic Route Redistribution This example illustrates route redistribution between IS IS and ISO IGRP domains In this case the IS IS domain is on Ethernet interface 0 the ISO IGRP doma inis on serial interface 0 The IS IS routing pro cess is assigned a null tag the ISO IGRP routing process is assigned a Page 9 22 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps tag of remote domain Most comment lines have been eliminated from this example to avoid redundancy router isis net 39 0001 0001 0000 0c00 1111 00 1 Redistribute iso igrp routing information throughout remote do main redistribute iso igrp remote domai n router iso igrp remote domain net 39 0002 0001 0000 0c00 1111 00 2 Redistribute IS IS routing information redistribute isis interfac thernet 0 clns router isis interface se
41. AI2524 card When the AI2524 card boots it uses the BOOTP protocol to obtain its IP ad dress The AI2524 card then uses TFTP to transfer its configuration in formation from the AI198 card to the AI2524 card Any changes made to the AI2524 card s configuration must be stored back to the AI198 card to maintain full hot swap capability Here are two options for managing the AI2524 card configuration Always Modify the Configuration Using Menu 4 18 This option suggests that you use Menu 4 18 whenever you mak modifications to the AI2524 card configuration After you complete the modifications you can use the ENABL command to reset the AI2524 card This allows the changes to take affect Store the Configuration on the AI198 Card This option suggests that whenever you make modifications to the AI2524 card configuration using the AI2524 configuration mecha nism telnet to the card and change the configuration Quick Start Cis coWorks you must store the modifications on the AI198 card You can save the configuration to the AI198 card using TFTP on the AI2524 card Page 3 6 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 4 Understanding the User Interface Chapter 4 Understanding the User Interface Introduction Command Line Interface This chapter describes the features of the user interface The AI2524 user interface provides access to several different command modes Each command mode provides a group of related commands This chapter des
42. ANSI ITU Cisco to the switch August 1997 Page 13 5 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit The router decodes the reply and configures itself automatically If more than one reply is received the router configures itself according to the most recent reply accommodating intelligent switches that can handle multiple formats simultaneously Using an intelligent retry scheme LMI autosense attempts to deter mine the LMI type every N391 interval if initially unsuccessful De fault is 60 seconds which is 6 keep exchanges at 10 seconds each To make the typically transparent LMI autosense process visible to the user turn on debug frame Imi Every N391 interval the user will se three rapid status queries coming from the serial interface Configuring LMI Autosense No configuration options are provided You can turn off LMI au tosense by explicitly configuring an LMI type When the LMI type is written into NVRAM the next time the router powers up LMI au tosense is inactive Explicitly Configure the LMI If you want to configure the LMI and thus deactivate LMI autosense complete the tasks The tasks in the first two sections are required if you choose to configure the LMI e Set the LMI Typ e Set the LMI Keepalive Interval e Set the LMI Polling and Timer Intervals Set the LMI Type If the router or access server is attached to a public data network PDN the LMI type must match the type used on the public
43. Configuring If you have an ISDN BRI WAN module configure the BRI port for ISDN ISDN This section explains typical ISDN configurations for one or two B channels In the examples the BRI port is configured for IP routing and Point to Point Protocol PPP encapsulation Complete these steps to configure the router for a basic ISDN PPP connection on a single B channel or two B channels substituting th correct address and host names as appropriate for your network 1 Enter enable mode Router gt enable Password enable password 2 Enter the configure terminal command Router config term router Router Router Router Router Router RN194 3 If you have not already done so enter the isdn switch type command to configure the ISDN switch type config ISDN switth type switch type 4 Enter the BRI interface encapsulation method PPP authentica tion type target router s IP address and ISDN number to dial and the dialer group number config interface bri 0 config if encapsulation ppp config if ppp authentication chap config if dial map ip targetrouter_ipaddress targetrouter_phonenumber config if dialer group groupnumber Do not use periods or hyphens when you are entering dialing num bers Note The ISDN BRI interface provides dial backup for the AI2524 card When a connection is requested the system checks the username presented for validity then dials back the nu
44. Connecting to a WAN 0 ee eeceeecseecceecceeacecececeecnaecaeceneeesneseecenseeaeeeaseneeeae es 16 1 Configuring a e a L Meare eat eae oe it ede oe ties det ceed eet 16 1 Booting the Router for the First Time ee ee eeeeeseeeseeeneeeneeensecsaeceaeeaeens 16 2 Configuring the Router occas neinn sleet ened does ened ined one vanes 16 2 Using Configuration Mod oo eee eeeesceesecssecesecesecesecnaecneecaecaeceseeeaeesesaees 16 3 Using Autolnstall ccc el anes eek tte ede hee 16 4 Using the System Configuration Dialog cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeensecnaeenees 16 5 Configuring the Ethernet or Token Ring Interfaces ieee eeeeceseceneceneeeeeeeeeeeseens 16 10 Configuring the Synchronous Serial Interfaces 0 0 0 ce eeceeeeeseeeseeeneeeceeaecnaecnaeeaeens 16 11 Cont SFI BTS DIN es ease Selec cca beach osc tas tate cana cess caditeeaae ce a aA S TONTE 16 12 Contigurini gS witched SO Leirie a O eater ck EE ak ea cd ena Mads 16 14 Configuring DDS eroana eaa EEEE E mito dunn deen 16 16 Configuring the Fractional T1 T1 DSU CSU WAN Module cc eeecceeeeeeeereeeees 16 17 Specifying the Boot Method oe eee eeesssessecssecsseceseceseceseceeceseeseeeseneseaeeeaeeeeceneeeaeens 16 18 Checking the Configuration Settings 0 ce ceceesessessecseeceseceseceseceseceeeeseeeseneseaeeatenees 16 20 Chapter 17 Command References scsssccssssccssssccsssccsssssessssccsssssesssccssssssssees 17 1 DAKONG LEKOA NTO IES PARETET AEA ET evvedpavelvag
45. ES lives in one area It discovers the nearest IS by listening to ES IS packets Each ES must be able to communicate di rectly with an IS in its area When an ES wants to communicate with another ES it sends the packet to any IS on the same medium The IS looks up the destination NSAP address and forwards the packet along the best route If the des tination NSAP address is for an ES in another area the Levell IS sends the packet to the nearest Lev el2 IS The Lev el2 IS forwards the packet along the best path for the destination area until it gets to a Level 2 IS that is in the destination area This IS then forwards the packet along the best path inside the area until itis delivered to the des tination ES ESs need to know how to get to aLevell IS for their area a nd Levell ISs need to know all of the ESs that are directly reachable through each of their interfaces To provide this information the routers support the August 1997 2524UM Page 9 41 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit ES IS protocol The router dynamically discovers all ESs running the ES IS protocol ESs that are not running the ES IS protocol must be configured statically It is sometimes desirable for a router to have a neighbor configured statically rather than learned through ES IS ISO IGRP or IS IS Warning It is necessary to use static mapping only for ESs that do not support ES IS The Cisco IOS software continues to dynamically discover ESs that
46. Frame Relay Encapsulation on an Interface The Frame Relay interface actually consists of one physical connection between the network server and the switch that provides the service This single physical connection provides direct connectivity to each device on a network such as a StrataCom FastPacket wide area network WAN There are required basic steps you must follow to enable Frame Relay for your network In addition you can customize Frame Relay for you particular network needs and monitor Frame Relay connections These sections outline these tasks The tasks in the first two sections are re quired e Enable Frame Relay Encapsulation on an Interface e Configure Dynamic or Static Address Mapping e Configure the LMI e Configure Frame Relay Switched Virtual Circuits e Configure Frame Relay Traffic Shaping e Customize Frame Relay for Your Network e Monitor the Frame Relay Connections Beginning in global configuration mode set Frame Relay encapsula tion at the interface level 1 Specify the serial interface and enter interface configuration mode interface serial number 2 Enable Frame Relay and specify the encapsulation method encapsulation frame relay ietf Frame Relay supports encapsulation of all supported protocols in con formance with RFC 1490 allowing interoperability between multiple vendors Use the Internet Engineering Task Force IETF form of Frame Relay encapsulation
47. Hello Packet Parameters 00 00 00 ces cescesceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeees 9 49 Configure CLNS over WANS 2 0 0 cescesecsseceseceseeeseenseceseceaeceaecesecsseeeseeseeeeseeseneessessaeeaes 9 51 Example ISO CLNS over X 25 s ceteiateashas clits tion e e diesen 9 51 Enhance ISO CLNS Performance eeeeceeecseeceseceseceseceseeesneeeneseaeseneeeaeesaaesnaeeseeeaes 9 53 Speciby the M TU SZ seis ies seve Fe dete oak ea a ia shone css cenas e pE e deck puceunaes 9 54 Disable Checksums ninani 55000 Nasi tebe a a lieth eee 9 54 Disable Fast Switching Through the Cache 0 0 ce ceecesceseceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 9 54 Set the Congestion Threshold ec cceeeceessecsseceseceseceeceseeeseesseesenessneeeaeeneenaes 9 55 Transmit Error Protocol Data Units ERPDUS cccccccceesseceeeeneeeeceeceeeeees 9 55 Control Redirect Protocol Data Units RDPDUS cccccceccesseecesstteeeeeeeees 9 55 Configure Parameters for Locally Sourced Packets cc eeseesceseceteeeseeees 9 56 Example Performance Parameter 0 cecceesceeseeseeescecsseceseceseceseeeeeeeseeeaeenes 9 56 Monitor and Maintain the ISO CLNS Network eee eecessceesecesecesecesecnaecnseeaeeeaeenes 9 57 Configure TARP on ISO CLUNS iiien i a EE e E ea 9 59 TARP Configuration Task List cs eeessecsseceseceneceeeeseceseeeseeeeeeesaeeeneeaeenees 9 60 Enable TARP and Configure a TARP TID eee ceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenes 9 60 Disable TARP Caching i sed dadie dda erie ethe
48. IS IS Link State Metrics You can configure a cost for a specified interface The default metric is used as a value for the IS IS metric This is the value assigned when there is no quality of service QOS routing performed The only met ric that is supported by the Cisco IOS software and that you can con figure is the default metric which you can configure for L evell or Level 2 routing or both In interface configuration mode configure the link state metric isis metric default metric level 1 level 2 Set the Advertised Hello Interval and Hello Multiplier You can specify the length of time in seconds between hello packets that the Cisco IOS software sends on the interface You can also change the default hello packet multiplier used on the interface to de termine the hold time transmitted in IS IS hello packets the default is 3 The hold time determines how long a neighbor waits for another hello packet before declaring the neighbor down This time determines how Page 9 30 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps quickly a failed link or neighbor is detected so that routes can be recal culated In interface configuration mode set the advertised hello interval and multiplier 1 Specify the length of time in seconds between hello packets th software sends on the specified interface isis hello interval seconds level 1 level 2 2 Specify the number used to multiply the h
49. LSA However you can configure the Cisco IOS software to adver tise a single route for all the redistributed routes covered by a specified network address and mask Doing so helps decrease the size of th OSPF link state database To have the software advertise one summary route for all redistributed routes covered by a network address and mask type this command in router configuration mode summary address address mask Page 8 6 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 8 AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps Create Virtual Links In OSPF all areas must be connected to a backbone area If there is break in backbone continuity or if the backbone is purposefully parti tioned you can establish a virtual link To establish a virtual link type this command in router configuration mode area area id virtual link router id hello interval seconds retransmit interval seconds transmit delay seconds deadinterval seconds authentication key key message digest key keyid md5 key To display information about virtual links use th show ip ospf virtual links EXEC command To display the router ID of an OSPF router use the show ip ospf EXEC command Generate a Default Route You can force an autonomous system boundary router to generate a default route into an OSPF routing domain Whenever you specifically configure redistribution of routes into an OSPF routing domain th router automatically becomes an autonomous system boundary
50. Note To terminate this copy process press lt Ctrl gt th lt Ctrl gt lt Shift gt and lt 6 gt keys on a standard keyboard simultaneously Although the process terminates the partial file copied before the termination remains until th entire Flash memory is erased Page 7 6 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images You can copy normal or compressed images to Flash memory You can produce a compressed system image on any UNIX platform using the compress command Refer to your UNIX platform s documen tation for the exact usage of the compress command This example shows how to copy a system image named IJ09140Z into the current Flash configuration Router copy tftp flash IP address or name of remote host 255 255 255 255 serverl Name of tftp filename to copy into flash 1J091402Z copy 1J09140Z from 131 131 101 101 into flash memory confirm XXXXXXXX bytes available for writing without erasure erase flash before writing confirm Clearing and initializing flash memory please wait Loading from 101 2 13 110 OK 324572 524212 bytes Verifying checksum VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV Flash verification successful Length 1204637 checksum 0x95D The series of pound signs indicates that each Flash device is being cleared and initialized one per device Different platforms use differ ent methods to indicate that Flash is clearing The exclam
51. Page 12 32 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps dress As a result all outgoing calls from the VAX are sent to cisco on tymnet for further processing On the router named cisco on tymnet you enter these commands x25 route vax xl2l address ip cisco on vax x25 route interface serial 0 These commands force all calls with the VAX X 121 address to be sent to the router with the VAX connected to it All other calls with X 121 addresses are forwarded out to Tymnet If Tymnet can route them a Call Accepted packet is returned and everything proceeds normally If Tymnet cannot handle the calls it clears each call and the Clear Re quest packet is forwarded back toward the VAX Configure XOT Remote X 25 Route A remote X 25 route is one that crosses a TCP connection Such routes are called X 25 over TCP or XOT routes XOT was previously called remote routes or tunneled routes When an incoming call needs to be forwarded two fields in the X 25 routing table are consulted to determine a remote X 25 route e Destination X 121 address e X 25 packet s Call User Data CUD field optional When the destination address and the CUD of the incoming packet fit the X 121 and CUD patterns in the routing table the call is forwarded You can also specify an XOT source that causes the XOT TCP con nection to use the IP address of a specified interface as the source ad dress of the TCP connection If
52. Respond using your addresses and subnet mask to the setup prompts substituting the correct addresses and host names as ap Configuring interfac Is this interface in Configure IP on this interface IP address for this interface Number of bits in subset field propriate Etherneto use yes yes AT 2 6 125 A 8 8 Class s network is 172 16 0 0 8 subnet bits mask i 255 255 255 0 2 Enter yes if you will be using AppleTalk on the interface Enter yes to configure the router for extended AppleTalk networks and then enter the cable range Enter the zone name and any other ad ditional zones that will be associated with your local zone Configure AppleTalk on this interface no yes Extended AppleTalk network no yes AppleTalk starting cable range 0 3 AppleTalk ending cable range 1 3 AppleTalk zone name myzone AppleTalk additional zone name otherzon AppleTalk additional zone name Page 16 10 August 1997 2524UM Cit Chapter 16 Basic Configuration 3 Determine if you are going to enable IPX on the interface If so enter yes and then enter the unique IPX network number Configure IPX on this interface no yes IPX network number 1 B001 Configuring the The synchronous serial interfaces are configured to allow connection Synchronous to WANs Once the Ethernet or Token Ring port on your router has been configured take these steps to configure the synchronous serial
53. Serial Interface Configured as a Half Bridge Bs z 172 569 5 9 Fa Ethe met subnet 172 6950 Note The Cisco IOS software supports no more than one PPP half bridge per Ethernet subnetwork Beginning in global configuration mode configure a serial interface to function as a half bridge 1 Specify the interface and enter interface configuration mode interface serial number 2 Enable PPP half bridging for one or more routed protocols ppp bridge ip ppp bridge ipx novell ether arpa sap snap 3 Provide a protocol address on the same subnetwork as the remote network ip address n n n n ipx network network Note You must enter the ppp bridge command either when the interface is shut down or before you provide a protocol address for the interface Page 11 18 August 1997 2524UM Configure Multilink PPP Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps Multilink PPP MLP provides load balancing over multiple WAN links while providing multivendor interoperability packet fragmenta tion and proper sequencing and load calculation on both inbound and outbound traffic Multilink PPP allows packets to be fragmented and the fragments to be sent at the same time over multiple point to point links to the sam remote address The multiple links come up in response to a dialer load threshold that you define The load can be calculated on inbound traf fic outbound traffic or on either MLP provides bandwidt
54. Type 2 PDU tarp t2 response timer seconds 3 Configure the number of seconds that the router will wait for a re sponse from a TARP Type 2 PDU after the default timer has ex pired tarp post t2 response timer seconds 4 Configure the number of seconds that the router will wait for a re sponse from a TARP Type 5 PDU tarp arp request timer seconds 5 Configure the number of routers that a TARP PDU can traverse before it is discarded tarp lifetime hops 6 Configure the number of seconds a dynamically created TARP entry remains in the TID cache tarp cache timer seconds 7 Configure the number of seconds that a system ID to sequence number mapping entry remains in the loop detection buffer table tarp ldb timer seconds August 1997 2524UM Page 9 63 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual rit Configure Miscellaneous TARP PDU Information TARP default PDU values typically do not need to be changed You can configure the sequence number of the TARP PDU set the up date remote cache bit used to control whether the remote router up dates its cache specify the N selector used in the PDU to indicate TARP PDU and specify the network protocol type used in outgoing PDUs In global configuration mode configure miscellaneous PDU informa tion 1 Change the sequence number in the next outgoing TARP PDU tarp sequence number number 2 Set the update remote cache bit in all subsequent outgoing TARP PDUs so that the re
55. X 25 Configured to Allow Ping Support over Multiple Lines For ping commands to work in an X 25 environment when load sharing over multiple serial lines you must include entries for all ad jacent interface IP addresses in the x25 map command for each serial interface This example illustrates this point Consider two routers Router A and Router B communicating with each other over two serial lines viaan X 25 PDN see Figure 12 8 or over leased lines In either case all serial lines must be configured fo the same IP subnet address space The configuration that follows al Page 12 54 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps lows for successful ping commands A similar configuration is re quired for the same subnet IP addresses to work across X 25 Figure 12 8 Parallel Serial Lines to an X 25 Network Note All four serial ports configured for the two routers in the following configuration example must be assigned to the same IP subnet address space In this case the subnet is 172 20 170 0 Configuration for Router A interface serial 1 ip 172 20 170 1 255 255 255 0 x25 address 31370054068 x25 map ip 172 20 170 3 31370054065 x25 map ip 172 20 170 4 31370054065 interface serial 2 ip 17220 170 2 255 2255 255 0 x25 address 31370054069 x25 map ip 172 20 170 4 31370054067 x25 map ip 171 20 170 3 31370054067 allow either destination address x25 31370054068 alias serial2 x2
56. a backup interface for a Frame Relay subinterface 1 Specify the interface interface serial number 2 Configure Frame Relay encapsulation encapsulation frame relay August 1997 2524UM Page 13 27 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 3 Configure the subinterface interface serial number subinterface number point to point 4 Specify a DLCI for the subinterface frame relay interface dlci dlci 5 Specify a backup interface for the subinterface backup interface serial number 6 Specify backup enable and disable delay backup delay enable delay disable delay Configure Frame Relay Switching Frame Relay switching is a means of switching packets based upon the DLCI which can be looked upon as the Frame Relay equivalent of a MAC address You perform the switching by configuring your router or access server as a Frame Relay network There are two parts to a Frame Relay network a Frame Relay DTE the router or access server and a Frame Relay DCE switch Figure 13 3 illustrates this concept Figure 13 3 Frame Relay Switched Network Frame Relay Network Frame Relay DCE switch implements the network Acie Router C Implements the n user interface DTE Page 13 28 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps In Figure 13 3 Routers A B and C are Frame Relay DTEs connected to each other via a Frame Relay network Our implementation of Frame Relay switching allows
57. apply to one network server in particular host network 3 At the system prompt enter the optional IP address of the remote host from which you are retrieving the configuration file ip address 4 Atthe system prompt enter the name of the configuration file or accept the default name filename 5 Confirm the configuration filename that the system supplies Y Page 7 14 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images In this example the software is configured from the file tokyo config at IP address 131 108 2 155 Routerl copy tftp running config Host or network configuration file host IP address of remote host 255 255 255 255 131 108 2 155 Name of configuration file tokyo confg Configure using tokyo confg from 131 108 2 155 confirm y Booting tokyo confg from 131 108 2 155 OK 874 16000 bytes Copy a Configuration File Directly to the Startup Configuration You can copy a configuration file directly to your startup configura tion without affecting the running configuration This task loads a con figuration file directly into NVRAM in a location specified by th CONFIG_FILE environment variable To copy aconfiguration file directly to the startup configuration type this command in EXEC mode copy tftp startup config Modify the Configuration Register Boot Field The configuration register boot field determines whether the router loads an operating system image an
58. areas and thereby function as Level 1 routers also referred to as local routers Other ISs keep track of how to communicate with other areas in the domain functioning as Le vel2 routers sometimes referred to as area routers The AI2524 router is always Le vell and L evel2 when Page 9 8 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps routing ISO IGRP it can be configured to be Level 1 only Level2 only or both Level 1 and Leve 12 when routing IS IS ESs communicate with ISs using the ES IS protocol Lev ell and Level 2 ISs communicate with each other using either ISO IS IS or Cisco s ISO IGRP protocol Static Routing Static routing is used when it is not possible or desirable to use dy namic routing Here are some instances of when you would use static routing e If your network includes WAN links that involve paying for con nect time or for per packet charges use static routing rather than paying to run a routing protocol and all its routing update packets over that link e If you want routers to advertise connectivity to external networks but you are not running an interd o mainrouting protocol you must use static routes e If you must interoperate with another vendor s equipment that does not support any of the dynamic routing protocols that Cisco supports you must use static routing For operation over X 25 Frame Relay or SMDS networks static routing is generally preferable Warn
59. at a terminal connected to the router The page also displays a list of commands hy pertext links you can execute by clicking Web Browser Interface Task List To use the Web Browser interface to issue commands perform the tasks in the following list e Enable the Web Browser Interface e Use the Correct Hardware and Software Access Your Router s Home Pag e Issue Commands Using the Web Browser Interfac e Enter Commands Using Hypertext Links e Enter Commands Using the Command Field e Enter Commands Using the URL Window Enable the Web Browser Interface To enable your router to be configured from a browser using the Web Browser interface type this command in global configuration mode ip http server Once the Web Browser interface is enabled you can issue AI2524 commands to your router using a Web browser Use Compatible Hardware and Software To use the Web Browser interface your computer must have a World Wide Web browser The Web Browser interface works with most browsers including Netscape Navigator Your Web browser must be able to read and submit forms The earliest versions of Mosaic might have problems using the Web Browser interface because they either cannot submit forms or have difficulty doing so The computer must be connected to the same network as the router or access server August 1997 2524UM Page 4 27 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Access Your Router s Home Page Perform thes
60. available from the FCC describing possible corrective actions For lower EMI levels we suggest using only metal connectors and shielded cables grounded to the frame Electrostatic Discharge Warning Warning The AlSwitch and its peripherals contain electrostatic sensitive components Proper handling shipping and storage precautions must be exercised Removal and installation of circuit boards must be performed in a static free en vironment Tthe technician should wear an anti static wrist strap and stand on an anti static mat Both the wrist strap and mat must be grounded at the same point as the AISwitch enclosure e When not in use circuit boards must be kept in their anti static plastic bags Circuit boards must only be removed from their anti static plastic bags immedi ately prior to installation into the AISwitch enclosure e Immediately upon removal from the enclosure circuit boards must be inserted into their anti static bags Do notship or store the electronic circuit boards near strong electrostatic elec tromagnetic magnetic or radioactive fields Specifications are subject to change without notice Applied Innovation Inc 5800 Innovation Driv Dublin Ohio 43016 3271 614 798 2000 800 247 9482 FAX 614 798 1770 August 1997 2524UM cit AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Contents Chapter 1 Introduction eessossssesssoccscccsoocesoosssosssscessosssocesosesocessecssocesoooesocsssossssesssos
61. by starting with the word cisco and then appending the octal equivalent of the boot field number in th configuration register followed by a hyphen and the processor type name cisconn cpu See the appropriate hardware installation guide for details on the configuration register and default filename Setting the Boot Field You must correctly set the configuration register boot field to ensure that your router loads the operating system image as you intend To set the boot field 1 Obtain the current configuration register setting This setting is hexadecimal value 2 Modify the current configuration register setting to reflect the way you want to load a system image To do so change the least sig nificant hexadecimal digit to 0 to load the system image manually using the boot command in ROM monitor mode 1 to load the system image from boot ROMs 2 through F to load the system image from boot system com mands in the startup configuration file or from a default system image stored on a network server For example if the current configuration register setting is 0x101 and you want to load a system image from boot system commands in the startup configuration file you would change the configuration register setting to 0x102 1 Reboot the router to make your changes to the configuration reg ister take effect Page 7 16 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images Perform the Boot Field Modifica
62. compression In interface configuration mode enable payload compression over X 25 x25 map protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address compress This command specifies that X 25 compression is to be used between the two hosts Because each virtual circuit established for compressed traffic uses significant amounts of memory compression should be used with careful consideration of its impact on performance The compress option may be specified for an encapsulation PVC Configure the Encapsulation Virtual Circuit Idle Time The Cisco IOS software can clear a datagram transport SVC after a set period of inactivity Routed SVCs are not timed for inactivity In interface configuration mode set the time 1 Set an idle time for clearing encapsulation x25 idle minutes 2 Specify an idle time for clearing a map s SVCs x25 map protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address idle minutes Page 12 24 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps Increase the Number of Virtual Circuits Allowed For X 25 datagram transport you can establish up to eight SVCs to one host for each map To increase the number of virtual circuits allowed perform one or both of these tasks in interface configuration mode e Specify the default maximum number of SVCs that can be open simultaneously to one host for each map x25 nvc count e Specify the maxim
63. configuration mode x25 routing use tcp if defs Substitute Addresses in a Local X 25 Route When interconnecting two separate X 25 networks you must some times provide for address translation for local routes Your X 25 switch supports translation of X 25 source and destination addresses for local switching To translate addresses perform one or both of these tasks in global configuration mode e Translate the X 25 source address for local switching x25 route position x121 address substitute source pattern cud pattern interface interface number e Translate the X 25 destination address for local switching x25 route position x121l address substitute dest pattern cud pattern interface interface number Address substitution is not available for XOT routes Configure XOT Alternate Destinations XOT routes can be configured with alternate addresses On routing call XOT will try each XOT destination host in sequence if the TCP August 1997 2524UM Page 12 39 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Cit Configure CMNS Routing connection establishment fails the next destination will be tried Up to six XOT destination addresses can be entered To configure an XOT route with alternate addresses thus adding it to the X 25 routing table type in global configuration mode x25 route position x121 address cud pattern ip ip address ip address2 ip address6 The sequence of alternate
64. cording only nondefault settings The memory is checksummed to guard against corrupted data The startup software always checks for configuration information in NVRAM If NVRAM holds valid configuration commands the Cisco IOS software executes the commands automatically at startup If th software detects a problem with NVRAM or the configuration it con tains it enters setup mode and prompts for configuration Problems can include a bad checksum for the information in NVRAM or the ab August 1997 2524UM Page 7 13 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit sence of critical configuration information Refer to Use Setup for Configuration Changes for details on the setup command facility Configure the Cisco IOS software from Memory To configure the software to execute the commands located in NVRAM or to execute the configuration specified by the CONFIG_FILE environment variable type this command in privi leged EXEC mode configure memory Configure the Cisco IOS software from the Network You can configure the software by retrieving and modifying a config uration file stored on one of your network servers 1 Enter configuration mode with the network option copy tftp running config 2 Atthe system prompt select a network or host configuration file The network configuration file contains commands that apply to all network servers and terminal servers on the network The host configuration file contains commands that
65. destination XOT host addresses is simply added to the normal XOT route configuration command Note It can take up to 50 seconds to try an alternate route due to TCP timings The Connection Mode Network Service CMNS provides a mecha nism through which local X 25 switching can be extended to nonserial media through the use of OSI based NSAP addresses This implemen tation runs packet level X 25 over frame level LLC2 The AI2524 CMNS implementation allows LAN based OSI re sources such as a DTE host and a Sun workstation to be intercon nected to each other via the router s LAN interfaces and to a remot OSI based DTE through a WAN interface using for example an X 25 Packet Switched Network PSN Note CMNS is implicitly enabled whenever an X 25 encapsulation is included with a serial interfac configuration All local mapping is performed by the static mapping of MAC ad dresses and X 121 addresses to NSAP addresses Implementing CMNS routing involves completing these tasks e Enable CMNS on an Interface e Specify a CMNS Static Map of Addresses Enable CMNS on an Interface In interface configuration mode enable CMNS on a nonserial inter face cmns enable Page 12 40 August 1997 2524UM interface ethernet 0 cmns enable Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps Specify a CMNS Static Map of Addresses After enabling CMNS on a nonserial interface or specifying X 25 en capsulation on a serial interface you
66. e Configure an interface to send only RIP Ver sion2 packets ip rip send version 2 e Configure an interface to send RIP Ver sion and Ve rsion2 pack ets ip rip send version 1 2 Similarly to control how packets received from an interface are pro cessed perform one of these tasks in interface configuration mode e Configure an interface to accept only RIP Ver sion packets ip rip receive version 1 e Configure an interface to accept only RIP Ver sion2 packets ip rip receive version 2 e Configure an interface to accept either RIP Ve rsion1 or2 packets ip rip receive version 1 2 August 1997 2524UM Page 8 17 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Enable RIP Authentication RIP Version 1 does not support authentication If you are sending and receiving RIP Versio n2 packets you can enable RIP authentication on an interface The key chain determines the set of keys that can be used on the inter face If a key chain is not configured no authentication is performed on that interface not even the default authentication Therefore you must also perform the tasks in the section Manage Authentication Keys later in this chapter The software supports two modes of authentication on an interface for which RIP authentication is enabled plain text authentication and MD5 authentication The default authentication in every RIP Version 2 packet is plain text authentication Note For security purposes do not use pl
67. for the First Time Configuring the Router Specifying the Boot Method Checking the Configuration Settings This chapter provides just enough information to get the router up and running Review the previous detailed configuration chapters for more information August 1997 2524UM Page 16 1 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Booting the Router for the First Time Each time you power on the router it goes through this boot sequence 1 The router goes through power on self test diagnostics to verify basic operation of the CPU memory and interfaces The system bootstrap software boot image executes and searches for a valid Cisco IOS image router operating system software The source of the Cisco IOS image Flash memory or a Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP server is determined by the configura tion register setting The factory default setting for the configura tion register is 0x2102 which indicates that the router should attempt to load a Cisco IOS image from Flash memory If after five attempts a valid Cisco IOS image is not found in Flash memory the router reverts to boot ROM mode which is used to install or upgrade a Cisco IOS image If a valid Cisco IOS image is found then the router searches for a valid configuration file If a valid configuration file is not found in NVRAM the router runs the System Configuration Dialog so you can configure it manually For normal router operation there must
68. high command that priority list is used for the fast_vcs map class The average and peak traffic rates defined for the fast_vcs map class are used for traffic August 1997 2524UM Page 13 15 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Define Custom Queue Lists for the Map Class You can define a queue list for a protocol and a default queue list You can also specify the maximum number of bytes to be transmitted in any cycle The number used for a specific queue list ties the list to the Frame Relay custom queue list defined for a specified map class For example if you enter the frame relay custom queue list 1 command for the map class slow_vcs and then you enter th queue list 1 protocol ip list 100command that queue list is used for the slow_vcs map class access list 100 defini tion is also used for that map class and queue The average and peak traffic rates defined for the slow_vcs map class are used for IP traffi that meets the access list 100 criteria Example Frame Relay Traffic Shaping This example illustrates a Frame Relay interface with three point to point subinterfaces In this example the virtual circuits on subinterfaces Serial0 1 a Serial0 2 inherit class parameters from the main interface namely those defined in slow_vcs However the virtual circuit defined on sub interface Serial0 2 DLCI 102 is specifically configured to use map class fast_vcs Map class slow_ves uses a peak rate of 9600 and average r
69. ietf Typically a Public Data Network PDN will require attachment as DTE This requirement is distinct from the hardware interface DTE or DCE identity The default mode of operation is DTE and the default encapsulation method is Cisco s pre ETF method Page 12 2 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps Set the Virtual Circuit Ranges The X 25 protocol maintains multiple connections over one physical link between a DTE and a DCE These connections are called virtual circuits or Logical Channels LCs X 25 can maintain up to 4095 vir tual circuits numbered 1 through 4095 You identify an individual vir tual circuit by giving its Logical Channel Identifier LCI or Virtual Circuit Number VCN Many documents use the terms virtual circuit and LC VCN LCN and LCI interchangeably Each of these terms re fers to the virtual circuit number An important part of X 25 operation is the range of VCNs VCNs are broken into four ranges listed here in numerically increasing order 1 Permanent virtual circuits PVCs 2 Incoming only circuits 3 Two way circuits 4 Outgoing only circuits The incoming only two way and outgoing only ranges define the VCNs over which a Switched Virtual Circuit SVC can be established by the placement of an X 25 call much like a telephone network es tablishes a switched voice circuit when a call is placed The rules about DCE and DTE devices initiating calls are e Only th
70. interactive traffic over the same DLC e Traffic from sites with high speed access being queued at destina tion sites with lower speed access August 1997 2524UM Page 13 45 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Before you configure the DLCI priority levels complete these tasks 1 Define a global priority list 2 Enable Frame Relay encapsulation as described earlier in this sec tion 3 Define static or dynamic address mapping as described earlier in this section 4 Make sure that you define each of the DLCIs to which you intend to apply levels You can associate priority level DLCIs with sub interfaces 5 Configure the LMI as described earlier in this section Note DLCI priority levels provide a way to define multiple parallel DLCIs for different types of traffic DLCI priority levels do not assign priority queues within the router or access server in fact they are independent of the device s priority queues However if you enable queuing and use the same DLCIs for queuing then high priority DLCIs can be put into high priority queues In interface configuration mode configure DLCI priority levels by en abling multiple parallel DLCIs for different types of Frame Relay traf fic associating specified DLCIs with the same group and defining their levels frame relay priority dlci group group number high dlci medium dlci normal dlci Llow dlci Note If you do not explicitly specify a DLCI f
71. interfac thernet 1 no ip address shutdown interfac thernet 2 no ip address shutdown interfac thernet 3 no ip address shutdown l interface serial 0 ip address 131 108 178 48 255 255 255 0 shutdown interface serial 1 no ip address encapsulation frame relay frame relay intf type dce frame relay lmi type ansi frame relay route 100 interface serial 2 200 interface serial 2 no ip address encapsulation frame relay frame relay intf type nni frame relay lmi type q933a frame relay route 200 interface serial 1 100 clockrate 2048000 interface serial 3 no ip address shutdown Page 13 32 August 1997 2524UM Pil Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps Configuration for Router C frame relay switching interface ethernet 0 no ip address shutdown I interfac thernet1 no ip address shutdown interfac thernet 2 no ip address shutdown interfac thernet 3 no ip address shutdown l interface serial 0 ip address 131 108 187 84 255 255 255 0 shutdown interface serial 1 no ip address encapsulation frame relay frame relay intf type dce frame relay route 300 interface serial 2 200 interface serial 2 no ip address encapsulation frame relay frame relay intf type nni frame relay lmi type q933a frame relay route 200 interface serial 1 300 interface serial 3 no ip address shutdown August 1997 2524UM Page 13 33 AI2524 Ro
72. is compatible with ISO IEC 8473 3 1994 3 Compressed TCP traffic has two types of datagrams so IETF en capsulation requires a multiprotocol virtual circuit 4 The use of OxCC for IP is backwards compatible with RFC 877 5 The use of 0x01 for PAD is defined by ITU T Recommendation X 29 Once a multiprotocol virtual circuit has been established datagrams on the virtual circuit have protocol identification data before the actual protocol data the protocol identification values are the same used by RFC 1356 in the CUD field for an individual protocol Note IP datagrams can be identified with a 1 byte identification 0xCC or a 6 byte identification 0x80 followed by the 5 byte SNAP encoding The 1 byte encoding is used b default although the SNAP encoding can be configured Map Datagram Addresses to X 25 Hosts Encapsulation is a cooperative process between the router and anothe X 25 host Because X 25 hosts are reached with an X 121 address an X 121 address has up to15 decimal digits the router must have means to map a host s protocols and addresses to its X 121 address Each encapsulating X 25 interface must be configured with the rele vant datagram parameters For example an interface that encapsulates IP will typically have an IP address You must also establish the X 121 address of an encapsulating X 25 interface using the x25 address interface configuration com mand The X 121 address is the address where encapsul
73. lt Ctrl Z gt Access list con figuration From global configuration mode type ip access list mode name Router config std nacl or Router config ext nacl To exit to global configuration mode type exit To exit to privileged EXEC mode type end or press lt Ctrl Z gt User EXEC Mode Commands After you log in to the router or access server you are automatically in user EXEC command mode The EXEC commands available at th user level are a subset of those available at the privileged level In gen eral the user EXEC commands allow you to connect to remote de vices change terminal settings on a temporary basis perform basic tests and list system information Page 4 6 August 1997 2524UM Router gt Exec commands lt 1 99 gt connect disconnect enable exit help lat lock login logout menu mbranch mrbranch mtrace name connection pad ping resume show systat telnet terminal tn3270 trace where x3 xremote Chapter 4 Understanding the User Interface Session number to resume Open a terminal connection Disconnect an existing telnet session Turn on privileged commands Exit from the EXEC Description of the interactive help system Open a lat connection Lock the terminal Log in as a particular use Exit from the EXEC Start a menu based user interfac Trace multicast route for branch of tree Trace reverse multicast route to branch of tree Trace multica
74. major enhancements to your configurations For example you might want to use setup to add a protocol suite to make major addressing scheme changes or to configure a newly installed interface Although you can use the com mand parser to make these major changes the setup command facility August 1997 2524UM Page 5 19 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit provides you with a high level view of the configuration and guides you through the configuration change process Additionally if you are not familiar with the command parser the setup command facility is a particularly valuable tool because it asks you the questions required to make configuration changes Note If you use setup to modify a configuration because you have added or modified the hardware be sure to verify the physical connections using the show version command Also verify the logical port assignments using the show running config command to ensure that you configure the proper port Refer to your platform s hardware publications for details on physical and logical port assignments To enter the setup command facility type this command in privileged EXEC mode setup When you enter the setup command facility after first time startup an interactive dialog called the System Configuration Dialog appears on the system console screen The System Configuration Dialog guides you through the configuration process It prompts you first for global parameters and
75. name confg or name cfg file which should reside in th tftpboot directory on the TFTP server The name part of name confg or name cfg filename must match the host name you as signed for the new router in the previous step Enter configuration commands for the new router into this file The name confg or the name cfg file can contain either the new router s full configuration or a minimal configuration The minimal configuration file is a virtual terminal password and an enable password It allows an administrator to gain access via Telnet into the new router to configure it If you are using BOOTP or RARP to resolve the address of the new router the minimal configuration file must also include the IP address to be obtained dynamically using BOOTP or RARP You can use the copy running config tftp command to help you gen erate the configuration file that you will download during the AutoIn stall process Note The existing router might need to forward TFTP requests and response packets if the TFTP server is not on the same network segment as the new router When you modified the existing router s configuration you specified an IP helper address for this purpose You can save a minimal configuration under a generic newrouter confg file Use the ip host command in the network confg or cisco net cfg file to specify newrouter as the host name with the address you dynamically resolve The new router should then resolve its IP ad dress ho
76. not have this address constraint ip address address mask Configure a helper address for the serial interface to forward broadcasts associated with the TFTP BOOTP and DNS requests ip helper address address August 1997 2524UM Page 5 11 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Optionally configure a DCE clock rate for the serial line unless an external clock is being used This step is needed only for DCE appliques clock rate bps To exit configuration mode press lt Ctrl Z gt Save the configuration file to your startup configuration copy running config startup config In this example the existing router s configuration file contains the commands needed to configure the router for AutoInstall on a serial line using HDLC encapsulation Router configure terminal interface serial 0 ip address 172 31 10 1 255 255 255 0 ip helper address 172 31 20 5 Ctrl Z Router config copy running config startup config Use an Ethernet Token Ring or FDDI Interface Connection To set up AutoInstall using an Ethernet Token Ring or FDDI inter face you must modify the configuration of the existing router Per form these steps beginning in global configuration mode 1 Configure a LAN interface and enter interface configuration mode interface ethernet tokenring fddi interface number Enter an IP address for the interface ip address address mask Optionally configure a helper address to forward
77. or point to point subinterfaces assign a data link connection identi fier DLCD to the interface that connects to the new router and provide the IP address of the serial port on the new router frame relay map ip ip address dlci or frame relay interface dlci dlci option protocol ip ip address August 1997 2524UM Page 5 13 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 4 Enter an IP address for the interface This step sets the IP address of the existing router ip address address mask 5 Configure a helper address for the TFTP server ip helper address address3 6 Optionally configure a DCE clock rate for the serial line unless an external clock is being used This step is needed only for DCE applications clock rate bpsi 7 To exit configuration mode press lt Ctrl Z gt 8 Save the configuration file to your startup configuration This step saves the configuration to NVRAM copy running config startup config You must use a DTE interface on the new router because the network always provides the clock signal In this example the existing router s configuration file contains the commands needed to configure the router for Frame Relay AutolInstall on a serial line Router configure terminal interface serial 0 ip address 172 31 20 20 255 255 255 0 encapsulation frame relay frame relay map ip 172 31 10 1 255 255 255 0 48 ip helper address 172 31 20 5 Set Up the TFTP Server For AutoInstall to w
78. or Host B This configuration allows traffic intended for the remote NSAP address specified in the x25 map cmns com mands for the serial ports to be switched through the serial interface for which CMNS is configured Figure 12 7 Example Network Topology for Switching CMNS over a Leased Line Host C MAC address W800 42 1234 33 8261 2000 0150 0655 1 212 OF Ethernet Serial X25 address 0002 Token Ring 0 MAC address 0000 0000 ee Rautear C4 aie So Reuter Cg 10s Private X25 network 5 a Sena x25 address 00001 Ethemet 0 MAC address 0000 0000_ abil Host B MAC address 0600 4e02 bodo 3 8261 2100 0150 0633 4543 01 A key difference for this configuration compared with the previous ex ample is that with no PDN the specification of an X 121 address in the x25 map cmns command is not necessary The specification of an X 25 address also is not needed but is included for symmetry with the previous example Configuration for Router C4 This configuration specifies that any traffic from any other interface intended for any NSAP address with NSAP 38 8261 21 will be switched to MAC address 0800 4e02 bcd0 through Token Ring 0 x25 map cmns 38 8261 21 0800 4e02 bcd0 Page 12 44 August 1997 2524UM interface serial 0 encapsulation x25 x25 address 00002 x25 map cmns 38 8261 20 interface ethernet 0 cmns enable x25 map cmns 38 8261 20 interface serial 1 encapsulation x25 x25 a
79. possible argument 2 Partial help is provided when an abbreviated argument is entered and you want to know what arguments match the input e g show pr These examples illustrate how the context sensitive help feature en ables you to create an access list from configuration mode e Type the letters co at the system prompt followed by a question mark Do not leave a space between the last letter and the ques tion mark The system provides the commands that begin with co August 1997 Page 4 19 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Router co configure connect copy e Enter the configure command followed by a space and a ques tion mark to list the command s keywords and a brief explana tion Router configure memory Configure from NV memory network Configure from a TFTP network host terminal Configure from the terminal lt ch gt The lt cr gt symbol by itself indicates there are no more keywords or ar guments Press lt Enter gt to execute the command e Enter the terminal keyword to enter configuration mode from the terminal Router configure terminal Enter configuration commands one per line End with CNTL Z Router config e Enter the access list command followed by a space and question mark to list the command s keywords Router config access list lt 1 99 gt IP standard access list lt 100 199 gt IP extended access list lt 1000 1099 gt IPX SAP
80. relay lapf n201 number e Setthe LAPF retransmission timer value T200 frame relay lapf t200 tenths of a second e Set the LAPF link idle timer value T203 of DLCI 0 frame relay lapf t203 seconds Beginning with Release 11 2 AI2524 supports Frame Relay traffic shaping which provides e Rate enforcement on a per virtual circuit basis The peak rate for outbound traffic can be set to the CIR or some other user config ured rate e Dynamic traffic throttling on a per virtual circuit basis When BECN packets indicate congestion on the network the outbound traffic rate is automatically stepped down when congestion eases the outbound traffic rate is stepped up again This feature is en abled by default e Enhanced queuing support on a per virtual circuit basis Either custom queuing or priority queuing can be configured for individ ual virtual circuits August 1997 2524UM Page 13 13 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit By defining separate virtual circuits for different types of traffic and specifying queuing and an outbound traffic rate foreach virtual circuit you can provide guaranteed bandwidth for each type of traffic By specifying different traffic rates for different virtual circuits over the same line you can perform virtual time division multiplexing By throttling outbound traffic from high speed lines in central offices to lower speed lines in remote locations you can ease congestion and data loss in th
81. router in the route within 3 update periods 270 seconds After 7 update periods 630 seconds the Cisco IOS software removes the route from the routing table IGRP uses flash update and poison reverse updates to speed up th convergence of the routing algorithm Flash updates are sent soone than the standard periodic update for notifying other routers of a metric change Poison reverse updates are intended to defeat larger routing loops caused by increases in routing metrics The poison reverse up dates are sent to remove a route and place it in holddown which keeps new routing information from being used for a certain period of time IGRP Configuration Task List To configure IGRP perform the tasks outlined in the next section Cre ating the IGRP routing process is mandatory the other tasks are op tional e Create the IGRP Routing Process e Allow Point to Point Updates for IGRP e Define Unequal Cost Load Balancing e Control Traffic Distribution e Adjust the IGRP Metric Weights e Disable Holddown e Enforce a Maximum Network Diamete e Validate Source IP Addresses August 1997 2524UM Page 8 11 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Create the IGRP Routing Process To create the IGRP routing process perform these required tasks start ing in global configuration mode 1 Enable an IGRP routing process which places you in router con figuration mode router igrp process number
82. set default values of a command Set values in destination routing protocol Key Chain Configuration Mode From key chain configuration mode you can manage authentication keys that routing protocols use To enter this configuration mode and use Key Chain configuration commands you must first enable RIP au thentication For more information about enabling RIP refer to Enable RIP Key Chain Key Configuration Mode Once you define a key chain use the key chain key configuration mode to configure the keys on the key chain Response Time Reporter Configuration Mode Use the response time reporter feature to monitor network perfor mance network resources and applications by measuring response times and availability With this feature you can perform troubleshoot ing problem notifications and pre problem analysis based on re sponse time reporter statistics Access List Configuration Mode All Internet Protocol IP access lists can be identified by a number standard IP access lists are numbered 1 to 99 and extended IP access lists are numbered 100 to 199 Some IP access lists can also be identi fied by aname Use access list configuration mode when you are cre ating a named IP access list August 1997 2524UM Page 4 17 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Router config ip access list In this example an IP access list named flag is created and the com mands available in access list configuration mode ar
83. size must be less than or equal to the smallest MTU of any link in the network The default size is 1497 bytes Caution The CLNS MTU of a link which is the applicable value for IS IS even if it is being used to route IP may differ from the IP MTU To be certain about a link MTU as it pertains to IS IS use the show clns interface command to display the value In router configuration mode change the MTU size of IS IS link state packets lsp mtu size Warning This rule applies for all routers in a network If any link in the network has a reduced MTU all routers must b changed not just the routers directly connected to th link August 1997 2524UM Page 9 29 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Configure IS IS Interface Parameters Cisco s IS IS implementation allows you to customize certain inter face specific IS IS parameters e Adjust IS IS Link State Metrics e Set the Advertised Hello Interval and Hello Multiplier e Setthe Advertised CSNP Interval e Set the Retransmission Interval e Specify Designated Router Election e Specify the Interface Circuit Type e Configure IS IS Authentication Passwords You are not required to alter any of these parameters but some inter face parameters must be consistent across all routers in the network Therefore if you do configure any of these parameters be sure the configurations for all routers on the network have compatible values Adjust
84. ssessesessereeseeressesrresrrsrssresresrestesrtserrresrsrtssreereresesees 11 17 Configure PPP Half Bridging eeeeseeeeeeeeesreereseesresresresressesessetttesrsrentestesserrreseseeee 11 17 Configure Multilink PPP ireira a na dinate i a a O Sa 11 19 Configure Multilink PPP on Asynchronous Interfaces 0 ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 11 19 Configure Multilink PPP on a Single ISDN BRI Interface 0 ee 11 20 Example Multilink PPP on One ISDN Interfac eseese 11 22 Configure Multilink PPP on Multiple ISDN BRI Interfaces ee 11 22 Example Multilink PPP on Multiple ISDN Interfaces eee eee eeeeee 11 25 Configure Virtual Private Dial up Networks 0 eceeceeeeseeeeeneeeeeeseeeeeeaecsaeceaeeneens 11 26 Understand Virtual Private Dial up Networks eee eeseeeeeereeeneeeeeceeees 11 26 Configure Incoming VPDN Connections on the Home Gateway 11 29 Configure Outgoing VPDN Connections on the Network Access Server 11 29 Example Network Access Server Servicing Multiple Domains 11 29 Example NAS Servicing Multiple Domains to the Same Gateway 11 30 Example Using TACACS for Forwarding from the NAS 11 31 Enable PPP on VTY Lines for Asynchronous Access over ISDN seese 11 32 Monitor and Maintain MLP MMP and VPDN Virtual Interfaces ccc 11 32 TOC 6 August 1997 2524UM cit AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps ccscccs
85. subinterface tasks are not required but offer additional flex ibility for SVC configuration and operation The LAPF tasks are not required and not recommended unless you understand thoroughly the impacts on your network e Configure SVCs ona Physical Interface e Configure SVCs ona Subinterface optional e Configure a Map Class e Configure a Map Group with E 164 or X 121 Addresses e Associate the Map Class with Static Protocol Address Maps e Configure LAPF Parameters Configure SVCs on a Physical Interface To enable SVC operation on a Frame Relay interface perform these tasks beginning in global configuration mode 1 Specify the physical interface interface serial number 2 Specify the interface IP address if needed ip address ip address mask Page 13 8 August 1997 2524UM interface serial 0 Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps Enable Frame Relay encapsulation on the interface encapsulation frame relay Assign a map group to the interface map group group name Enable Frame Relay SVC support on the interface frame relay svc Map group details are specified with the map list command Example SVCs on an Interface This example configures a physical interface applies a map group to the physical interface and then defines the map group ip address 172 10 8 6 encapsulation frame relay map group bermuda frame relay lmi type q933a frame relay svc
86. subinterface to a multipoint subinterface then change the subinterface number Frame Relay Inverse ARP will be on by default and no further action is required You do not need to enable or disable Inverse ARP if you have a point to point interface because there is only a single destination and dis covery is not required To select Inverse ARP or disable it perform one of these tasks in in terface configuration mode e Enable Frame Relay Inverse ARP for a specific protocol and DLCI pair only if it was previously disabled frame relay inverse arp protocol dlci e Disable Frame Relay Inverse ARP for a specific protocol and DLCI pair no frame relay inverse arp protocol dlci Create a Broadcast Queue for an Interface Very large Frame Relay networks might have performance problems when many DLCIs terminate in a single router or access server that must replicate routing updates and service advertising updates on each DLCI The updates can consume access link bandwidth and cause sig nificant latency variations in user traffic the updates can also consum Page 13 38 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps interface buffers and lead to higher packet rate loss for both user dat and routing updates To avoid such problems you can create a special broadcast queue for an interface The broadcast queue is managed independently of th normal interface queue has its own buffers and has a configu
87. the LMI o cece eee eseesceeneecnsecesecaecnaecneecaaecsaeesaeeeees 13 6 Configure Frame Relay Switched Virtual Circuits 0 000 eeceesseceseceneceneceseceeeeeaeens 13 8 Configure SVCs ona Physical Interface eee eeeeesecsseceseceeceneceeeeeseeeaeens 13 8 Example SVCs on an Interfac 0 0 cece ceeceseceseceseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeecaesaesneeeaee 13 9 Configure SVCs ona Subinterface optional es eee eseeeeseceteceteceeeeneeeeees 13 9 Example SVCs on a Subinterface 0 ccc eecceseceseceseceseceseeeeeeeeneeeaeeeseeeaeeeees 13 10 Configute a Map Classis ise cuca iinetaataiedan niin u e n nt 13 11 Configure a Map Group with E 164 or X 121 Addresses 0 0 cs eeeeeeeeeseeeee 13 12 Associate the Map Class with Static Protocol Address Maps 13 12 TOC 8 August 1997 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Configure LAPF Parameters 00 0 0 ecceseeseeeseecnseceseceseceseceseceseceseeseneeeaeeneenees 13 12 Configure Frame Relay Traffic Shaping ceccescesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeceesnaesneseaees 13 13 Enable Frame Relay Traffic Shaping on the Interface eee ese ereeee 13 14 Specify a Traffic Shaping Map Class for the Interfac oeenn 13 14 Define a Map Class with Queuing and Traffic Shaping Parameters 13 15 Define Access Lists oua menite in cee esl ee eee gi ae 13 15 Define Priority Queue Lists for the Map Class cesceecceeecneecsseceeceteeeeaeens 13 15 Define Custom Queue Lists for the Map Cl
88. the access list command entry extends beyond one line When the cursor first reaches the end of the line the line is shifted 10 spaces to the left and is redisplayed The dollar sign in dicates that the line has been scrolled to the left Each time the cursor reaches the end of the line the line is again shifted 10 spaces to the left Router config access list 101 permit tcp 131 108 2 5 255 255 255 0 131 108 Router config Router config 101 permit tcp 131 108 2 5 255 255 255 0 131 108 1 20 255 2 St tep 1319108 2 55 255 255525540 137 1081 20 255 255 2255 0 Router config 108 2 5 255 255 255 0 131 108 1 20 255 255 255 0 eq 45 When you have completed the entry press lt Ctrl A gt to check the com plete syntax before pressing lt Enter gt to execute the command The dollar sign appears at the end of the line to indicate that the line has been scrolled to the right Router config access list 101 permit tcp 131 108 2 5 255 255 255 0 131 108 Page 4 26 August 1997 2524UM Web Browser Interface Chapter 4 Understanding the User Interface You can issue most of the AI2524 commands using a Web browser This AI2524 feature is accessed by using the Web Browser interface which is accessed from the router s home page From the router s home page click on the Monitor the Router hyper text link to display a Web page with a Command field You can typ commands in this field as if you were entering commands
89. the existing router acts as a BOOTP server and responds to the incoming BOOTP request Only a helper address and a Frame Relay map need to be set up No MAC to IP address map is needed on the existing router The AI2524 routers can be configured to act as a RARP server Because the router attempts to resolve its host name as soon as one in terface resolves its IP address only one IP address needs to be set up with SLARP BOOTP or RARP Resolve the IP Address to the Host Name The new router resolves its IP address to host name mapping by send ing a TFTP broadcast requesting the file network confg as shown in Figure 5 3 August 1997 2524UM Page 5 7 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Figure 5 3 Dynamically Resolve the New Router s IP Ad dress to Host Name Mapping 131 108 20 1 TFIP broadcast Helper address of 131 108 20 5 network config or cisconetclg 1s configured on existing TFTP reply network confg or cisconet cig DNS Request Helper address of 131 108 20 5 is configured on sisting a DNS request is sent ifnetwork confg is not present or ifthe IP addressto hostname DNS Reply mapping i incomect areply is sent f mapping for newrouter exists on the DNS Note HDNS does nothave an erty newrouter attempts to download a default configuration files router contg and failing that enters setup mode Eri p r Fu z 131 108 20 5 Page 5 8 August 1997 2524UM
90. to both this node and its neighbors If you specify both Le vell and L evel2 the default value a Levell and 2 adjacency is established if the neighbor is also configured as both Leve 11 and Lev el2 and there is at least one area in common If there is no area in common a Leve 12 adjacency is established If you specify Leve 12 only a Le vel2 adjacency is established If the neighbor router is a Leve 11 router no adjacency is established Page 9 32 August 1997 2524UM Configure CLNS Static Routing Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps Configure IS IS Password Authentication You can assign different authentication passwords for different rout ing levels By default authentication is disabled Specifying Lev ell or Level 2 enables the password only for Le vell or L evel2 routing re spectively If you do not specify a level the default is Le vell In interface configuration mode configure an authentication password for an interface isis password password level 1 level 2 You do not need to explicitly specify a routing process to use stati routing facilities You can enter a specific static route and apply it glo bally even if you have configured the router for ISO IGRP or IS IS dy namic routing To configure a static route complete the tasks in the following sec tions Only enabling static routes is required the remaining tasks may be necessary for certain applications but are otherwise optiona
91. to detect Cisco IOS soft ware currently supports automatic detection of PPP and V 120 encap sulations You can configure point to point software compression on serial inter faces that use PPP encapsulation Compression reduces the size of a PPP frame via lossless data compression The compression algorithm used is a predictor algorithm the RAND algorithm which uses a compression dictionary to predict the next character in the frame PPP encapsulations support both predictor and Stacker compression algorithms Compression is performed in software and might significantly affect system performance Disable compression if the router CPU load ex ceeds 65 To display the CPU load use th show process cpu EXEC command If the majority of your traffic is already compressed files do not us compression In interface configuration mode configure compression over PPP 1 Enable encapsulation of a single protocol on the serial line encapsulation ppp August 1997 2524UM Page 11 7 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Configure IP Address Pooling 2 Enable compression Ppp compress predictor stac Point to point interfaces must be able to provide a remote node with its IP address through the IP Control Protocol IPCP address negotia tion process The IP address can be e Configured through the command lin e Entered with an EXEC level command e Provided by TACACS DHCP or from a locally administered pool
92. to send ISO CLNS frames frame relay map clns dlci broadcast e Define a DLCI used to connect to a bridge frame relay map bridge dlci ietf broadcast Use these keywords to specify the protocols e ip IP ipx Novell IPX e clns ISO CLNS August 1997 2524UM Page 13 23 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit The broadcast keyword is required for routing protocols such as OSI protocols and the Open Shortest Path First OSPF protocol Se the frame relay map command description in the Wide Area Networking Command Reference for more information about using the broadcast keyword Example IPX Routes over Frame Relay Subinterfaces This example configures a serial interface for Frame Relay encapsula tion and sets up multiple IPX virtual networks corresponding to Frame Relay subinterfaces ipx routing 0000 0c02 5f4f I interface serial 0 encapsulation frame relay interface serial 0 1 multipoint ipx network 1 frame relay map ipx 1 000 0c07 d530 200 broadcast ipx network 2 frame relay map ipx 2 000 0c07 d530 300 broadcast For subinterface serial 0 1 the router at the other end might be config ured as ipx routing interface serial 2 multipoint ipx network 1 frame relay map ipx 1 000 0c02 5f4f 200 broadcast Configure Transparent Bridging for Frame Relay Transparent bridging for Frame Relay encapsulated serial and HSSI interfaces is supported on the AI2524 router Transparent bridging for Frame R
93. to use vpdn incoming remote name local name virtual template number Configure Outgoing VPDN Connections on the Network Access Server In global configuration mode configure a network access server to make outgoing L2F connections to a home gateway for VPDN 1 Enable virtual private networking vpdn enable 2 Specify the remote host that is to accept L2F connections vpdn outgoing domain name local name ip ip address Example Network Access Server Servicing Multiple Domains This example provides VDPN configurations for a single NAS and two different gateways The two gateways are presumably located at two entirely separate companies The NAS decides which company to forward to based on the domain name that is passed by the user The commands also illustrate where to configure the commandsvpdn outgoing on the network access server and vpdn incoming on a home gateway NASI vpdn enable vpdn outgoing domainl com nasl ip 1 1 1 1 vpdn outgoing domain2 com nas2 ip 2 2 2 2 August 1997 Page 11 29 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual rit Gateway1 Domain1 vpdn enable vpdn incoming nasl gatewayl virtual template 1 interface virtual template 1 ip unnumbered Ethernet0 ppp authentication chap Gateway2 Domain2 vpdn enable vpdn incoming nas2 gateway2 virtual template 1 int virtual template 1 ip unnumbered Ethernet0 ppp authentication chap Example NAS Servicing Multiple Domains to the Sa
94. when the net work topology changes Because IGRP and RIP have different update timers and because they require different amounts of time to propa gate routing updates one part of the network will follow IGRP routes and another part will follow RIP routes This results in routing loops Although these loops do not exist for long the Time To Live TTL will quickly reach zero and ICMP will send a TTL exceeded message This message will cause most applications to stop attempting network connections Disable the Validation of Source IP Addresses By default the software validates the source IP address of incoming RIP routing updates If that source address is not valid the software discards the routing update Consider disabling this feature if you have a router that is off network and you want to receive its updates Disabling this feature is not rec ommended under normal circumstances To disable the default func tion that validates the source IP addresses of incoming routing updates perform this task in router configuration mode e Disable the validation of the source IP address of incoming RIP routing updates no validate update source ion In addition to running multiple routing protocols simultaneously the Cisco IOS software can redistribute information from one routing pro tocol to another For example you can instruct the software to readver tise IP Enhanced IGRP derived routes using the RIP protocol or to readvertise stati
95. with TACACS or extended TACACS The optional keyword list name is used only with AAA TACACS Note If you use a list name that has not been configured with the aaa authentication ppp command you disable PPP on the line 3 Adda username entry for each remote system from which the local router or access server requires authentication In global configuration mode specify the password to be used in CHAP or PAP caller identification username name password secret Page 11 4 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps 4 In interface configuration mode configure Terminal Access Con troller Access Control System TACACS on a specific interface as an alternative to global host authentication ppp use tacacs single line or aaa authentication ppp Use the ppp use tacacs command with TACACS and Ex tended TACACS Use the aaa authentication ppp com mand with Authentication Authorization and Accounting AAA TACACS Example CHAP with an Encrypted Password These configuration examples enable CHAP on interface serial 0 of three devices 1 Configure Router yyy hostname yyy interface serial 0 encapsulation ppp ppp authentication chap username xxx password secretxy username zzz password secretzy 2 Configure Router xxx hostname xxx interface serial 0 encapsulation ppp ppp authentication chap username yyy password secretxy username zzz password secretxz August 199
96. your software Refer to Use Flash Load Helper to Upgrade Software on Run from Flash Systems for more information about working with Flash load helper Understanding Relocatable Images Because partitioning requires that run from Flash images be loaded into different Flash memory banks at different physical addresses im ages must be relocatable A relocatable image is an image that contains special relocation information that allows e The image to relocate itself whenever it is loaded into RAM fo execution e A download program with appropriate support to relocate the im age before it is stored in Flash memory so the image can run in place in Flash memory regardless of where in Flash memory it is stored Run from Flash systems formerly ran nonrelocatable images that needed to be stored in Flash memory at a specific address As a result the image had to be stored as the first file in Flash memory If th image was stored at any other location in Flash memory it could not be executed in Flash memory nor could the image be executed from RAM The relocatable image overcomes this limitation With Flash partitioning the run from Flash images will not work un less they are loaded into the first device as the first file This require ment defeats the purpose of partitioning However relocatable images can be loaded into any Flash partition and not necessarily as the first file within the partition and executed in place August
97. 0 cee eseeseesceceseceseceseceseeesecneeeeaeenes 7 11 Perform General Startup Tasks ce ceccesceseceseceseceseceseessneseeeseneesaeesaeecaaecsaecsaeceeeaeens 7 12 General Startup Fask Listene aienea agii riie anes cesaien eeceees 7 12 Enter Configuration Mode and Select a Configuration Source 0 0 0 eee 7 12 Modify the Configuration Register Boot Field ee eee eeeeeeeseeeneeeneeenaeeees 7 15 Specify the Startup Configuration Fil oo eee ceeeceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeee 7 18 Store System Images and Configuration Files 00 ccccecsseceesceeeeeceeneeceeeeeceeeeeeeaeceaeenas 7 21 Store System Images and Configuration Files Task List ee eeeeeeeeees 7 21 Copy System Images from Flash Memory to a Network Server 7 21 Copy Configuration Files from the Router to a Network Server 7 23 Perform Startup Lasksictsccecsttesassietieisleins nds nec tase E E E cttw Rests 7 24 Startup Fask Lists ie uat nte ne E T E sade tantedaddecnsad dante TEE AS Gad 1 24 Partition Flash Memory Using Dual Flash Bank 1 24 Use Flash Load Helper to Upgrade Software on Run from Flash Systems 7 29 Manually Load a System Image from ROM Monitor eseeseesereeeeresreeresrrerrrrresreree 7 35 Manually Boot from Flash seseeeeeeseeeesesesesrserssresresressesrrsserrrssresrssreereresesees 7 35 Manually Boot from a Network File ee eeeeseeseeneeseeeceseceaeceeeeseceseeeaeenes 7 36 Manually Boot from ROM sesessseeseeessesrissrserssresr
98. 0 is to be booted from a host with IP address 131 108 126 111 these com mands must be in the configuration boot system gs3 bfx 83 2 0 131 108 13 111 I interface Serial 1 ip address 131 108 126 200 255 255 255 0 encapsulation frame relay frame relay map ip 131 108 126 111 100 broadcast Page 13 48 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps In this case 100 is the DLCI that can get to host 131 108 126 111 The remote router must have this frame relay map entry frame relay map ip 131 108 126 200 101 broadcast This entry allows the remote router to return a boot image from the network server to the router booting over Frame Relay Here 101 is a DLCI of the router being booted August 1997 Page 13 49 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Page 13 50 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 14 T1 Interface Configuration Steps Chapter 14 T1 Interface Configuration Steps Introduction Configure Fractional T1 This chapter describes how to configure the AI2524 for fractional T1 Configuration Overview This section describes how to configure fractional T1 and T1 FT1 T1 service modules installed the AI2425 router The tasks associated with configuring T1 include e Specify the Clock Source e Enable Data Inversion Before Transmission e Specify the Frame Type of a FT T1 Line e Specify the CSU Line Build Out e Specify FT1 T1 Line Code Type e Enable R
99. 1 PDU is sent to all Lev ell IS IS and ES IS neighbors If a response is received the requested information is displayed If a response is not received within the response time a Type 2 PDU is sent to all L evel1 and Leve 12 neighbors Specifying the EXEC command tarp re solve tid 2 causes only a Type 2 PDU to be sent You can configure the length of time that the router will wait for a re sponse in the form of a Type 3 PDU Page 9 62 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps Configure TARP Timers TARP timers provide default values and typically do not need to be changed The amount of time that the router waits to receive a response from a Type 1 PDU a Type 2 PDU and a Type 5 PDU can be configured In addition you can also configure the PDU s lifetime based on the num ber of hops Timers can also be set to control how long dynamically created TARP entries remain in the TID cache and how long the system ID to se quence number mapping entry remains in the loop detection buffer ta ble The loop detection buffer table prevents TARP PDUs from looping In global configuration mode configure TARP PDU timers control PDU lifetime and set how long entries remain in cache 1 Configure the number of seconds that the router will wait for a re sponse from a TARP Type 1 PDU tarp tl response timer seconds 2 Configure the number of seconds that the router will wait for a re sponse from a TARP
100. 18 August 1997 2524UM Configure IS IS Dynamic Routing Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps e Disable split horizon for ISO IGRP updates no clns split horizon The default for all LAN interfaces is for split horizon to be enabled the default for WAN interfaces on X 25 Frame Relay or SMDS net works is for split horizon to be disabled IS IS is a dynamic routing specification described in ISO 10589 Cisco s implementation of IS IS allows you to configure IS IS as an ISO CLNS routing protocol To configure IS IS complete these tasks Only enabling IS IS is re quired the remainder of the tasks are optional although you might b required to perform them depending upon your specific application e Enable IS IS e Assign Multiple Area Addresses to IS IS Areas e Configure IS IS Parameters e Configure IS IS Interface Parameters In addition you can also configure these miscellaneous features e Filter routing information refer to Create Packet Forwarding Fil ters and Establish Adjacencies e Redistribute routing information from one routing process to an other refer to Redistribute Routing Information e Configure administrative distances refer to Specify Preferred Routes Enable IS IS To configure IS IS dynamic routing you must enable the IS IS routing process identify the address for the router and specify the interfaces that are to route IS IS CLNS routing is enabled by defaul
101. 1997 2524UM Page 7 25 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Unless the image is downloaded as the first file in the first partition this download must be performed by an image that recognizes relocat able images In contrast a nonrelocatable image is an image that does not recognize relocatable images You can identify a relocatable image by its name The naming conven tion for images that are stored on a UNIX system is platform capabilities type The letter in the type field indicates a relocatable image Examples of some relocatable image names include igs i I IP only imag e igs d l Desktop feature image igs bpx l Enterprise image Only images with the igs prefix used by the AI2524 are available as relocatable images Images distributed on floppy diskettes might have different naming conventions For backward compatibility the relocatable images are linked to exe cute as the first file in the first Flash memory bank This makes the im ages similar to previous Flash memory images Thus if you download a relocatable image into a nonrelocatable image system the image runs correctly from Flash memory Dual Flash Bank Configuration Task List To use dual Flash memory bank perform these tasks e Partition Flash Memory e Copy aFile into a Flash Partition e Manually Boot from Flash Memory e Configure the Router to Automatically Boot from Flash Memory e Configure a Flash Partition as a TFTP Serve
102. 2 Configuration for Router Y service tcp keepalives in service tcp keepalives out interface serial 1 x25 pvc 2 tunnel 172 20 1 1 interface serial 0 pvc 1 Configure an XOT Remote PVC A PVC can be connected to another router over a LAN with the XOT protocol When the interfaces come up a TCP connection is estab lished to the router that is acting as the switch for the destination All X 25 packets will be sent and received over this reliable data stream August 1997 2524UM Page 12 35 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Flow control is maintained end to end This was previously called re mote switching or tunneling Running X 25 over TCP IP provides a number of benefits Other rout ers can switch IP datagrams containing the X 25 packets using the router s high speed switching abilities X 25 data can be sent over net works running only TCP IP protocols The TCP IP protocol suite runs over many different networking technologies including Ethernet Token Ring T1 serial and FDDI Thus X 25 data can be forwarded over these media to another XOT host where it can be output to an X 25 interface Both interfaces must define complementary tunneled PVCs To configure a remote PVC to connect across a TCP IP LAN type in interface configuration mode x25 pvc numberl tunnel address interface serial string pvc number2 option The command options ar packetsize in out and window size in out they allow a PVC
103. 2 Specify FT1 T1 Line Code Type ce eeeeescesscessecseecssecesecesecseeseeeesessaeees 14 3 Enable Remote Alarms c32 2 3002 2 n8eciecdtiedes en he a a ee en 14 3 Enable Loopcodes that Initiate Remote LoopbackS e ee eeeeeeeeeeceeeeeees 14 4 Specify Times lots ciie ich ein heel aes ee ieeewe nia cent dd vente 14 5 August 1997 TOC 9 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Chapter 15 56 64 kbps Switched and Digital Data Services DDS Interface Config ration Steps sescees scssievessesvevnenssavevsscenecvenes sine iosia ssrin toa teeosa eier iseia iaee aaie 15 1 Tit OCU Ct ON xi senne ea O E a E a e E A EE SS 15 1 Set the Clock SOUTE i entie ea ae e a a enced tiig 15 1 Set the Network Line Speed misni akrigis p adi a iaie 15 2 Enable Scrambled Data Coding eseseseeseessresseseesserriesteerssresresttserttssrertssreneesseseseeet 15 3 Change between DDS and Switched Dial Up Modes sseesessseeseeeereerssreerrsreererrrsrses 15 3 Enable Acceptance of a Remote Loopback Request 2 0 0 0 eeeeeceeeeeeneeeneeeneeeneeeeseens 15 4 Selecta Service Provider xtc cecsssscseteagaddvsaleesensecivadeeeacdeeacguaieobacedesercodancopinecssascdeebeaee 15 4 Chapter 16 Basic Comer athoniscigeccciecessscsssveecsvevessssestessesssecssicopscbivecesteesessbensevontes 16 1 Connectins tothe Network eserine ieie nnd Wingo EAA aetkiiein 16 1 Connecting to an Ethernet Network ccc cesceseceneceeeceeeeeeeeeeneesaeeeaeeeaeeeees 16 1
104. 2 Specify no IP address for the interface no ip address 3 Enable PPP encapsulation encapsulation ppp 4 Enable DDR on the interface dialer in band 5 Configure bandwidth on demand by specifying the maximum load before the dialer places another call to a destination dialer load threshold load inbound outbound either 6 Enable Multilink PPP ppp multilink Configure Multilink PPP on a Single ISDN BRI Interface To enable Multilink PPP on a single Integrated Services Digital Net work ISDN BRI interface you are not required to define a dialer ro tary group separately because ISDN interfaces are dialer rotary groups by default Beginning in global configuration mode enable PPP on an ISDN BRI interface 1 Specify an interface interface bri number 2 Provide an appropriate protocol address for the interface ip address ip address mask 3 Enable PPP encapsulation encapsulation ppp Page 11 20 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps Optional Specify a dialer idle timeout dialer idle timeout seconds Specify the dialer load threshold for bringing up additional WAN links dialer load threshold load Configure the ISDN interface to call the remote site dialer map protocol next hop address name hostname spc speed 56 64 broadcast dial string isdn subaddress Add the interface to a dialer rotary group dialer group group number Optional En
105. 2 Using Subinterfaces to Provide Full Connectiv ity on a Partially Meshed Frame Relay Network B B A c A c E D E D Network A Partialy Meshed Frame Relay Network B Fully Meshed Frame Relay Network without Full Connectivity Network with Full Connectivity Network C Partially Meshed Frame Relay Network with Full Connectivity g configuring subinterfaces 8 Define Frame Relay Subinterfaces Configure subinterfaces on a Frame Relay network 1 Specify a serial interface interface serial number 2 Configure Frame Relay encapsulation on the serial interface encapsulation frame relay 3 Specify a subinterface interface serial number subinterface number multipoint point to point Subinterfaces can be configured for multipoint or point to point com munication There is no default Page 13 20 August 1997 2524UM interface serial 0 Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps Define Subinterface Addressing For point to point subinterfaces the destination is presumed to be known and is identified or implied in the frame relay inter face dlci command For multipoint subinterfaces the destinations can be dynamically resolved through the use of Frame Relay Inverse ARP or can be statically mapped through the use of the frame relay map command Addressing on Point to Point Subinterfaces If you specified a point to point subinterface in Step 3 unde Define Frame Relay Subinterfaces type in interface configu
106. 24UM Pid Chapter 15 56 64 kbps Switched and Digital Data Services DDS Interface Chapter 15 56 64 kbps Switched and Digital Data Services DDS Interface Configuration Steps Introduction Set the Clock Source This chapter describes how to configure 2 and 4 wire 56 64 kbps ser vice modules These tasks are described e Set the Clock Source Set the Network Line Speed e Enable Scrambled Data Coding e Change Between DDS and Switched Dial Up Modes e Enable Acceptance of a Remote Loopback Request Select a Service Provider In most applications the CSU DSU should be configured with the service module 56k clock source line command Fo back to back configurations use the internal keyword to config ure one CSU DSU and use the line keyword to configure the othe CSU DSU Configure the clock source for a 4 wire 56 64 kbps CSU DSU mod ule service module 56k clock source line internal Do not use any form of this command to revert to the default clock source which is the line clock August 1997 2524UM Page 15 1 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Set the Network Line Speed In interface configuration mode configure the network line speed for a 4 wire 56 64 kbps CSU DSU module service module 56k clock rate line speed You can use the following line speed settings 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 56 64 kpbs and an auto setting The 64 kbps line speed cannot be used with back to back digital da
107. 2524UM Page 7 3 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Note Be sure there is enough available space before copying a file to Flash memory Use the show flash command and compare the size of the file you want to copy to the amount of available Flash memory shown If the space available is less than the space required by the file you want to copy the copy process will continue but the entire file will not be copied into Flash memory The failure message buffer overflow xxxx xxxx will appear where xxxx xxxx is the number of bytes read in relation to the number of bytes available When you enter the copy tftp flash command the system prompts you for the IP address or domain name of the TFTP server This server can be another router serving ROM or Flash system soft ware images The system then prompts you for the filename of the software image to copy For the copy tftp flash and copy tftp file idcom mands the router gives you the option of erasing the existing Flash memory before writing to it when there is space available to do so If there is no free Flash memory available or if the Flash memory has never been written to you must run the erase routine before copying new files The system will inform you of these conditions and prompt you for a response The file id argument of the copy tftp file id command specifies a device and filename as the destination of the copy opera tion You can omit the device entering only copy tft
108. 4 Router Card User s Manual Use Setup after First Time Startup 0 eee eeeeeseeseesceeseeceseceseceaeeesecneeeeaeenes 5 19 Use the Streamlined Setup Facility 0 ee ceceseesceeseeceeeceaeeeeeeseeeeeenaeseaeeees 5 27 Chapter 6 Using the System Configuration Dialog cssscssssccssssssssssccssssesees 6 1 Introduction si ic cat Messiaen ie ee es ee Se ee 6 1 System Configuration Dialog eee esecssecsseceseceseceseeeseeseneseaeeeaeeeaeeeeaeceaseneeseessaeeaes 6 1 Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Image6 csscssssccssssccsssscsssscscsssscssesssees 7 1 Introducti Onis concedes Gaye te ne hich cad E ae a cleat E e E a 7 1 Image and Configuration File Load Task List cece eeeesceeseceeceseceseceeeeeeeeseeeneenes 7 2 Retrieve System Images and Configuration Files 0 cc cescesceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeaeeees 7 3 Retrieve System Images and Configuration File Task List 00 7 3 Copy System Images from a Network Server to Flash Memory 006 7 3 Copy Configuration Files from a Network Server to the Router 7 7 Change the Buffer Size for Loading Configuration Files cei ceeeeeeeeees 7 8 Verify the Image in Flash MeMry ee eee eeeceseceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeaeseaeeaes 7 9 Display System Image and Configuration Information cece eeeeeeeeeees 7 9 Reexecute the Configuration Commands in Startup Configuration 7 11 Clear the Configuration Information 0 0 0
109. 4000 frame relay priority group 2 access list 100 permit tcp any any eq 2065 access list 115 permit tcp any any eq 256 priority list 2 protocol decnet hig priority list 2 ip nor priority list 2 default mediu protocol ip 1 list 100 protocol ip 2 list 115 default 3 queue 1 byte count 1600 limit 200 queue 2 byte count 600 limit 200 queue 3 byte count 500 limit 200 queue list queue list queue list queue list queue list PRR PPE queue list August 1997 2524UM Page 13 17 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Customize Frame Relay for Your Network Perform these tasks to customize Frame Relay e Configure Frame Relay Subinterfaces e Configure Frame Relay Switching e Disable or Reenable Frame Relay Inverse ARP Create a Broadcast Queue for an Interface e Configure Payload Compression e Configure TCP IP Header Compression e Configure Discard Eligibility e Configure DLCI Priority Levels Configure Frame Relay Subinterfaces To understand and define Frame Relay Subinterfaces perform these tasks e Understand Frame Relay Subinterfaces e Define Frame Relay Subinterfaces e Define Subinterface Addressing After these tasks are completed you can also perform these optional tasks e Configure Transparent Bridging for Frame Relay e Configure a Backup Interface for a Subinterface Understand Frame Relay Subinterfaces Frame Relay subinterfaces p
110. 5 31370054069 alias seriall August 1997 Page 12 55 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Configuration for Router B interface serial 0 ip 172 20 170 3 255 255 255 0 x25 address 31370054065 x25 map ip 172 20 170 1 31370054068 x25 map ip 172 20 170 2 31370054068 I interface serial 3 ip 172 20 170 4 255 255 255 0 x25 address 31370054067 x25 map ip 172 20 170 2 31370054069 x25 map ip 172 20 170 1 31370054069 allow either destination address x25 31370054065 alias serial3 x25 31370054067 alias serial0 Example Booting from a Network Server over X 25 Over X 25 you cannot boot the router from a network server via a broadcast Instead you must boot from a specific host Also anx25 map command must exist for the host that you boot from The x25 map command is used to map an IP address into an X 121 address There must be an x25 map command that matches the IP address given on the boot system command line boot system gs3 k 100 172 18 126 111 interface Serial 1 ip address 172 18 126 200 255 255 255 0 encapsulation X25 x25 address 10004 x25 map IP 172 18 126 111 10002 broadcast lapb nl 12040 clockrate 56000 In this case 10002 is the X 121 address of the remote router that can get to host 172 18 126 111 The remote router must have this x25 map entry x25 map IP 172 18 126 200 10004 broadcast Page 12 56 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps This entry allows t
111. 5 Configured to Allow Ping Support over Multiple Lines 12 54 Example Booting from a Network Server over X 25 ceeeesceeseeeseeeneeenseees 12 56 Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps cscccsssssssssscssseccesees 13 1 IntrodUctiOn 4 ai scc ee aa ane ees he eect ae A ide ea de cao 13 1 Frame Relay Hardware Configuration cecceessesseeseeeseecnseceaecoaeeseeeaeecaaesnseseaeeeees 13 1 Frame Relay Configuration Task List ceccesceseceseceseceeeeeeeeeee cess ceeeeeeeseneeseeseaees 13 2 Enable Frame Relay Encapsulation on an Interface 0 ee eeeeseceseceteceneceteeeeeeeaeens 13 2 Examples IETF Encapsulation cece cece cc ees cssessseesceseseeeesesssseeseeseeags 13 3 Configure Dynamic or Static Address Mapping 0 0 0 0 ec seeeeceeceeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseseens 13 3 Configure Dynamic Mapping eeeeeseeseeeseescecceceaeceaecnaecaeesaaesaeseaeesees 13 3 Configure Static Mapping 0 00 cece esceesceeseecssecesecsseceseceseesseeeseeeseeseeceeeeeseeeaees 13 3 Examples Static Address Mapping csscesceseceseceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeaeeeees 13 4 Configure the LMI cic esscect ei tee ee ee ee a 13 5 Allow LMI Autosense to Operate cece eeccseceeeeeeeseeeeceseceeeeseeeseneeenaeeaeens 13 5 Lhe EMTAutosense Process vieceis esez coin yiseetidinsedlaaitetan et eaters ale 13 5 Configuring LMI Autosense 0 ce eeeesceeseecscecnseceseceseceseesseesseeseneeeeeseenaes 13 6 Explicitly Configure
112. 5 Itc 25 Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps Set the Packet Numbering Modulo The AI2524 implementation of X 25 supports both modulo 8 and mod ulo 128 packet sequence numbering module 8 is the default In interface configuration mode set the packet numbering modulo x25 modulo 8 128 Note Because the X 25 protocol requires the DTE and DCE to have identical modulos changes you make to the modulo when the interface is up are held until the X 25 protocol restarts the packet service The X 25 modulo and the LAPB modulo are distinct and serve differ ent purposes LAPB modulo 128 or extended mode can be used to achieve higher throughput across the DTE or DCE interface it affects only the local point of attachment X 25 Packet Level Protocol PLP modulo 128 can be used to achieve higher end to end throughput for virtual circuits by allowing more data packets to be in transit through the X 25 network Set the X 121 Address If your router does not originate or terminate calls but only participates in X 25 switching this task is optional However if the router is at tached to a PDN you must set the interface X 121 address assigned by the X 25 network service provider In interface configuration mode set the X 121 address x25 address x121 address August 1997 2524UM Page 12 5 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Set the Default Flow Control Values Because X 25 is a strongly flow controlled protoco
113. 7 Page 11 5 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 3 Configure Router zzz hostname zzz interface serial 0 encapsulation ppp ppp authentication chap username xxx password secretxz username yyy password secretzy When you look at the configuration file the passwords will be en crypted and the display will look similar to hostname xxx interface serial 0 encapsulation ppp ppp authentication chap username yyy password 7 121F0A username zzz password 7 1329A05 Enable Link Link Quality Monitoring LQM is available on all serial interfaces Quality running PPP LQM will monitor the link quality and if the quality drops below a configured percentage the router shuts down the link The percentages are calculated for both the incoming and outgoing di LQM rections The outgoing quality is calculated by comparing the total number of packets and bytes sent to the total number of packets and bytes received by the destination node The incoming quality is calcu lated by comparing the total number of packets and bytes received to the total number of packets and bytes sent by the destination peer Monitoring When LQM is enabled Link Quality Reports LQRs are sent every keepalive period LQRs are sent in place of keepalives All incoming keepalives are responded to properly If LQM is not configured kee palives are sent every keepalive period and all incoming LQRs are re sponded to with an LQR In interface configura
114. 8 111 231 encapsulation frame relay frame relay lmi type ansi frame relay route 301 interface serial 1 103 frame relay route 302 interface serial 1 203 frame relay map ip 131 108 111 4 400 broadcast August 1997 2524UM Page 13 35 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Example Switching over an IP Tunnel You can switch over an IP tunnel by creating a point to point tunnel across the internetwork over which PVC switching can take place se Figure 13 7 Figure 13 7 Frame Relay Switch over IP Tunnel Router D Sas eet arsse sree i S31 DTE 4 T r ae a The following configurations illustrate how to create the IP network depicted in Figure 13 7 Page 13 36 August 1997 2524UM Pil Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps Configuration for Router A frame relay switching interface Ethernet0 ip address 108 131 123 231 255 255 255 0 interface Ethernetl ip address 131 108 5 231 255 255 255 0 interface Serial0 no ip address shutdown interface Seriall ip address 131 108 222 231 255 255 255 0 encapsulation frame relay frame relay map ip 131 108 222 4 400 broadcast frame relay route 100 interface Tunnell 200 interface Tunnell tunnel source Ethernet0 tunnel destination 150 150 150 123 Configuration for Router D frame relay switching l tzi interfac thernet0 ip address 131 108 231 123 255 255 255 0 ti nterfac thernetl
115. 92UM Al193 ES User s Manual UM193ES AI193 TX User s Manual 193TXUM All 94 User s Manual AI94U Al196 I User s Manual 196IUM Al196 IEGB User s Manual 196TUM AI196 X User s Manual 196XUM AI198 System Manager User s Manual 98UM Common Alarm Panel Manual 180CAPUM RDCI80HP Power Supply Manual 180PSUM AI325AC Power Supply Manual AI325UM AII80FRF AICool Fan Manual HMFRF A AlSwitch 180 Hardware Manual HW0593 AppliedView Network Management Sys AV201UM tem User s Manual To order these or any other AISwitch manuals contact your sales rep resentative at 800 247 9482 August 1997 2524UM Page 1 3 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Contact To register documentation contact Applied Innovation Inc at Information Applied Innovation Inc Publications Dept 5800 Innovation Dr Dublin OH 43216 3271 Phone 614 798 2000 800 247 9482 FAX 614 798 1770 Email aidoc aiinet com Register your documentation by completing the registration form The most current version of release notes and the A7798 CLC User s Manual are available on the Applied Innovation web site at http www aiinet com Click on the Documentation option These additional email contacts are also available National Sales Department sales aiinet com Customer Service Department cssupport aiinet com Marketing Department info aiinet com Human Resources Department hr aiinet com Technical Suppo
116. 99299429940 Configuration for Router Y 2992992990 In this example the PDN has established a PVC through its network connecting PVC number 3 of access point A to PVC number 4 of ac cess point B On Router X aconnection is established between Router X and Router Y s IP address 172 20 1 4 On Router Y a connection is established between Router Y and Router X s IP address 172 20 1 3 August 1997 2524UM Page 12 21 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Set X 25 TCP IP Header Compression The AI2524 supports RFC 1144 TCP IP header compression THC on serial lines using HDLC and X 25 encapsulation THC encapsula tion is different from other encapsulation traffic The implementation of compressed TCP over X 25 uses one virtual circuit to pass the com pressed packets Any IP traffic including standard TCP is separate from TCH traffic it is carried over separate IP encapsulation virtual circuits or identified separately in a multiprotocol virtual circuit Note If you specify both ip and compressedtcp in the same x25 map compressedtcp command they must both specify the same IP address In interface configuration mode set up a separate virtual circuit for X 25 TCP IP header compression x25 map compressedtcp ip address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address option Configure X 25 Bridging The AI2524 transparent bridging software supports bridging ove X 25 virtual circuits Bridging is not supp
117. 997 2524UM Page 12 1 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Note If you connect a router to an X 25 network use the parameters set by your network administrator for th connection these parameters will typically be thos described in the Configure Interface and Modify LAPB Protocol Parameters sections Also note that the X 25 Level 2 parameters described in the Modify LAPB Protocol Parameters section affect X 25 Level 3 operations Configure To configure an X 25 interface perform these tasks Interface e Set the X 25 Mode e Setthe Virtual Circuit Ranges e Set the Packet Numbering Modulo e Setthe X 121 Address e Set the Default Flow Control Values These tasks describe the parameters that are essential for correct X 25 behavior The first task is required The others might be required or op tional depending on what the router is expected to do and on the X 25 network Set the X 25 Mode A router using X 25 Level 3 encapsulation can e ActasaDTE or DCE protocol device according to the needs of your X 25 service supplier e Use the Internet Engineering Task Force IETF standard encap sulation as specified by RFC 1356 Because the default serial encapsulation is High level Data Link Con trol HDLC you must explicitly configure an X 25 encapsulation method In interface configuration mode configure the mode of operation and one of these encapsulation types for a specified interface encapsulation x25 dte dce
118. A multipoint subinterface is used to connect hosts for a given protocol There is no restriction on the number of encapsulation commands that can be configured on a multipoint subinterface Because the hosts ap pear on the same subinterface they are not relying on the router to dis tribute routing updates between them When a routing process forwards a datagram to a multipoint subinterface the X 25 encapsula tion process must be able to map the datagram s destination address to a configured encapsulation command If the routing process cannot find a map for the datagram destination address the encapsulation will fail Note Because of the complex operations dependent on a sub interface and its type the router will not allow a subinter face type to be changed nor can a subinterface with the same number be re established once it has been deleted After a subinterface has been deleted you must reload the Cisco IOS software by using the reload command to remove all internal references However you can easily reconstitute the deleted subinterface by using a different subinterface number Create and Configure X 25 Subinterfaces In interface configuration mode create and configure a subinterface by completing the first task and one or both of the second tasks 1 Create a point to point or multipoint subinterface interface serial number subinterface number point to point multipoint 2 Configure an X 25 encapsulation map for the
119. AISwitch AI2524 Router User s Manual August 1997 El Applied Innovation Inc AI2524 Router e TM User s Manual AISwitch D Applied Innovation Inc AI2524 Router User s Manual August 1997 Reference 2524UM AI2524 Router User s Manual Pit Copyright Notice Copyright 1983 1997 by Applied Innovation Incorporated AID The material discussed in this manual is the proprietary property of AII AH retains all rights to reproduction and distribution of this document AlSwitch AIlSwitch Series 180 and AISwitch Series 130 are registered trademarks of AII UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited Any other trademarks appearing in this manual are registered trademarks of their respective companies FCC Warning The Federal Communications Commission has set limits for emitted radio interference The AISwitch is constructed with this electromagnetic interference EMI limitation in mind Th AISwitch is classified under FCC regulations as a Class A device that is a device for use in com mercial environments and not in residential areas This device has been tested and shown to comply with the following FCC rule Part 15 Subpart J Operation of this equipment in a residential are may cause interference to radio and TV reception requiring the user to take whatever steps are nec essary to correct the interference Information is
120. Assembler Disassemble e qlic IBM s QLLC Each mapped protocol except bridging and CLNS takes a datagram address All bridged datagrams are sent to all bridge maps on an inter face CLNS uses the mapped X 121 address as the SNPA which is ref erenced byaclns neighbor command The configured datagram protocol s and relevant addresses are mapped to the destination host s X 121 address All protocols that are supported for RFC 1356 opera tion can be specified in a single map Bridging and QLLC are not sup ported for RFC 1356 encapsulation If IP and TCP IP header compression are both specified the same IP address must be given for both protocols When setting up the address map you can include options such as en abling broadcasts specifying the number of virtual circuits allowed and defining various user facility settings August 1997 2524UM Page 12 19 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Note Multiprotocol maps especially those configured to carr broadcast traffic can result in significantly larger traffi loads requiring a larger hold queue larger window sizes or multiple virtual circuits You can simplify the configuration for the Open Shortest Path First OSPF protocol by adding the optional broadcast keyword Configure PAD Access By default PAD connection attempts are processed for session cre ation or protocol translation from all hosts In interface configuration mode restrict PAD connections to only s
121. B You can use only LAPB as a serial encapsulation method if you hav a private serial line You must use one of the X 25 packet level encap sulations when attaching to an X 25 network The LAPB standards distinguish between two types of hosts Data Terminal Equipment DTE and Data Circuit terminating Equipment DCE At Level 2 or the data link layer in the OSI model LAPB al lows for orderly and reliable exchange of data between a DTE and a DCE A router using LAPB encapsulation can act as a DTE or DCE device at the protocol level which is distinct from the hardware DTE or DCE identity Using LAPB under noisy conditions can result in greater throughput than HDLC encapsulation When LAPB detects a missing frame th router retransmits the frame instead of waiting for the higher layers to recover the lost information This behavior is good only if the host tim ers are relatively slow In the case of quickly expiring host timers however you will discover that LAPB is spending much of its tim transmitting host retransmissions If the line is not noisy the lower overhead of HDLC encapsulation is more efficient than LAPB When you are using long delay satellite links for example the lock step be havior of LAPB makes HDLC encapsulation the better choice To configure LAPB complete these tasks The tasks in the first section are required the remaining are optional e Configure a LAPB Datagram Transport e Modify LAPB Protocol Parame
122. C 4 selom cusco com email the IITML interface development group Page 4 28 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 4 Understanding the User Interface Issue Commands Using the Web Browser Interface To issue commands using the Web Browser interface click Monitor the router in the first list of hypertext links on the home page This dis plays the Web page shown in Figure 4 2 Figure 4 2 The Command Field Web Page for a Router Named example al example exec fa seele S ll Bl Fark Foewarc Aname enad imaces Mpen Print Fre Go le hit gt vamph avec wlel s Mev wl lt l s Cuvl __Handbuvk Nel Erer Ne Dieclory Suflware cxamplc Tonmand Commend hace TIR ves Jeuery Camplete TIRT wens Joner Exec ccomsude Bocess enable Create 3 tenperarr dcsess List entrr access teuplat gt Create gt ccnpcrary escon Lict cntry Fer renal emergensy ucdse setting telema Manage the hardysrs calendar Enter Commands Using Hypertext Links To enter a command using hypertext links scroll through the com mands listed at the bottom of the screen and click the one you want to execute If the link is a complete command it is executed If the com mand has more parameters another list of command hypertext links is displayed Scroll through this second list and click the one you want to execute If the command is a request for information like show command the informa
123. CS returns a pool name as part of authentication authorization and accounting AAA Ifno pool is associated with a given interface the global pool named default is used Precedence Rules These precedence rules of peer IP address support determine which address is used Precedence is listed from most likely to least likely 1 AAA TACACS provided address or addresses from the pool named by AAA TACACS 2 An address from a local IP address pool or DHCP typically not allocated unless no other address exists 3 Dialer map lookup address not done unless no other address ex ists August 1997 2524UM Page 11 9 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 4 Address from an EXEC level PPP or SLIP command or from a chat script 5 Configured address from the peer default ip address command or address from the protocol translate command 6 Peer provided address from IPCP negotiation not accepted unless no other address exists Interfaces Affected IP address pooling is available on all asynchronous serial synchro nous serial ISDN BRI and ISDN PRI interfaces running the Point to Point Protocol PPP or Serial Line Internet Protocol SLIP Choose the IP Address Assignment Method IP address pooling allows configuration of a global default address pooling mechanism per interface configuration of the mechanism and per interface configuration of a specific address or pool name You can define the type of IP address poo
124. E E aa 4 1 End a Session osiin rii in a EE EE ATONE E EREE EA RRR 4 2 User Interface Task Listairisnerianeride o ueta e E TE E AERA E O aesa 4 2 August 1997 TOC 1 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Command Modes x asssccstseastate deters chan chates i ea iE sb EA EE eS E Eea SA STE 4 3 User EXEC Mode Commands 0 eee ceceeeseceseceneceeceseeeseeeseeeseeseeeesecneeeeaeenaes 4 6 Privileged EXEC Mode Commands 00 cece eeceeseeseeesceeececeaeeeeeeaeesaeeenaeceaeenes 4 7 ROM Monitor Mode Commands ceeescesecsseceseceseceseeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeneeneenaes 4 8 Global Configuration Mode Commands cesceecceseceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeenes 4 10 Interface Configuration Mode Commands 0 0 0 0 cee cesceseceseceeeeneeceeeceseensaeenes 4 12 Subinterface Configuration Mode Commands eeeeesecsseceseceteceteeeneeeeees 4 14 Router Configuration Mode 0 cc cecesceseceseceseceseeeseeeeneeeseesace ceaeceessneeeaeeeaeenes 4 15 IPX Router Configuration Mode 0 ceeceecsseeeee cess ceseceeceseceseeeseeseneeeaeeeaeenes 4 16 Route Map Configuration Mode ces ceeccseceeeceeeceeceecseeeeseeseneseneeeaeeeaeenes 4 17 Key Chain Configuration Mode ecceeeessessceesceeececeeeeeeeeneeeseeeaeesaaecsaeseaeeeees 4 17 Response Time Reporter Configuration Mod o eceeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeenseenseeees 4 17 Access List Configuration Mode cesesccsseceseceseceeeceseesseeeeeeseneseaeeeneeneenees 4 17 Cont
125. Ethernet0 async default ip address async mode interactive Interface Asyncl13 ipx network 10 ip unnumbered Ethernet0 async default ip address async mode interactive I Interface Async14 ipx network 11 ip unnumbered Ethernet0 async default ip address async mode interactive Interface Asyncl5 ipx network 12 ip unnumbered Ethernet0 async default ip address async mode interactive Interface Asyncl6 ipx network 13 ip unnumbered Ethernet0 async default ip address async mode interactive I router igrp 15 network 172 16 0 0 end EAZA EZA T724 T724 1723 1723 T2 ELZ EG s EG s 16 16 16 16 16 16 72 72 T2 aes 72 T2 TD 72 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Page 5 26 August 1997 2524UM rid Chapter 5 Using AutoInstall Use this configuration yes no yes Building configuration Use th nabled mode configure command to modify this configuration Router Use the Streamlined Setup Facility The streamlined setup command facility is available only if you router is running from ROM monitor and has RXBOOT ROMs in stalled The streamlined setup command facility permits your router to load a system image from a network server when there are problems with the startup configuration The Cisco IOS software automatically puts you in the streamlined setup command facility when your rou
126. F Area Parameters OSPF software allows you to configure several area parameters Thes area parameters shown in the following list include enabling authen tication defining stub areas and assigning specific costs to the default summary route Authentication allows password based protection against unauthorized access to an area Stub areas are areas into which information on external routes is not sent Instead there is a default external route generated by the area bor der router into the stub area for destinations outside the autonomous system To further reduce the number of link state advertisements sent into a stub area you can configur no summary on the Area Border Router ABR to prevent it from sending summary link advertisement link state advertisements Type 3 into the stub area In router configuration mode specify any of these area parameters as needed for your network e Enable authentication for an OSPF area area area id authentication e Enable MDS authentication for an OSPF area area area id authentication message digest Page 8 4 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 8 AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps e Define an area to be a stub area area area id stub no summary e Assign a specific cost to the default summary route used for th stub area area area id default cost cost Configure OSPF Not So Stubby Area NSSA NSSA area is similar to OSPF stub area NSSA does not flood Type 5 external li
127. I2524 Router Card User s Manual Configure Async lines yes Async line speed 9600 57600 Configure for HW flow control Configure for modems yes no Con Con Con Con Con Configure for Async IPX figure Default IP addresses yes figure for TCP Header Compression figure for routing updates on async links yes yes figure for default chat script Configure for Dial in IP SLIP PPP access figure for Dynamic IP addresses no no yes no yes yes yes yes no no no yes Configure for Appletalk Remote Access leTalk Network for ARAP clients Appl Zone name for ARAP clients ARA Configuring interface parameters Configuring interface Ethernet0 Is this interface in use yes Configure IP on this interface IP address for this interface Number of bits in subnet field Class B network is 172 16 0 0 Configure AppleTalk on this interface Extended AppleTalk network AppleTalk AppleTalk AppleTalk zone name Sales AppleTalk additional zone name Configure IPX on this interface IPX network number 1 ye starting cable range Configuring interface Serial0 Is this interface in use no Configure IP on this interface Configure IP unnumbered on this Assign to which interface Eth 1 20 Dialins yes 17241631222 2 8 8 subnet bits mask is 24 yes s ae ending cable range 1 yes yes no
128. IP is normally a broadcast protocol Therefore for RIP routing up dates to reach point to point or nonbroadcast networks you must con figure the Cisco IOS software to permit this exchange of routing Page 8 16 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 8 AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps information To define a neighboring router with which to exchange point to point routing information type this command in router con figuration mode neighbor ip address To control the set of interfaces with which to exchange routing up dates you can disable the sending of routing updates on specified in terfaces by configuring the passive interface command Specify a RIP Version By default the software receives RIP Versi onl and Vers ion2 pack ets but sends only Vers ion1 packets You can configure the softwar to receive and send only Ver sion packets Alternatively you can configure the software to receive and send only Vers ion2 packets To configure the software to receive and send only RIP Ver sion1 or only RIP Version 2 packets type this command in router configuration mode version 1 2 The preceding task controls the default behavior of RIP You can over ride that behavior by configuring a particular interface to behave dif ferently To control which RIP version an interface sends perform one of these tasks in interface configuration mode e Configure an interface to send only RIP Ver sion packets ip rip send version 1
129. M Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps The IS IS routing protocol interprets the bytes from the AFI up to but not including the system ID field in the DSP as an area identifier Th system ID specifies the system Figure 9 4 illustrates the IS IS NSAP addressing structure The maxi mum address size is 20 bytes Figure 9 4 IS IS NSAP Addressing Structure Addressing Rules All NSAP addresses must obey these constraints No two nodes can have addresses with the same NET that is ad dresses that match all but the N selector S field in the DSP No two nodes residing within the same area can have addresses in which the system ID fields are the same ISO IGRP requires at least 10 bytes of length 1 byte for domain 2 bytes for area 6 bytes for system ID and 1 byte for N selector ISO IGRP and IS IS should not be configured for the same area Do not specify an NSAP address where all bytes up to but not in cluding the system ID are the same when enabling both ISO IGRP and IS IS routing A router can have one or more area addresses The concept of mul tiple area addresses is described in Assign Multiple Area Address es to IS IS Areas IS IS requires at least 8 bytes one byte for area 6 bytes for system ID and 1 byte for N selector August 1997 2524UM Page 9 5 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Addressing Examples Examples of OSI network and GOSIP NSAP addresses using the ISO IGRP i
130. Manual Pit e LAPB T4 The LAPB standards define a timer to detect unsig naled link failures T4 The T4 timer is reset every time a frame is received from the partner on the link If the T4 timer expires Receiver Ready frame with the Poll bit set is sent to the partner which is required to respond If the partner does not respond the standard polling mechanism is used to determine whether the link is down The period of T4 must be greater than the period of T1 Another LAPB timer function allows brief hardware failures while the protocol is up without requiring a protocol reset When a brief hardware outage occurs the link will continue uninterrupt ed if the outage is corrected before the specified hardware outage period expires Configure LAPB Priority and Custom Queuing AI2524 priority queuing and custom queuing are available for LAPB to allow you to improve link responsiveness to a given type of traffic by specifying the priority of that type of traffic for transmission on the link Priority queuing is a mechanism that classifies packets based on cer tain criteria and then assigns the packets to lof 4 output queues with high medium normal or low priority Custom queuing similarly clas sifies packets assigns them to 1 of 10 output queues and controls the percentage of an interface s available bandwidth that is used for a queue For example you can use priority queuing to ensure that all Telnet traffic is processed prompt
131. Map of Addresses 00 0 0 cecceeceeeceseesereseeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 12 41 Example CMNS Configured for X 121 and MAC Addresses ceeeee 12 41 Example CMNS Switched over a PDN 0000 eeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseecaaecaesnaeeaees 12 42 Example CMNS Switched over Leased Lines cece cece eeeeteteeeeeeaee 12 43 Create X29 Accessi Lists iiss bis ceces cele des e aaa nanain n EE oa aa TaT a Soa reata 12 45 Create an Access Listosroiiiona nn ees e a a ee ee 12 46 Example X 29 Access List sais siete tien ay da aaea p Ee eel tenes 12 46 Apply an Access List to a Line cece ceeceseceseceeeeeeceeeeeesaeeeaeecaaessaeseeeaee 12 47 CreateranyX 29 Profile Serpia a ase a Malis 12 47 Example X 29 Profile Script 0 0 ccceessssscsseceseceseceecneecsaecsaecesecsseeeseeesaeeaeens 12 47 Configure LAPBe tii arti E ne cea isha dated cal ean tania 12 48 Configure a LAPB Datagram Transport 0 ceeceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeecnaeceaeenees 12 48 Example Typical LAPB Configuration 0 ec ceeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeneeeeeenaeceaeenees 12 49 Modify LAPB Protocol Parameters 0 cescessceseceseceseceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeees 12 49 Configure LAPB Priority and Custom Queuing 00 0 0 cece cseeceseceneceneceeeees 12 52 Configure Transparent Bridging over Multiprotocol LAPB 12 53 Monitor and Maintain LAPB and X 25 oie eeessseesecnseceeceseceseceeeeseeeaeens 12 53 Example Transparent Bridging for Multiprotocol LAPB Encapsulation 12 54 Example X 2
132. PDN entry there If there is no VPDN entry on the TACACS server the login process will continue as normal NAS aaa new model vpdn enable TACACS Server vpdn outgoing domain com nas ip 172 21 9 18 August 1997 Page 11 31 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Enable PPP on You can configure a router to support asynchronous access over ISDN VTY Lines for by globally enabling PPP on VTY lines PPP is typically enabled on synchronous or asynchronous serial interfaces however the Cisco Asynchronous IOS software permits you to configure PPP on VTY lines This con Access over ISDN figures the VTY line to support asynchronous access over ISDN from an ISDN terminal to a VTY session on the router In global configuration mode enable asynchronous protocol features on all the router s VTY lines vty async This task enables PPP on VTY lines on a global basis on the router To configure PPP on a per VTY basis use th translate command Monitor and To monitor and maintain virtual interfaces you can perform any of Maintain MLP these tasks MMP and VPDN e Display MLP and MMP bundle information Virtual Interfaces show ppp multilink e Display information about the active L2F tunnels and the L2F message identifiers show vpdn e Display the status of the stack group members show sgbp e Display the current seed bid value show sgbp queries Page 11 32 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Config
133. Refer to Display System Image and Configuration Information for in formation about monitoring dual Flash bank To upgrade your software you must erase Flash memory when prompted during the download This ensures that the image is down loaded as the first file in Flash memory Page 7 26 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images Partition Flash Memory To partition Flash memory type the following in global configuration mode partition flash partitions sizel size2 This task succeeds only if the system has at least two banks of Flash and if the partitioning does not cause an existing file in Flash memory to be split across the two partitions Copy a File into a Flash Partition In EXEC mode download a file into a Flash partition copy tftp flash The prompts displayed after you execute these tasks indicate the method by which the file can be downloaded into each partition The possible methods are None No known way to copy into the parti tion RXBOOT Manual You must manually reload to the rxboot image in ROM to copy the image RXBOOT FLH The copy is automatic via the Flash load helper software in boot ROMs Direct The copy is created directly If the image can be downloaded into more than one partition you ar prompted for the partition number Enter any of these commands at th partition number prompt to obtain help Display the directory listings
134. Size August 1997 2524UM Page 9 27 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Specify Router Lev elSupport It is seldom necessary to configure the IS type because the IS IS pro tocol will automatically establish this However you can configure th AI2524 to act as a Le vell intra area router as both a Levell router and a Leve 12 interarea router or as an interarea router only In router configuration mode configure the IS IS level at which the router is to operate is type level 1 level 1 2 level 2 only Configure IS IS Authentication Passwords You can assign authentication passwords to areas and domains An area password is inserted in Level 1 station router link state PDUs LSPs complete sequence number PDUs CSNPs and partial se quence number PDUs PSNPs A routi ng domainauthentication password is inserted in Leve 12 area router LSP CSNP and PSNP In router configuration mode configure area or domain passwords 1 Configure the area authentication password area password password 2 Configure the routin g domainauthentication password domain password password Ignore IS IS Link State Packet LSP Errors You can configure the router to ignore IS IS LSPs that are received with internal checksum errors rather than purging the LSPs LSPs are used by the receiving routers to maintain their routing tables The IS IS protocol definition requires that a received LSP with an in correct da
135. Sourced Packets August 1997 2524UM Page 9 53 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Specify the MTU Size Allinterfaces have a default maximum packet size However to reduc fragmentation you can set the MTU size of the packets sent on the in terface The minimum value is 512 the default and maximum packet size depends on the interface type Changing the MTU value with the mtu interface configuration com mand can affect the CLNS MTU value If the CLNS MTU is at its maximum given the interface MTU the CLNS MTU will change with the interface MTU However the reverse is not true changing th CLNS MTU value has no effect on the value for the mt u interface con figuration command In interface configuration mode set the CLNS MTU packet size for a specified interface clns mtu size Warning The CTR card does not support the switching of frames larger than 4472 bytes Interoperability problems might occur if CTR cards are intermixed with other Token Ring cards on the same network These problems can be mini mized by lowering the CLNS MTU sizes to be the same on all routers on the network Disable Checksums When the ISO CLNS routing software originates a CLNS packet by default it generates checksums In interface configuration mode dis able checksum generation no clns checksum Warning Enabling checksum generation has no effect on routing packets ES IS ISO IGRP and IS IS originated by th router it applies
136. TARP adjacencies show tarp static adjacencies Display information about the entries in the TID cache show tarp tid cache Display statistics about TARP PDUs show tarp traffic Examples TARP Configuration This section provides both basic and complex examples of TARP con figuration Basic TARP Configuration Example This example enables TARP on the router and interface Ethernet 0 The router is assigned the TID myname August 1997 2524UM Page 9 65 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Complex TARP Configuration Example Figure 9 13 and this example show how to enable TARP on Router A and on interface Ethernet 0 and assign the TID myname A static rout is created from Router A 49 0001 1111 1111 00 to Router D 49 0004 1234 1234 1234 00 so that Router D can receive TARP PDUs because Router C in not TARP capable A blacklist adjacency is also created on Router A for Router B 49 0001 7777 7777 7777 00 so that Router A does not send any TARP PDUs to Router B Figure 9 13 Sample TARP Configuration Blacklisted Static Route Router D clns routing tarp run tarp cache timer 300 tarp route static 49 0004 1234 1234 1234 00 tarp blacklist adjacency 49 0001 7777 7777 7777 00 tarp tid myname interface ethernet 0 tarp enable I Page 9 66 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 10 Serial Interface Configuration Steps Chapter 10 Serial Interface Configuration Steps Introduction This chapter de
137. Type e Configure Compression of PPP Dat e Configure IP Address Pooling e Configure PPP Callback e Disable or Reenable Peer Neighbor Routes e Configure PPP Half Bridging e Configure Multilink PPP e Configure Virtual Private Dial up Networks e Enable PPP on VTY Lines for Asynchronous Access over ISDN e Monitor and Maintain MLP MMP and VPDN Virtual Interfaces Page 11 2 August 1997 2524UM Enable PPP Encapsulation Enable CHAP or PAP Authentication Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps You can enable PPP on serial lines to encapsulate IP and other network protocol datagrams in interface configuration mode encapsulation ppp PPP echo requests are used as keepalives to minimize disruptions to the end users of your network Theno keepalive command can be used to disable echo requests The Point to Point Protocol PPP with Challenge Handshake Authen tication Protocol CHAP authentication or Password Authentication Protocol PAP is often used to inform the central site about which re mote routers are connected to it With this authentication information if the router or access server re ceives another packet for a destination to which it is already con nected it does not place an additional call However if the router or access server is using rotaries it sends the packet out the correct port CHAP and PAP are specified in RFC 1334 These protocols are sup po
138. XEC mode type end or press lt Ctrl Z gt IPX router con figuration From global configuration mode type ipx rout ing keyword Router config ipx router To exit to global configuration mode type exit To exit to privileged EXEC mode type end or press lt Ctrl Z gt Route map con figuration From global configuration mode type route map tag Router config route map To exit to global configuration mode type exit To exit to privileged EXEC mode type end or press lt Ctrl Z gt Key chain con figuration From global configuration mode type keychain name Router config keychain To exit to global configuration mode type exit command To exit to privileged EXEC mode type end or press lt Ctrl Z gt August 1997 2524UM Page 4 5 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Command Mode Contd Access Method Prompt Exit Method Key chain key configuration From key chain configura tion mode type key num ber Router config keychain key To exit to key chain configura tion mode type exit To exit to global configuration mode type exit command To exit to priv ileged EXEC mode type end or press lt Ctrl Z gt Response time reporter config uration From global configuration mode type rtr probe Router config rtr To exit to global configuration mode type exit To exit to privileged EXEC mode type end or press
139. a DTE or NNI interface frame relay lmi n39ldte keep exchanges Set the DTE or NNI error threshold frame relay lmi n392dte threshold Set the DTE and NNI monitored events count frame relay lmi n393dte events August 1997 2524UM Page 13 7 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Configure Frame Relay Switched Virtual Circuits Currently access to Frame Relay networks is made through private leased lines at speeds ranging from 56 kbps to 45 Mbps Frame Relay is a connection oriented packet transfer mechanism that establishes virtual circuits between endpoints Switched virtual circuits SVCs allow access through a Frame Relay network by setting up a path to the destination endpoints only when th need arises and tearing down the path when it is no longer needed You must have these services before Frame Relay SVCs can operate e Frame Relay SVC support by the service provider The service provider s switch must be capable of supporting SVC operation e Physical loop connection A leased line or dedicated line must exist between the router DTE and the local Frame Relay switch You must enable SVC operation at the interface level Once it is en abled at the interface level it is enabled on any subinterface on that in terface One signaling channel DLCI 0 is set up for the interface and all SVCs are controlled from the physical interface To enable Frame Relay SVC service and set up SVCs complete these tasks The
140. aaa 00 interfac thernet 1 clns router iso igrp test procl interface serial 2 clns router iso igrp test procl interfac thernet 2 clns router iso igrp test proc2 Page 9 26 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps IS IS To run IS IS instead of ISO IGRP use this configuration The illustra tion in Figure 9 still applies Ethernet interface 2 is configured for IS IS routing and is assigned the tag of test proc2 router iso igrp test procl net 49 0002 0002 bbbb bbbb bbbb 00 router isis test proc2 net 49 0001 0002 aaaa aaaa aaaa 00 interfac thernet 1 clns router iso igrp test procl interface serial 2 clns router iso igrp test procl interfac thernet 2 clns router IS IS test proc2 clns routing interface serial 2 clns enable To allow CLNS packets only to blindly pass through an interface with out routing updates you could use a simple configuration This exam ple shows such a configuration This permits serial 2 to pass CLNS packets without having CLNS rout ing turned on Configure IS IS Parameters Cisco s IS IS implementation allows you to customize certain IS IS parameters You can perform the optional tasks e Specify Router Level S upport Configure IS IS Authentication Passwords e Ignore IS IS Link State Packet LSP Errors e Log Adjacency State Changes e Change IS IS LSP MTU
141. able PPP authentication ppp authentication pap Enable Multilink PPP on the dialer rotary group ppp multilink If you do not use PPP authentication procedures your telephone ser vice must pass caller ID information The load threshold number is re quired When Multilink PPP is configured and you want a multilink bundle to be connected indefinitely use the dialer idle timeout com mand to set a very high idle timer The dialer load threshold 1 command does not keep a mul tilink bundle of n links connected indefinitely and the dialer load threshold 2command does not keep a multilink bundle of two links connected indefinitely August 1997 2524UM Page 11 21 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Example Multilink PPP on One ISDN Interface This example enables Multilink PPP on the BRI 0 interface Because an ISDN interface is a rotary group by default when one BRI is con figured no dialer rotary group configuration is required interface bri 0 description connected to ntt 81012345678902 ip address 7 1 1 7 255 255 255 0 encapsulation ppp dialer idle timeout 30 dialer load threshold 40 either dialer map ip 7 1 1 8 name atlanta 81012345678901 dialer group 1 ppp authentication pap ppp multilink Configure Multilink PPP on Multiple ISDN BRI Interfaces To enable Multilink PPP on multiple ISDN BRI interfaces set up a di aler rotary interface and configure it for Multilink PPP and then con figure the BRIs se
142. able for each command mode Almost every configuration command also has ano form In general use the no form to disable a feature or function Use the command without the keyword no to reenable a disabled feature or to enable a August 1997 2524UM Page 4 1 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit feature that is disabled by default For example IP routing is enabled by default To disable IP routing specify theno ip routing com mand and specify ip routing to reenable it The user interface also provides context sensitive help for command syntax This chapter describes how to use the help system It also de scribes the command editing and command history features that enable you to recall and easily edit command entries End a Session After using the setup command or other configuration commands exit the user interface and quit the session To end a session type quit User Interface You can perform these tasks to familiarize yourself with the AI2524 Task List user interface e Access Each Command Mode e Get Context Sensitive Help e Check Command Syntax e Use the Command History Features e Use the Editing Features e Enda Session e Use the Web Browser Interface to Issue Commands Page 4 2 August 1997 2524UM Command Modes Chapter 4 Understanding the User Interface This section describes how to access each of the AI2524 command modes including User EXEC Mode Commands Privileged EXEC Mode Commands
143. able range 4 5 AppleTalk zone name myzone ZZ Serial AppleTalk additional zone name Configure IPX on this interface no yes IPX network number 3 B003 4 The configuration you enter is now displayed and you are asked if you want to use the displayed configuration If you enter no you will lose the configuration information you just entered and you can begin the configuration again If you enter yes the configura tion will be entered and saved in the startup configuration Use this configuration yes no yes Building configuration Use th nabled mode configure command to modify this configuration Press RETURN to get started Configuring If you have an ISDN BRI WAN module configure the BRI port for ISDN ISDN This section explains typical ISDN configurations for one or two B channels In the examples the BRI port is configured for IP routing and Point to Point Protocol PPP encapsulation Complete these steps to configure the router for a basic ISDN PPP connection on a single B channel or two B channels substituting th correct address and host names as appropriate for your network 1 Enter enable mode Router gt enable Password enable password Page 16 12 August 1997 2524UM Cit Chapter 16 Basic Configuration 2 Enter the configure terminal command Router config term 3 If you have not already done so enter the isdn switch type command to configure the ISDN switch type router
144. access list lt 1100 1199 gt Extended 48 bit MAC address access list lt 200 299 gt Protocol type code access list lt 300 399 gt DECnet access list lt 400 499 gt XNS standard access list lt 500 599 gt XNS extended access list lt 600 699 gt Appletalk access list lt 700 799 gt 48 bit MAC address access list lt 800 899 gt IPX standard access list lt 900 999 gt IPX extended access list e Enter the access list number 99 Then enter another question mark to see the arguments and brief explanations for the key word Page 4 20 August 1997 2524UM Pil Chapter 4 Understanding the User Interface Router config access list 99 deny Specify packets to reject permit Specify packets to forward e Enter the deny keyword followed by a question mark 7 to list additional options Router config access list 99 deny A B C D Address to match e Enter the IP address followed by a question mark to list addi tional options Router config access list 99 deny 131 108 134 0 A B C D Mask of bits to ignore lt cr gt e Enter the wildcard mask followed by a question mark to list further options Router config access list 99 deny 131 108 134 0 0 0 0 255 lt cr gt Router config access list 99 deny 131 108 134 0 0 0 0 255 Check Command Syntax The user interface provides error isolation by using a caret symbol as an indicator The symbol appears at the point in the command string wher
145. ace 172 16 74 2 Number of bits in subnet field 8 Class B network is 172 16 0 0 8 subnet bits mask is 255 255 255 0 Configure AppleTalk on this interface no yes AppleTalk starting cable range 3 5 AppleTalk ending cable range 4 5 AppleTalk zone name myzone ZZ Serial AppleTalk additional zone name Configure IPX on this interface no yes IPX network number 3 B003 4 The configuration you entered now displays and you are asked if you want to use the displayed configuration If you enter no you will lose the configuration information you just entered and you can begin the configuration again If you type yes the configura tion will be entered and saved in the startup configuration Use this configuration yes no yes Building configuration Use th nabled mode configure command to modify this configuration Press RETURN to get started Page 10 2 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps Introduction Configuration Overview This chapter describes how to enable PPP encapsulation and perform a variety of PPP configuration tasks The Point to Point Protocol PPP described in RFCs 1661 and 1332 encapsulates network layer protocol information over point to point links You can configure PPP on these physical interfaces e Asynchronous serial e HSSI e ISDN e Synchronous serial The software provid
146. actions Running X 25 over TCP IP provides a number of benefits The data gram containing the X 25 packet can be switched by other routers using their high speed switching abilities X 25 connections can be sent over networks running only the TCP IP protocols The TCP IP protocol suite runs over many different networking technologies in cluding Ethernet Token Ring T1 serial and FDDI Thus X 25 data can be forwarded over these media to another router where it can b output to an X 25 interface When the connection is made locally the switching configuration is used when the connection is across a LAN the XOT configuration is used The basic function is the same for both types of connections but different configuration commands are required for each type of con nection August 1997 2524UM Page 12 29 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit The X 25 switching subsystem supports these facilities and parame ters e D bit negotiation Data packets with the D bit set are passed through transparently Variable length interrupt data e Flow control parameter negotiation e Window size up to 7 or 127 for modulo 128 operation e Packet size up to 4096 if the LAPB layers used are capable of han dling the requested siz e Basic closed user group selection Throughput class negotiation e Reverse charging and fast select To configure X 25 routing perform these tasks e Enable X 25 Routing e Configure a Local X 25 Route
147. ain text authentication in RIP packets because the unencrypted authentication key is sent in every RIP Versio n2 packet Use plain text authentication when security is not an issue for example to ensure that misconfigured hosts do not participate in routing To configure RIP authentication perform these tasks in interface con figuration mode 1 Enable RIP authentication ip rip authentication key chain name of chain 2 Configure the interface to use MDS digest authentication or let it default to plain text authentication ip rip authentication mode text md5 Disable Route Summarization RIP Version 2 supports automatic route summarization by default The software summarizes subprefixes to the classful network bound ary when crossing classful network boundaries If you have disconnected subnets disable automatic route summariza tion to advertise the subnets When route summarization is disabled the software transmits subnet and host routing information across classful network boundaries To disable automatic summarization type this command in router configuration mode no auto summary Page 8 18 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 8 AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps Run IGRP and RIP Concurrently It is possible to run IGRP and RIP concurrently The IGRP informa tion will override the RIP information by default because of IGRP s administrative distance Running IGRP and RIP concurrently does not work well
148. all protocols enabled on the physical interface Packets are not sent out for protocols that are not enabled on the interface Because Inverse ARP is enabled by default no additional command is required to configure dynamic mapping on an interface Configure Static Mapping A static map links a specified next hop protocol address to a specified DLCI Static mapping removes the need for Inverse ARP requests when you supply a static map Inverse ARP is automatically disabled for the specified protocol on the specified DLCI August 1997 2524UM Page 13 3 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit To establish static mapping according to your network needs perform one of these tasks in interface configuration mode e Define the mapping between a next hop protocol address and the DLCI used to connect to the address frame relay map protocol protocol address dlci broadcast ietf cisco e Define a DLCI used to send International Organization for Stan dardization ISO Connectionless Network Service CLNS frames frame relay map clns dlci broadcast e Define a DLCI used to connect to a bridge frame relay map bridge dlci broadcast ietf Use these keywords to specify the protocols ip IP e ipx Novell IPX e clns ISO CLNS Examples Static Address Mapping These sections provide examples of static address mapping for the IP and IPX protocols Two Routers in Static Mode Example This example illustrat
149. ame Relay networks provide multiple point to point links called permanent virtual circuits PVCs PVCs can be grouped under separate subinterfaces that in turn are configured on a single physical interface From a bridging spanning tree viewpoint each subinterface is a separate bridge port and a frame arriving on one subinterface can be sent out on another subinterface Subinterfaces also allow multiple encapsulations for a protocol ona single interface For example a router or access server can receive an ARPA framed internet packet exchange IPX packet and forward the packet back out the same physical interface as a Subnetwork Access Protocol SNAP framed IPX packet The subinterfaces can be config ured to support multiple Frame Relay PVCs In this example a subinterface is configured for serial line 2 which is configured for Frame Relay encapsulation The subinterface is called 2 1 to indicate that it is subinterface 1 of serial interface 2 Page 4 14 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 4 Understanding the User Interface Router config interface serial 2 Router config if encapsulation frame relay Router config if interface serial 2 1 Router config subif Interface configuration commands apollo Apollo interface subcommands appletalk Appletalk interface subcommands bandwidth Set bandwidth informational parameter bridge group Transparent bridging interface parameters clns CLNS interface subcommand
150. ample Typical X 25 Configuration This example shows the complete configuration for a serial interface connected to acommercial X 25 PDN for routing the IP protocol The IP subnetwork address 172 25 9 0 has been assigned for the X 25 net work Note When you are routing IP over X 25 you must treat the X 25 network as a single IP network or subnetwork Map entries for routers with addresses on subnetworks other than the one on which the interface s IP address is stored are ignored by the routing software All routers using the subnet number must have map entries for all others routers Using the broadcast option with dynamic routing can result in larger traffic loads requiring a larger hold queue larger window sizes or multiple virtual circuits August 1997 2524UM Page 12 7 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit interface serial 2 ip address 172 25 9 1 255 255 255 0 encapsulation X25 I bandwidth 10 x25 win 7 x25 wout 7 x25 ips 512 x25 ops 512 x25 address 31370054065 x25 hte 32 x25 idle 5 x25 nvc 2 The bandwidth command is not part of the X 25 configuration it is es pecially important to understand that it does not have any connection with the X 25 entity of the same name bandwidth commands are used by IP routing processes currently only IGRP to determine which lines are the best choices for traffic Since the default is 1544 Kbaud and X 25 service at that rate is not generally available most X 25 in
151. anual booting the boot bits in the configuration regis ter are zero ERR Config register boot bits set for manual booting In case of catastrophic failure in the Flash memory upgrade this erro message helps to minimize the chance of the system going down to ROM monitor mode and being taken out of the remote Telnet user s control August 1997 2524UM Page 7 31 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit The system tries to bring up at least the boot ROM image if it cannot boot an image from Flash memory Before reinitiating the copy tftp flash command you must set the configuration register boot field to a nonzero value using th config register global con figuration command The copy tftp flash command initiates a series of prompts to which you must provide responses This example illustrates this dia log Router copy tftp flash kkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkkkkkxkkkkkkkkxk NOTICE kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxxkxx xx Flash load helper v1 0 This process will accept the TFTP copy options and then terminate the current system image to use the ROM based image for the copy Router functionality will not be available during that time If you are logged in via telnet this connection will terminate Users with console access can see the results of the copy operation KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKK KKK If terminals other than the one on which this command is executed are acti
152. ard User s Manual Pit Configuration for Router Y service tcp keepalives in service tcp keepalives out interfac thernet 0 ip address 172 20 1 2 255 255 255 0 I interface serial 0 x25 ltc 5 x25 pve 1 tunnel 172 20 1 1 interface serial 0 pve 2 x25 pve 2 tunnel 172 20 1 1 interface serial 1 pve 2 Configure Additional X 25 Routing Features To configure other less common X 25 routing features perform these tasks e Configure XOT to Use Interface Default Flow Control Values e Substitute Addresses in a Local X 25 Rout e Configure XOT Alternate Destinations Configure XOT to Use Interface Default Flow Control Values When setting up a connection the source and destination XOT imple mentations need to cooperate to determine the flow control values that apply to the SVC The source XOT ensures cooperation by encoding the X 25 flow control facilities the window sizes and maximum packet sizes in the X 25 Call packet The far host s XOT implementa tion can then correctly negotiate the flow control values at the destina tion interface and if needed indicate the final values in the X 25 Call Confirm packet The versions of XOT prior to Release 9 1 4 1 software will not how ever ensure that these flow control values are encoded in the X 25 Call packet When XOT receives a call that leaves one or both flow control values unspecified it supplies the values The values supplied are a window size of 2
153. ardwar Maximum Transmission Unit MTU size plus any protocol over head The LAPB N1 range is dynamically calculated by the Cisco IOS software whenever an MTU change an L2 L3 modulo change o a compression change occurs on a LAPB interface Caution The LAPB N1 parameter provides little benefit beyond the interface MTU and can easily cause link failures if misconfigured This parameter should be left at its default value e LAPB N2 The transmit counter N2 is the number of unsuccess ful transmit attempts made before the link is declared down LABP T1 The retransmission timer T1 determines how long transmitted frame can remain unacknowledged before the Cisco IOS software polls for an acknowledgment For X 25 networks the retransmission timer setting should match that of the network For leased line circuits the T1 timer setting is critical because the design of LAPB assumes that a frame has been lost if it is not ac knowledged within period T1 The timer setting must be larg enough to permit a maximum sized frame to complete one round trip on the link If the timer setting is too small the software will poll before the acknowledgment frame can return which may re sult in duplicated frames and severe protocol problems If the tim er setting is too large the software waits longer than necessary before requesting an acknowledgment which reduces bandwidth August 1997 2524UM Page 12 51 AI2524 Router Card User s
154. ass s es 13 16 Example Frame Relay Traffic Shaping cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeneecnaecnaeenees 13 16 Customize Frame Relay for Your Network 00 e cee cecceseceseceteceseceeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeaaeeaeens 13 18 Configure Frame Relay Subinterfaces 0 ce eeceeeesseeeseeeneecneeenaecnsecnseeaeens 13 18 Examples Basic Subinterface ee eee cscessecsecseceseceseceeceseesseeseeeseaeeneenaes 13 21 Example Frame Relay Multipoint Subinterface with Dynamic Addressing 13 22 Example IPX Routes over Frame Relay Subinterfaces ee eeeeeeeeneees 13 24 Example Unnumbered IP over a Point to Point Subinterface 0 0 00 13 25 Example Transparent Bridging Using Subinterfaces 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 13 27 Configure Frame Relay Switching ccc cesceseceseceseceeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeaeeeaeesees 13 28 Example PVC Switching Configuration es eeseessecssecsseceneceseceeeeeseeeaeens 13 30 Example Pure Frame Relay DCE 0 ccc eeceesceseceseceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeaeeeees 13 31 Example Hybrid DTE DCE PVC Switching eee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneees 13 34 Example Switching over an IP Tunnel 00 eee eececesecseceneceeceeceeeeeseeeaeens 13 36 Disable or Reenable Frame Relay Inverse ARP cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneees 13 38 Create a Broadcast Queue for an Interface c ccc ceceeseeceeeerseeeeeeeeceenees 13 38 Configure Payload Compression cescesceseceseeeseeseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeaeesaecneseaee 13 39 Config
155. at broadcasts must be carried Thetrig ger keyword which can be configured only if broadcast is also configured enables a broadcast packet to trigger an SVC If an SVC already exists that uses this map class the SVC will carry the broad cast Configure LAPF Parameters Frame Relay Link Access Procedure for Frame Relay LAPF com mands are used to tune Layer 2 system parameters to work well with the Frame Relay switch Normally you do not need to change the de fault settings However if the Frame Relay network indicates that it does not support the Frame Reject frame FRMR at the LAPF Fram In interface configuration mode reject procedure no frame relay lapf frmr Page 13 12 August 1997 2524UM Configure Frame Relay Traffic Shaping Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps By default the Frame Reject frame is sent at the LAPF Frame Reject procedure Note Manipulation of Layer 2 parameters is not recommended if you do not know well the resulting functional change For more information refer to the ITU T Q 922 specification for LAPF If you must change Layer 2 parameters for your network environment and if you know the resulting functional change complete these tasks as needed Setthe LAPF window size k frame relay lapf k number e Setthe LAPF maximum retransmission count N200 frame relay lapf n200 retries e Set the maximum length of the Information field of the LAPF I frame N201 frame
156. ate of 4800 bps Because BECN feedback is enabled by default the output rate will be cut back as low as 4800bps in response to received BECNs This map class is configured to use custom queuing using queue list 1 In this example queue list 1 has 3 queues with the first two being con trolled by access lists 100 and 115 Map class fast_vcs uses a peak rate of 64000 and average rate of 16000 bps Because BECN feedback is enabled by default the output rate will be cut back as low as 4800bps in response to received BECNs This map class is configured to use priority queuing using priority group 2 Page 13 16 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps interface Serial0 no ip address encapsulation frame relay frame relay lmi type ansi frame relay traffic shaping frame relay class slow_vcs interface Serial0 1 point to point ip address 10 128 30 1 255 255 255 248 ip ospf cost 200 bandwidth 10 frame relay interface dici 101 interface Serial0 2 point to point ip address 10 128 30 9 255 255 255 248 ip ospf cost 400 bandwidth 10 frame relay interface dici 102 class fast_vcs I interface Serial0 3 point to point ip address 10 128 30 17 255 255 255 248 ip ospf cost 200 bandwidth 10 frame relay interface dlci 103 map class frame relay slow_vcs frame relay traffic rate 4800 9600 frame relay custom queue list 1 map class frame relay fast_vcs frame relay traffic rate 16000 6
157. ation calls ar directed This is also the source X 121 address used for originating an encapsulation call and is used by the destination host to map the sourc host and protocol to the protocol address An encapsulation virtual cir cuit must be a mapped at both the source and destination host inter faces For each X 25 interface you must explicitly map each destination host s protocols and addresses to its X 121 address If needed and if the destination host has the capability one host map can be configured to Page 12 18 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps support several protocols alternatively you can define one map for each supported protocol In interface configuration mode establish a map x25 map protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address option For example if you are encapsulating IP over a given X 25 interface you must define an IP address for the interface and for each of the de sired destination hosts map the host s IP address to its X 121 address Note You can map an X 121 address to as many as nine protocol addresses but each protocol can be mapped only once in the command line An individual host map can use these keywords to specify these pro tocols apollo Apollo Domain bridge Bridging clns OSI Connectionless Network Servic compressedtcp TCP IP header compression e ip IP ipx Novell IPX pad Packet
158. ation or if you are configuring AutoInstall over Frame Relay these tasks are not required To configure a BOOTP or RARP server complete one of these tasks 1 If BOOTPis to be used to resolve the new router s IP address con figure your BOOTP server Refer to your host vendor s manual pages and to RFCs 951 and 1395 Page 5 16 August 1997 2524UM interface ethernet 0 Chapter 5 Using AutoInstall 2 IfRARP is to be used to resolve the new router s IP address con figure your RARP server Refer to your host vendor s manual pages and to RFC 903 This example host configuration file contains the minimum set of commands needed for AutoInstall using RARP It includes the IP ad dress that will be obtained dynamically via BOOTP or RARP during the AutoInstall process When RARP is used this extra information is needed to specify the proper netmask for the interface ip address 131 108 10 2 255 255 255 0 enable password letmein I line vty 0 password letmein end Connect the New Router to the Network Connect the new router to the network using either an HDLC encap sulated or Frame Relay encapsulated serial interface or an Ethernet Token Ring or FDDI interface After the router successfully resolves its host name newrouter sends a TFTP broadcast requesting the file name confg or name cfg The router name must be in all lowercase even if the true host name is not The file is downloaded to the new router where the co
159. ation point indicates that the copy process is taking place Each exclamation point indicates that ten packets have been transferred successfully The series of V characters indicates that a checksum is being calcu lated An O indicates an out of order packet A period indicates a timeout The last line in the sample configu ration indicates that the copy is successful Copy Configuration Files from a Network Server to the Router You can copy configuration files from a TFTP server to the router You might use this process to restore a configuration file to the router if you have backed up the file to a server If you replace a router and want to use the configuration file that you created for the original you can restore that file instead of recreating it You can also use this pro August 1997 Page 7 7 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual rit cess to copy a different configuration to the router that is stored on a network server You can copy a configuration file from a TFTP server to the running configuration or to the startup configuration When you copy a config uration file to the running configuration you copy to and run the file from RAM When you copy a configuration file to the startup configuration you copy it to the nonvolatile random access memory NVRAM To copy a configuration file from a TFTP server to the router com plete these tasks from EXEC mode 1 Copy a file from a TFTP serv
160. ations in bit positions four and seven for a sequence of eight zero bits When the CSU DSU is configured for AMI you must guarantee the T1s density requirement in your router configuration using the service mod ule t1 data coding inverted command or the service module t1 timeslots speed 56 command In most cases your T1 service provider determines which line cod type either ami or b8zs is required for your T1 circuit Enable Remote Alarms To generate remote alarms yellow alarms at the local CSU DSU or detect remote alarms sent from the remote CSU DSU type this in in terface configuration mode service module t1 remote alarm enable Remote alarms are transmitted by the CSU DSU when it detects an alarm condition such as a red alarm loss of signal or blue alarm un framed 1 s The receiving CSU DSU then knows there is an error con dition on the line With D4 super frame configured a remote alarm condition is transmit ted by setting the bit2 of each time slot to zero For received user data that has the bit 2 of each time slot set to zero the CSU DSU will inter pret the data as a remote alarm and interrupt data transmission which explains why remote alarms are disabled by default With Extended August 1997 2524UM Page 14 3 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Super Frame configured the remote alarm condition is signalled out of band in the facility data link You can see if the FT1 T1 CSU DSU is rece
161. ations of all routers To configure OSPF complete these tasks You must enable OSPF the other tasks are optional but might be required for your application e Enable OSPF e Configure OSPF Interface Parameters e Configure OSPF over Different Physical Networks e Configure OSPF Area Parameters e Configure OSPF Not So Stubby Area NSSA e Configure Route Summarization between OSPF Areas e Configure Route Summarization When Redistributing Routes into OSPF e Create Virtual Links e Generate a Default Route e Configure Lookup of DNS Names e Force the Router ID Choice with a Loopback Interfac e Disable Default OSPF Metric Calculation Based on Bandwidth e Configure OSPF on Simplex Ethernet Interfaces August 1997 Page 8 1 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Configure Route Calculation Timers e Configure OSPF over On Demand Circuits Enable OSPF To enable OSPF you must create an OSPF routing process specify the range of IP addresses to be associated with the routing process and as sign area IDs to be associated with that range of IP addresses 1 Enable OSPF routing This places you in the router configuration mode router ospf process id 2 Define an interface on which OSPF runs and define the area ID for that interface network address wildcard mask area area id Configure OSPF Interface Parameters OSPF implementation allows you to alter
162. attachments require that no calling source address be presented in outgoing calls The requirement is called suppressing the calling ad dress When attached to a PDN X 25 may need to ensure that outgoing calls only use the assigned X 121 address for the calling source address Routed X 25 normally uses the original source address Although in dividual X 25 route configurations can modify the source address Cisco provides a simple command to force the use of the interface ad dress in all calls sent this requirement is called replacing the calling address To suppress or replace the calling address perform the appropriat task in interface configuration mode e Suppress the calling source X 121 address in outgoing calls x25 suppress calling address e Replace the calling source X 121 address in switched calls x25 use source address Suppress the Called Address Some attachments require that no called destination address be pre sented in outgoing calls this requirement is called suppressing the called address In interface configuration mode suppress the called address x25 suppress called address Establish a Default Virtual Circuit Protocol The Call Request packet that sets up a virtual circuit can encode a field called the Call User Data CUD field Typically the first few bytes of the CUD field identify which high level protocol is carried by the vir tual circuit The router when acting as a destinatio
163. be a valid Cisco IOS image in Flash memory and a configuration file in NVRAM The first time you boot your router you will need to configure the router interfaces and then save the configuration to a file in NVRAM Proceed to the next section Configuring the Router for configuration instructions Configuring the You can configure the router using one of these procedures Router Configuration mode recommended if you are familiar with Cisco IOS commands e AutoInstall Recommended for automatic installation if anothe router running Cisco IOS software is installed on the network This configuration method must be set up by someone with expe rience using Cisco IOS software e System Configuration Dialog Recommended if you are not famil iar with Cisco IOS commands e Use the procedure that best fits the needs of your network config uration and level of Cisco IOS experience Page 16 2 August 1997 2524UM Cit Chapter 16 Basic Configuration Warning Acquire the correct network addresses from your system administrator or consult your network plan to determin correct addresses before you begin to configure the router Using Configuration Mode You can configure the router manually if you prefer not to use Auto Install or the System Configuration Dialog Take these steps to config ure the router manually 1 Connect a console terminal following the instructions in the sec tion Connecting the Console Terminal and Modem in the chapt
164. broadcasts asso ciated with the TFTP BOOTP and DNS requests ip helper address address2 To exit configuration mode press lt Ctrl Z gt Page 5 12 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 5 Using AutoInstall 5 Save the configuration file to your startup configuration This step saves the configuration to NVRAM copy running config startup config Typically the local area network LAN interface and IP address ar already configured on the existing router You might need to configur an IP helper address if the TFTP server is not on the same network as the new router In this example the existing router s configuration file contains the commands needed to configure the router for AutoInstall on an Ether net interface Router configure terminal interface ip address 172 31 10 1 255 255 255 0 ip helper address 172 31 20 5 Ctrl Z Router config copy running config startup config Use a Frame Relay Encapsulated Serial Interface Connection To set up AutolInstall via a serial line with Frame Relay encapsulation you must configure the existing router Perform these tasks beginning in global configuration mode 1 Configure the serial interface that connects to the new router and enter interface configuration mode interface serial 0 2 Configure Frame Relay encapsulation on the interface that con nects to the new router encapsulation frame relay 3 Create a Frame Relay map pointing back to the new router
165. c routes using the IP Enhanced IGRP protocol This capability applies to all the IP based routing protocols You may also conditionally control the redistribution of routes be tween routing domains by defining a method known as route maps be tween the two domains e To redistribute routes from one protocol into another type this command in router configuration mode redistribute protocol autonomous system number route map map tag August 1997 2524UM Page 8 19 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Cit e To define route maps type this command in global configuration mode route map map tag permit deny sequence number By default the redistribution of default information between IP Enhanced IGRP processes is enabled To disable the redistribu tion type this command in router configuration mode no default information in out Page 8 20 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps Introduction This chapter describes how to configure ISO CLNS The ISO CLNS protocol is a standard for the network layer of the OSI model ISO CLNS To configure ISO CLNS you must configure the routing processes Configuration associate addresses with the routing processes and customize the rout Task List ing processes for your particular network You must perform some combination of the tasks listed here to co
166. certain interface specific OSPF parameters You may need to change these parameters for con sistency If you do configure any of these parameters be sure the con figurations for all routers on your network have compatible values In interface configuration mode specify any of these interface param eters as needed for your network 1 Explicitly specify the cost of sending a packet on an OSPF inter face ip ospf cost cost 2 Specify the number of seconds between link state advertisement retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to an OSPF interface ip ospf retransmit interval seconds 3 Setthe estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link stat update packet on an OSPF interface ip ospf transmit delay seconds 4 Set priority to help determine the OSPF designated router for network ip ospf priority number 5 Specify the length of time in seconds between the hello packets that the Cisco IOS software sends on an OSPF interface ip ospf hello interval seconds Page 8 2 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 8 AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps 6 Set the number of seconds that a device s hello packets must not have been seen before its neighbors declare the OSPF route down ip ospf dead interval seconds 7 Assign a specific password to be used by neighboring OSPF rout ers on a network segment that is using OSPF s simple password authentication ip ospf authentication key key 8 Enable OSPF MD5 auth
167. conmuters PC O SLIP PPP CSLIP XPemote Emm X25 WAN Geo UNIX host TCP VMS host LAT Central Office Figure 2 1 illustrates the functions available on access servers e Remote node service is demonstrated by the telecommuter s re mote PC connection running SLIP PPP CSLIP or XRemote e Terminal service is shown between the terminals and hosts run ning the same protocol LAT to LAT or TCP to TCP e Protocol translation is shown between the terminals and hosts run ning unlike protocols LAT to TCP or TCP to LAT e Asynchronous IP routing is shown by the PC running SLIP or PPP and between the two access servers Page 2 4 August 1997 AI2524UM Software Specifications Chapter 2 AI2524 Overview Management and Security The Cisco IOS software provides an array of network management and security capabilities Integrated management simplifies adminis trative procedures and shortens the time required to diagnose and fix problems Automated operations reduce hands on tasks and make it possible to manage large geographically dispersed internetworks with a small staff of experts located at a central site The Cisco IOS software provides several management features includ ing configuration services which lower the cost of installing upgrad ing reconfiguring routers and reconfiguring access servers as well as comprehensive monitoring and diagnostic services In addition the Cisco IOS software provides in
168. copy flash tftp 3 When prompted enter the IP address or domain name of the TFTP server ip address name 4 When prompted enter the filename of the system image in Flash memory filename This example uses the show flash all command to learn the name of the system image file and the copy flash tftp command to copy the system image to a TFTP server The name of the system image file xk09140z is listed near the end of the show flash all output 2048K bytes of flash memory on embedded flash in XX ROM YA OB WNEF OO security jumper 12V socket 42 44 46 48 41 43 45 47 code bytes name 89BD 0x40000 INTEL 28F020 89BD 0x40000 INTEL 28F020 89BD 0x40000 INTEL 28F020 89BD 0x40000 INTEL 28F020 89BD 0x40000 INTEL 28F020 89BD 0x40000 INTEL 28F020 89BD 0x40000 INTEL 28F020 89BD 0x40000 INTEL 28F020 is installed flash memory is programmable file 0 offset 0x40 length name 1204637 xk09140z 903848 2097152 bytes free Router copy flash tftp IP address of remote host 255 255 255 255 101 2 13 110 filename to write on tftp host xk09140z writing xk09140z successful tftp write Router The exclamation point indicates that the copy process is taking place Each exclamation point indicates that ten packets have been transferred successfully To stop the copy process press lt Ctrl 4 gt
169. cribes how to access and list the commands available in each command mode and explains the primary uses for each command mode AI2524 commands can be entered at a terminal connected to the router using the command line interface CLI Commands may also be en tered using the Web Browser interface All routers using the Cisco IOS software have a home page From this home page you can access the Web Browser interface which allows you to execute AI2524 com mands You can execute these commands by clicking on them or en tering them in a command field This feature is described in Web_ Browser Interface For security purposes the Cisco IOS software provides two levels of access to commands user and privileged The unprivileged user mod is called user EXEC mode The privileged mode is called privileged EXEC mode and requires a password The commands available in user EXEC mode are a subset of the commands available in privileged EXEC mode If your router or access server does not find a valid system image or if its configuration file is corrupted at startup the system might enter read only memory ROM monitor mode ROM monitor mode can also be accessed through privileged EXEC mode From privileged EXEC mode you can access the global configuration mode and a number of specific configuration modes These modes are listed in Command Modes Entering a question mark at the system prompt allows you to obtain a list of commands avail
170. ct to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted In this example the boot flash command is used with the filename gs7 k the name of the file that is loaded gt boot flash gs7 k F3 1858656 45204 166896 at 0x1000 Booting gs7 k from flash memory RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR OK 1903912 13765276 bytes F3 1858676 45204 166896 at 0x1000 Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted System Bootstrap Version 4 6 1012 mlw 99 INTERIM SOFTWARE Copyright c 1986 1992 by cisco Systems RP1 processor with 16384 Kbytes of memory Manually Boot from a Network File To manually boot from a network file complete these tasks in EXEC mode 1 Restart the router reload 2 Press lt Break gt during the first 60 seconds of system startup Page 7 36 August 1997 2524UM gt boot networkl gt boot Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images 3 Manually boot the router from a network file boot filename ip address In this example a router is manually booted from the network fil network1 Manually Boot from ROM To manually boot the router from ROM c
171. d if so where it obtains this sys tem image The next sections describe the process for using the con figuration register boot field your process for setting this field and the tasks you must perform to modify the configuration register boot field How the Router Uses the Boot Field The lowest four bits of the 16 bit configuration register bits 3 2 1 and 0 form the boot field These boot field values determine whether the router loads an operating system and where it obtains the system image e When the entire boot field equals 0 0 0 0 the router does not load a system image Instead it enters ROM monitor or maintenance mode from which you can enter ROM monitor commands to man ually load a system image e When the entire boot field equals 0 0 0 1 the router loads the sys tem image found in boot ROMs August 1997 Page 7 15 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit e When the entire boot field equals a value between 0 0 1 0 and 1 1 1 1 the router loads the system image specified by boot sys tem commands in the startup configuration file When the startup configuration file does not contain boot system commands th router loads a default system image stored on a network server When loading a default system image from a network server the router uses the configuration register settings to determine the default system image filename for booting from a network server The router forms the default boot filename
172. d Configure a TARP TID e Disable TARP Caching e Disable TARP PDU Origination and Propagation e Configure Multiple NSAP Addresses e Configure Static TARP Adjacency and Blacklist Adjacency e Determine TIDs and NSAPs e Configure TARP Timers e Configure Miscellaneous TARP PDU Information e Monitor and Maintain the TARP Protocol Enable TARP and Configure a TARP TID TARP must be explicitly enabled before the TARP functionality be comes available and the router must have a TID assigned Also before TARP packets can be sent out on an interface each interface must have TARP enabled and the interface must be able to propagate TARP PDUs The router will use the CLNS capability to send and receive TARP PDUs If the router is configured as an IS the router must be running IS IS If the router is configured as an ES the router must be running ES IS 1 In global configuration mode turn on the TARP functionality e Turn on the TARP functionality tarp run e Assign a TID to the router tarp tid tid 2 Ininterface configuration mode enable TARP on one or more in terfaces tarp enable Page 9 60 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps Disable TARP Caching By default TID to NSAP address mappings are stored in the TID cache Disabling this capability clears the TID cache Re enabling this capability restores any previously cleared local entry and all static en tri
173. d includes datagram trans port routing and X 29 access lists and profile scripts Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps This chapter describes how to enable frame relay encapsulation and perform a variety of Frame Relay configuration tasks Chapter 14 T1 Interface Configuration Steps This chapter describes how to configure th AI2524 for fractional T1 Chapter 15 56 64 kbps Switched and Digital Data Ser vices DDS Interface Configuration Steps This chapter describes how to configure switched and DDS interfaces Chapter 16 Basic Configuration This chapter describes the AI2524 s panel cable connections and firmware Chapter 17 Command References This chapter contains a link to the AI2524 Cisco IOS v 11 2 documentation CD Page 1 2 August 1997 2524UM Related Documentation Chapter 18 Chapter 19 Appendix A Appendix B Chapter 1 Introduction System Error Messages This chapter contains a link to the AI2524 Cisco IOS v 11 2 documentation CD Debug Command Reference This chapter contains a link to the AI2524 Cisco IOS v 11 2 documentation CD AISwitch Release Note Includes the release notes for this version Acronyms This appendix defines acronyms used in this manual Documentation for AISwitch products includes AI120 Contact Alarm Monitor User s AI120UM Manual AlSwitch 130 Hardware Manual HM 130 0194 AI192 X User s Manual 1
174. d problem resolutions for the AI2524 Router card e ISDN BRI Inferface Instructions for use of this product are detailed in the AI2524 Router Manual document number 2524UM Page 1 AI2524 Router Card Version 1 00 Release Notes August 1997 ISDN BRI The AI2524 ISDN BRI module provides the digitalization of tele Inferface phone network so that voice data text graphics music video and other source material can be provided to end users from a single end user terminal over existing telephone wiring ACT Activity LED Flashing LED indicates normal opera tion Transmitting and receiving dat normally NT1 Network Termination 1 LED If the NT1 LED is on the router detects the ISDN link integrity signal at the U interface and the internal S T interface indicating that an ISDN connection has pk ans been established If the NT1 LED blinks once per second the ISDN connection at the U interface is up and the internal S T interface is coming up If this condition persists th ISDN port is either not configured o configured incorrectly If the NT1 LED blinks 8 times per sec ond the ISDN connection at the internal S T interface is up and the U interface is coming up If the NT1 LED is off the router is not detecting the ISDN link integrity signal Check the BRI cable connection ISDN BRI with RJ 45 connector NT1 Page 2 RN194 August 1997 AI2524 Router Card Version 1 00 Release Notes
175. d to various hardware devices e Configuration files contain commands entered to customize th function of the Cisco IOS software To benefit most from these instructions your router must contain minimal configuration that allows you to interact with the system soft ware You can create a basic configuration file using the setup com mand facility See the user guide for your hardware platform for more information on using setup at first time startup Refer to Use Setup after First Time Startup for more information August 1997 2524UM Page 7 1 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Image and To load and maintain system images microcode images and configu Configuration ration files needed for startup complete the tasks outlined in the next section File Load Task List Note The organization of tasks assumes you have a minimal configuration that you want to modify The tasks in the first three sections are typical for all routers Perform the remaining tasks as needed for your routing environment e Retrieve System Images and Configuration Files e Perform General Startup Tasks e Store System Images and Configuration Files e Perform Startup Tasks e Manually Load a System Image from ROM Monitor Page 7 2 August 1997 2524UM Retrieve System Images and Configuration Files Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images If you have a minimal configuration that allows you to interact with the system softwa
176. ddress 00001 x25 map cmns 38 8261 21 Create X 29 Access Lists Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps This configuration specifies that traffic from any other interface on Cisco Router C4 that is intended for any NSAP address with NSAP prefix 38 8261 20 will be switched through Serial 0 Configuration for Router C3 This configuration specifies that any traffic from any other interface intended for any NSAP address with NSAP 38 8261 20 will be switched to MAC address 0800 4e02 123f through Ethernet 0 0800 4e02 123f This configuration specifies that traffic from any other interface on Router C3 that is intended for any NSAP address with NSAP prefix 38 8261 21 will be switched through Serial 1 Protocol translation software supports access lists which make it pos sible to limit access to the access server from X 25 hosts Access lists take advantage of the message field defined by Recommendation X 29 which describes procedures for exchanging data between two PADs or between a PAD and a DTE device To define X 29 access lists perform these tasks e Create an Access List e Apply an Access List to a Line When configuring protocol translation you can specify an access list number with each translate command When translation sessions result from incoming PAD connections the corresponding X 29 ac cess list is used August 1997 2524UM Page 12 45 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Create an Access List
177. ddressing to call setup several interface addressing features are available for X 25 To configure X 25 addresses perform these tasks e Understand Normal X 25 Addressing e Understand X 25 Subaddresses e Configure an Interface Alias Address e Suppress or Replace the Calling Address e Suppress the Called Address Understand Normal X 25 Addressing An X 25 interface s X 121 address is used when it is the source or des tination of an X 25 call The X 25 call setup procedure identifies both the calling source and the called destination X 121 addresses When an interface is the source of a call it encodes the interface X 121 address as the source address An interface determines that it is th Page 12 10 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps destination of a received call if the destination address matches the in terface s address The AI2524 X 25 software can also route X 25 calls which involves placing and accepting calls but the router is neither the source nor the destination for these calls Routing X 25 does not modify the source or destination addresses thus preserving the addresses specified by the source host Routed switched X 25 simply connects two logical X 25 channels to complete an X 25 virtual circuit An X 25 virtual circuit is aconnection between two hosts the source host and the destination host that is switched between routed X 25 links The null X 121 add
178. default ip address 172 16 72 4 async mode interactive I Interface Async2 ipx network 5 ip unnumbered Ethernet0 async default ip address 172 16 72 5 async mode interactive Interface Async3 ipx network 6 ip unnumbered Ethernet0 asyncdefault ip address 172 16 72 6 async mode interactive I Interface Async4 ipx network 7 ip unnumbered Ethernet0 async default ip address 172 16 72 7 async mode interactive async dynamic address Interface Async5 ipx network 8 ip unnumbered Ethernet0 async default ip address 172 16 72 8 async mode interactive Interface Async6 ipx network 9 ip unnumbered Ethernet0 async default ip address 172 16 72 9 async mode interactive I Interface Async7 ipx network A ip unnumbered Ethernet0 async default ip address 172 16 72 10 asyncmode interactive f Interface Async8 ipx network B ip unnumbered Ethernet0 async default ip address 172 16 72 11 async mode interactive August 1997 Page 5 25 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Interface Async9 ipx network C ip unnumbered Ethernet0 async default ip address async mode interactive I Interface Asyncl0 ipx network D ip unnumbered Ethernet0 async default ip address async mode interactive Interface Asyncll ipx network E ip unnumbered Ethernet0 async default ip address async mode interactive I Interface Asyncl2 ipx network F ip unnumbered
179. distribute routing information from one routing process to an other refer to Redistribute Routing Information e Configure administrative distances refer to Specify Preferred Routes Enable ISO IGRP To configure ISO IGRP dynamic routing you must enable the ISO IGRP routing process identify the address for the router and specify the interfaces that are to route ISO IGRP Optionally you can set a level for your routing updates when you configure the interfaces CLNS routing is enabled by default on routers when you configure ISO IGRP You can specify up to ten ISO IGRP routing processes In global configuration mode configure ISO IGRP dynamic routing on the router 1 Enable the ISO IGRP routing process and enter router configura tion mode router iso igrp tag 2 Configure the NET or address for the routing process net network entity title Although IS IS allows you to configure multiple NETs ISO IGRP al lows only one NET per routing process Page 9 10 August 1997 2524UM router iso igrp castor Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps You can assign a meaningful name for the routing process by using the tag option You can also specify a name for a NET in addition to an address For information on how to assign a name see Specify Short cut NSAP Addresses You can configure an interface to advertise L evel2 information only This option reduces the amount of router to router traffic by tell
180. do support ES IS If you have configured interfaces for ISO IGRP or IS IS the ES IS routing software automatically turns on ES IS for those interfaces In interface configuration mode enter static mapping information be tween the NSAP protocol addresses and the subnetwork point of at tachment SNPA addresses media for ESs or ISs as needed e Configure all end systems that will be used when you manually specify the NSAP to SNPA mapping clns es neighbor nsap snpa e Configure all intermediate systems that will be used when you manually specify the NSAP to SNPA mapping clns is neighbor nsap snpa For more information refer to Configure CLNS over WANs Warning The SNPA is a data link layer address such as an Ether net address X 25 address or Frame Relay DLCI address used to configure a CLNS route for an interface Page 9 42 August 1997 2524UM Configure Miscellaneous Features Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps Perform these optional tasks to configure miscellaneous features of an ISO CLNS network e Specify Shortcut NSAP Addresses e Use the IP Domain Name System to Discover ISO CLNS Ad dresses e Create Packet Forwarding Filters and Establish Adjacencies e Redistribute Routing Information e Specify Preferred Routes e Configure ES IS Hello Packet Parameters Specify Shortcut NSAP Addresses You can define a name to NSAP address mapping This name can then be used i
181. dress and netmask of existing If the host portion of the IP address in the SLARP response is 1 newrouter configures its interface using the value 2 as the host portion of its IP address and vice versa See Figure 5 1 August 1997 2524UM Page 5 5 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Figure 5 1 Using SLARP to Acquire the New Router s IP Address Exot So Router 131 108 10 1 A SLARP request SLARP reply The IP address of existing is 131 108 10 1 The network mask of existing s interface ts 255 255 255 0 Therefore nevwouter learns that ts IP address ts 131 108 10 2 e Inresponse to BOOTP or RARP requests an IP address is sent from the BOOTP or RARP server to newrouter A BOOTP or RARP server must have already been set up to map newrouter s MAC address to its IP address If the BOOTP server does not reside on the directly attached network segment routers between newrouter and the BOOTP server can be configured with the ip helper address command to allow the request and response to be forwarded between segments as shown in Figur 5 2 Page 5 6 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 5 Using AutoInstall Figure 5 2 Use BOOTP or RARP to Acquire the New Router s IP Address 131 108 20 5 BOOT RARP Broadcast Helper address of 131 108 20 5 is configured on exasting BOOT RARP Reply The network s IP address is sent to newrouter 1492a AutoInstall over Frame Relay is a special case in that
182. dvertise tag tag August 1997 2524UM Page 8 5 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Implementation Considerations Before implementing this feature consider these items e Youcan seta Type 7 default route that can be used to reach exter nal destinations When configured the router generates a Type 7 default into the NSSA by the NSSA ABR e Every router within the same area must agree that the area is NS SA otherwise the routers will not be able to communicate with each other e If possible avoid using explicit redistribution on NSSA ABR be cause confusion may result over which packets are being translat ed by which router Configure Route Summarization between OSPF Areas Route summarization is the consolidation of advertised addresses This feature causes a single summary route to be advertised to other areas by an ABR In OSPF an ABR will advertise networks in one area into another area If the network numbers in an area are assigned sequentially you can configure the ABR to advertise a summary route that covers all the individual networks within the area that fall into the specified range To specify an address range type this command in router configura tion mode area area id range address mask Configure Route Summarization When Redistributing Routes into OSPF When redistributing routes from other protocols into OSPF each route is advertised individually in an external link state advertisement
183. e of the AFI e The DSP is made up of a high order DSP an area identifier a sys tem identifier and a 1 byte N selector labeled S Figure 9 1 NSAP Address Fields Assign addresses or NETs for your domains and areas Th domai naddress uniquely identifies the routing domain All routers within a given doma inare given the same dom ainaddress Within each routing domain you can set up one or more areas as shown in Figure 9 2 Determine which routers are to be assigned to which areas Page 9 2 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps The area address uniquely identifies the routing area and the system ID identifies each node Figure 9 2 Sample Domain and Area Addresses Area 0001 System ID 000 000 1234 Domain 47 004 004d s The key difference between the ISO IGRP and IS IS NSAP addressing schemes is in the definition of area addresses Both use the system ID for Level 1 routing routing within an area However they differ in the way addresses are specified for area routing An ISO IGRP NSAP address includes three separate fields for routing the domain area and system ID An IS IS address includes two fields a single contin uous area field comprising the doma inand area fields and the system ID ISO IGRP NSAP Address The ISO IGRP NSAP address is divided into three parts a domai npart an area address and a system ID D omainrouting is per formed on the doma inpart of
184. e DCE device can initiate a call in the incoming only range e Only the DTE device can initiate a callin the outgoing only range e Both the DCE device and the DTE device can initiate a call in the two way range The ITU T Recommendation for X 25 defines incoming and outgoing in relation to the DTE or DCE interface role this documentation uses the more intuitive sense Unless the ITU T sense is explicitly refer enced a call received from the interface is an incoming call and a call sent out the interface is an outgoing call Note The ITU T carries out the functions of the former Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone CCITT There is no difference in the operation of the SVCs ranges except th restrictions on which device can initiate a call These ranges can be August 1997 2524UM Page 12 3 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit used to prevent one side from monopolizing the virtual circuits and is useful for X 25 interfaces with a small total number of SVCs available Six X 25 parameters define the upper and lower limit of each of th three SVC ranges A PVC must be assigned a number less than the numbers assigned to the SVC ranges An SVC range is not allowed to overlap another range Note Because the X 25 protocol requires the DTE and DCE to have identical virtual circuit ranges changes you make to the virtual circuit range limits when the interface is up are held until the X 25 protocol r
185. e Set the tag value to associate with the redistributed routes set tag tag value Examples Route Map This example redistributes two types of routes into the integrated IS IS routing table supporting both IP and CLNS The first routes are OSPF external IP routes with tag 5 and these are inserted into level 2 IS IS LSPs with a metric of 5 The second routes are ISO IGRP de rived CLNS prefix routes that match CLNS filter expression osifilter These are redistributed into IS IS as level 2 LSPs with a metric of 30 router isis redistribute ospf 109 route map ipmap redistribute iso igrp nsfnet route map osimap I route map ipmap permit match route type external match tag 5 set metric 5 set level level 2 1 route map osimap permit match clns address osifilter set metric 30 clns filter set osifilter permit 47 0005 80FF FF00 Given this configuration a RIP learned route for network 160 89 0 0 and an ISO IGRP learned route with prefix 49 0001 0002 will be re distributed into an IS IS level 2 LSP with a metric of 5 For example Page 9 48 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps router isis redistribute rip route map ourmap redistribute iso igrp remote route map ourmap I route map ourmap permit match ip address 1 match clns address ourprefix set metric 5 set level level 2 I access list 1 permit 160 89 0 0 0 0 255 255 clns filter set ourprefix permit 49 0001 0002
186. e an enable timeout and a map class to be defined interface BRIO ip address 7 1 1 8 255 255 255 0 encapsulation ppp dialer map ip 7 1 1 7 name dallas 81012345678902 dialer group 1 ppp callback request ppp authentication chap Page 11 14 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps Configure a Router as a Callback Server Beginning in global configuration mode configure a router as a call back server 1 10 11 Specify the interface and enter interface configuration mode interface serial number Enable DDR Set parity on synchronous serial interfaces and asyn chronous interfaces dialer in band no parity odd parity Enable PPP encapsulation encapsulation ppp Enable CHAP or PAP authentication ppp authentication chap pap Map the next hop address to the host name and phone number using the name of the map class established for PPP callback on this interface dialer map protocol address name hostname class classname dial string Optional Configure a dialer hold queue to store packets to be transferred when the callback connection is established dialer hold queue number timeout seconds Optional Configure a timeout period between calls dialer enable timeout seconds Configure the interface to accept PPP callback ppp callback accept Optional Enable callback security if desired dialer callback secure Return to global configuration mode exit Co
187. e compression the default subjects all outgoing TCP IP packets to header compression Passive compression subjects an outgoing packet to header compression only if the packet had a compressed TCP IP header when it was received on that interface In interface configuration mode apply TCP IP header compression to an interface 1 Configure Cisco encapsulation on the interface encapsulation frame relay 2 Enable TCP IP header compression on the interface frame relay ip tcp header compression passive Note If an interface configured with Cisco encapsulation is later configured with IETF encapsulation all TCP IP header compression characteristics are lost To appl TCP IP header compression over an interface configured with IETF encapsulation you must configure individual IP maps as described in the section Configure an Individual IP Map for TCP IP Header Compression August 1997 2524UM Page 13 41 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Example IP Map with Inherited TCP IP Header Compression This example shows an interface configured for TCP IP header com pression and an IP map that inherits the compression characteristics Note that the Frame Relay IP map is not explicitly configured for header compression interface serial 1 encapsulation frame relay ip address 131 108 177 178 255 255 255 0 frame relay map ip 131 108 177 177 177 broadcast frame relay ip tcp header compression passive Use the show frame
188. e configuration mode interface async number e Optional If you want an interface to use an address pool other than default specify which pool each interface uses peer default ip address pool poolname PPP callback provides a client server relationship between the end points of a point to point connection PPP callback allows a router to request that a dial up peer router call back The callback feature can be used to control access and toll costs between the routers When PPP callback is configured on the participating routers the call ing router the callback client passes authentication information to th remote router the callback server which uses the host name and dial string authentication information to determine whether to place a re turn call If the authentication is successful the callback server discon nects and then places a return call The remote username of the return call is used to associate it with the initial call so that packets can b transmitted Both routers on a point to point link must be configured for PPP call back one must function as a callback client and one must be config ured as a callback server The callback client must be configured to initiate PPP callback and the callback server must be configured to ac cept PPP callback This feature implements these callback specifications of RFC 1570 e For the client Option 0 location is determined by user authentica tion e For the server O
189. e configured over WANs X 25 is not a broadcast medium and therefore does not broadcast pro tocols such as ES IS that automatically advertise and record map pings between NSAP NET protocol addresses and SNPA media addresses With X 25 the SNPAs are the X 25 network addresses or the X 121 addresses These are usually assigned by the X 25 network provider If you use static routing you must configure the NSAP to X 121 address mapping with th x25 map command Configuring a serial line to use CLNS over X 25 requires configuring the general X 25 information and the CLNS specific information First configure the general X 25 information Then enter the CLNS static mapping information You can specify X 25 nondefault packet and window sizes reverse charge information and so on The X 25 facilities information that can be specified is exactly the same as in thex25 map interface configu ration command Example ISO CLNS over X 25 In this example serial interface 1 on Router A acts as a DTE for X 25 It permits broadcasts to pass through Router B is an IS which has CLNS address of 49 0001 bbbb bbbb bbbb 00 and an X 121 address of 31102 Router A has a CLNS address of 49 0001 aaaa aaaa aaaa 00 and an address of 31101 Figure 9 12 illustrates this configuration August 1997 Page 9 51 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Figure 9 12 Routers Acting as DTEs and DCEs 400l aaa aaaa aaaa 0 42001 bbb boob bob h t
190. e example of CLNS static routing on a system with two Ethernet interfaces After configuring routing you define NET and enable CLNS on the Ethernet 0 and Ethernet 1 interfaces You must then define an ES neighbor and define a static route with the clns route global configuration command as shown In this situ ation there is an ES on Ethernet 1 that does not support ES IS Figur 9 9 illustrates this network Figure 9 9 Static Routing 3 0001 1111 1111 1111 00 30002 227 2222 277 0 S15 725 August 1997 Page 9 35 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit clns clns clns clns host sid 39 0001 1111 1111 1111 00 host bar 39 0002 2222 2222 2222 00 1 Assign a static address for the router net sid 2 Enable CLNS packets to be routed routing 3 Pass ISO CLNS packet traffic to end systems without routing them interfac thernet 0 clns enable 4 Pass ISO CLNS packet traffic to end systems without routing them interfac thernet 1 clns enable Nn Specify end system for static routing clns es neighbor bar 0000 0C00 62e7 clns 6 Create an interface static route to bar for packets with the this NSAP address route 47 0004 000c bar Example Static Intradomain Routing Figure 9 10 and the configurations demonstrate how to use static rout ing inside of a domain Imagine a company with branch offices in De troit and Chicago connected with an X 25 link These offices are both i
191. e intradomain level this means that OSPF can import routes learned via IGRP RIP and IS IS OSPF routes can also be exported into IGRP RIP and IS IS At the interdomain level OSPF can import routes learned via EGP and BGP OSPF routes can be exported into EGP and BGP Authentication Simple and MD5 authentication among neighboring routers within an area is sup ported Routing Interface Configurable parameters supported includ parameters interface output cost retransmission inter val interface transmit delay router prionity router dead and hello intervals and authentication key Virtual links Virtual links are supported NSSA areas RFC 1567 OSPF over demand RFC 1793 circuit Note To take advantage of the OSPF stub area support default routing must be used in the stub area Page 8 10 August 1997 2524UM AI2524 IGRP TCP IP Configuration Steps Chapter 8 AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps The Interior Gateway Routing Protocol IGRP is a dynamic distance vector routing protocol for an autonomous system that contains large arbitrarily complex networks with diverse bandwidth and delay char acteristics IGRP uses a combination of user configurable metrics including in ternetwork delay bandwidth reliability and load IGRP Updates By default a router running IGRP sends an update broadcast every 90 seconds It declares a route inaccessible if it does not receive an update from the first
192. e listed xtended flag Router config ext nacl Ext Access List configuration commands deny Specify packets to reject dynamic Specify a DYNAMIC list of PERMITs or DENYs exit Exit from access list configuration mode no Negate or set default values of a command permit Specify packets to forward Context Sensitive The first level of help available with the user interface is context sen Help sitive help Entering a question mark at the system prompt displays a list of commands available for each command mode You can also get a list of any command s associated keywords and arguments with the context sensitive help feature To get help specific to a command mode a command a keyword or arguments perform one of these tasks Help Command Command Format Obtain a brief description of the help sys help tem in any command mode Receive help for the full set of user level full help commands when you type a question mark 2 Receive help for the full set of user level terminal full commands for this exec session help Obtain a list of commands that begin with abbreviated a particular character string command entry Complete a partial command name abbreviated command entry lt Tab gt List all commands available for a particu lar command mode List a command s associated keywords command List a keyword s associated arguments command key word Page 4 18 Aug
193. e network enhanced queuing also prevents congestion caused data loss Traffic shaping applies to both PVCs and SVCs To configure Frame Relay traffic shaping perform these tasks e Enable Frame Relay Traffic Shaping on the Interface e Specify a Traffic Shaping Map Class for the Interfac e Define a Map Class with Queuing and Traffic Shaping Parameters e Define Access Lists e Define Priority Queue Lists for the Map Class e Define Custom Queue Lists for the Map Class Enable Frame Relay Traffic Shaping on the Interface In interface configuration mode enable Frame Relay traffic shaping on an interface to enable both traffic shaping and per virtual circuit queuing on all the interface s PVCs and SVCs frame relay traffic shaping Specify a Traffic Shaping Map Class for the Interface If you specify a Frame Relay map class for a main interface all the vir tual circuits on its subinterfaces inherit all the traffic shaping parame ters defined for the class In interface configuration mode specify a map class for the specified interface frame relay class map class name You can override the default for a specific DLCI on a specific sub interface by using the class virtual circuit configuration command to assign the DLCI explicitly to a different class Page 13 14 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps Define a Map Class with Queuing and Traffic Shaping Pa
194. e peer IP address for a VTY pseudo async interface Page 11 8 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps e Default IP address The peer default ip address com mand and the member peer default ip address com mand can be used to define default peer IP addresses e TACACS assigned IP address During the authorization phase of IPCP address negotiation TACACS can return an IP address that can be used by the user being authenticated on a dial up interface This address overrides any default IP address and prevents pooling from taking place e DHCP retrieved IP address If configured the routers acts as a proxy client for the dial up user and retrieves an IP address from a DHCP server That address is returned to the DHCP server when the timer expires or when the interface goes down e Local address pool The local address pool contains a set of con tiguous IP addresses a maximum of 256 addresses stored in two queues The free queue contains addresses available to be as signed The used queue contains addresses that are in use Ad dresses are stored in the free queue in First In First Out FIFO order to minimize the chance the address will be reused and to al low a peer to reconnect using the same address that it used in the last connection If the address is available it is assigned if not an other address from the free queue is assigned The pool configured for the interface is used unless TACA
195. e same password for both the router will accept your entry but will display a warning message indicating that you should enter a dif ferent password August 1997 Page 6 3 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 6 Enter an enable secret password Th nable secret is a one way cryptographic secret used instead of the enable password when it exists Enter enable secret pail The enable password is used when there is no enable secret and when using older software and some boot images 7 Enter the enable and virtual terminal passwords Enter enable password shovel Enter virtual terminal password vterml 8 Press lt Enter gt to accept Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP management or type no to refuse it Configure SNMP Network Management yes no 9 Configure the appropriate protocols for your router Configure Vines no Configure LAT no Configure AppleTalk no yes Multizone networks no yes Configure DECnet no Configure IP yes Configure IGRP routing yes Your IGRP autonomous system number 1 15 Configure CLNS no Configure bridging no Configure IPX no yes Configure XNS no Configure Apollo no 10 Enter the ISDN BRI switch type for the router The ISDN switch type appropriate for the router depends on the ISDN provider s equipment Enter ISDN BRI Switch Type none basic 5ess Page 6 4 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 6
196. e serial 1 and 2 Frames with DLCI 100 received on serial 1 will be transmitted with DLCI 200 on serial 2 see Figure 13 4 Figure 13 4 PVC Switching Configuration 51 Ae Configuration for Router A frame relay switching l interface Ethernet0 ip address 131 108 160 358 255 255 2550 interface Seriall no ip address encapsulation frame relay keepalive 15 frame relay lmi type ansi frame relay intf type dce frame relay route 100 interface Serial2 200 frame relay route 101 interface Serial2 201 clockrate 2000000 interface Serial2 encapsulation frame relay keepalive 15 frame relay intf type dce frame relay route 200 interface Seriall 100 frame relay route 201 interface Seriall 101 clockrate 64000 Page 13 30 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps Example Pure Frame Relay DCE Using the PVC switching feature it is possible to build an entire Frame Relay network using our routers In this example Router A and Router C act as Frame Relay switches implementing a two node network Th standard Network to Network Interface NNI signaling protocol is used between Router A and Router C see Figure 13 5 Figure 13 5 Frame Relay DCE Configuration Frame Relay network Routar C 31 August 1997 2524UM Page 13 31 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Configuration for Router A frame relay switching interfac thernet 0 no ip address shutdown I
197. e steps to access the home page for your router or access server 1 Enter the name of the router or access server in the URL field of your Web browser and press lt Enter gt The browser prompts you for the password for the router or access server 2 Enter the password Warning The name and password for your router and access server are designated as part of the configuration process Con tact your network administrator if you do not have this in formation The browser should display the home page for your router or access server The router s home page looks something like the home page shown in Figure 4 1 Figure 4 1 Example of a Home Page a eT ee examele Home Poge x rd x Fark Freeware 2 med Iraces a Print Pre ole hito aanphs wlel s Nev wiel Cul _Hamdbuvk Nel Seer n Ne Dit ehry Suflyare isco Systems Accessing Cisco 7200 example Tclre to tac router Show icterfoces disp xy the status cf che nterfaces Skew cicler store disaloy tho dial ng scius show Show clegnostiz log dsslay the dagnost c log HTML eevess la Jae corsa lie iieb Conrecliv ty tea png che ncmeszzrver Plafons platferra atlitles Send ccmnenis to cs h ml sel gt 19 Skew toch cugpert display intermoticn commonly necded by iech support Help resources OEC www saun ise Seine eoa Tice ine ling the Tat niral Assistar ce Cer ter TAC 2 tec cievo com e mail the TAC i AVLSAIHE prane re TA
198. e terminating host can accept the call if it is configured to exchange the identified traffic with the source host Figure 12 1 illustrates two routers sending datagrams across an X 25 public data network PDN Figure 12 1 Transporting LAN Protocols across an X 25 Public Data Network PDN August 1997 2524UM Page 12 13 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Perform these tasks as necessary to complete the X 25 configuration for your network needs e Configure Subinterfaces e Map Protocol Addresses to X 121 Addresses e Establish an Encapsulation PVC e Set X 25 TCP IP Header Compression e Configure X 25 Bridging These sections describe how to perform these configuration tasks Configure Subinterfaces Subinterfaces are virtual interfaces that can be used to connect several networks to each other through a single physical interface Subinter faces are made available on AI2524 routers because routing protocols especially those using the split horizon principle may need help to de termine which hosts need a routing update The split horizon principle allows routing updates to be distributed to other routed interfaces ex cept the interface on which the routing update was received It works well in a LAN environment in which other routers reached by the in terface have already received the routing update However in a WAN environment using connection oriented inter faces like X 25 and Frame Relay
199. e the configuration file to your startup configuration This step saves the configuration to NVRAM copy running config startup config Reset the router with the new configuration information reload You can specify more than one host configuration file The Cisco IOS software tries them in order until it loads one successfully This proce dure can be useful for keeping files with different configuration infor mation loaded on a network server In this example a router is configured to boot from the host configu ration file hostfilel and from the network configuration file networkfile1 Routerl configure terminal Routerl config boot host hostfilel Routerl config boot network networkfilel Routerl config service config Z Routerl copy running config startup config Page 7 20 August 1997 2524UM Booting host confg Store System Images and Configuration Files Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images If the network server fails to load a configuration file during startup it tries again every 1 Ominutes the default setting until a host provides the requested files With each failed attempt the network server dis plays a message on the console terminal If the network server is un able to load the specified file it displays this message timed out If there are any problems with the startup configuration file or if th configuration register is set to ignore NVRAM the router enters the
200. e up arrow key Repeat the key sequence to recall successively more recent commands Press lt Ctrl N gt or the down arrow key List the last several commands you entered while in EXEC mode show history Disable command history during th current terminal session terminal no his tory August 1997 2524UM Page 4 23 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Editing Features The current software release includes an enhanced editing mode that provides a set of editing key functions similar to those of the Emacs editor Notes Many of the commands described in this section refer to arrow keys as well as alternate keystrokes Please note that arrow keys function only on ANSI compatible terminals such as VT100s The More prompt is used for any output that has more lines than can be displayed on the terminal screen including show command output You can use the keystrokes listed above when ever you see th More prompt You might want to disable enhanced editing if you have prebuilt scripts such as scripts that do not interact well when enhanced editing is enabled You can reenable enhanced editing mode with the terminal editing command Editing Commands 8 Command Format In user EXEC mode reenable the terminal editing enhanced editing mode for the current terminal session Move the cursor back one character Press lt Ctrl B gt or press the
201. e you have entered an incorrect command keyword or ar gument The error location indicator and interactive help system allow you to find and correct syntax errors easily In this example context sensitive help is used to check the syntax for setting the clock Router clock set Set the time and date Router clock August 1997 Page 4 21 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit The help output shows that the set keyword is required Check the syn tax for entering the time Router clock set hh mm ss Current time Router clock set Enter the current time Router clock set 13 32 00 Q Incomplete command The system indicates that you need to provide additional arguments to complete the command Press lt Ctrl P gt refer to Command History Features to automatically repeat the previous command entry Then add a space and question mark to reveal the additional arguments Router clock set 13 32 00 lt 1 31 gt Day of the month January Month of the year February March April May June July August September October November December Now you can complete the command entry Router clock set 13 32 00 23 February 93 o Invalid input detected at marker The caret symbol and help response indicate an error at 93 To list the correct syntax enter the command up to the point where the erro occurred and then enter a question mark Router clock set 13 32 00
202. ecify a file tftp server flash filename e Specify a file in the first partition of Flash tftp server flash filename e Specify a file in the specified partition of Flash tftp server flash partition number filename Once you have specified TFTP server operation exit configuration mode and save the configuration information to your startup configu ration Use Flash Load Helper to Upgrade Software on Run from Flash Systems Flash load helper is a software option that enables you to upgrade sys tem software on run from Flash systems that have a single bank of August 1997 2524UM Page 7 29 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Flash memory It is a lower cost software upgrade solution than dual bank Flash which requires two banks of Flash memory on one SIMM The Flash load helper software upgrade process is simple and does not require additional hardware however it does require some brief net work downtime A system image running from Flash can use Flash load helper only if the boot ROMs support Flash load helper Other wise you must perform the Flash upgrade manually Refer to Manu ally Boot from Flash for more information Flash load helper is an automated procedure that reloads the ROM based image downloads the software to Flash memory and reboots to the system image in Flash memory Flash load helper performs checks and validations to maximize the success of a Flash upgrade and mini mize the chance o
203. ections This feature is enabled by default In global configuration mode enable or disable DNS queries for IS CLNS addresses e Enable DNS queries for CLNS addresses ip domain lookup nsap e Disable DNS queries for CLNS addresses no ip domain lookup nsap Create Packet Forwarding Filters and Establish Adjacencies You can build powerful CLNS filter expressions or access lists These can be used to control either the forwarding of frames through route interfaces or the establishment of adjacencies with or the application of filters to any combination of ES or IS neighbors ISO IGRP neigh bors or IS IS neighbors CLNS filter expressions are complex logical combinations of CLNS filter sets CLNS filter sets are lists of address templates against which CLNS addresses are matched Address templates are CLNS address patterns that are either simple CLNS addresses that match just one ad dress or match multiple CLNS addresses through the use of wildcard characters prefixes and suffixes Frequently used address templates can be given aliases for easier reference 1 In global configuration mode establish CLNS filters e Create aliases for frequently used address templates clns template alias name template e Build filter sets of multiple address template permit and deny con ditions clns filter set sname permit deny template e Build filter expressions using one or more filter sets clns filter expr ename term
204. ed TCP IP heade compression must also have TCP IP header compression explicitly disabled To disable TCP IP header compression perform one of these tasks in interface configuration mode e Disable TCP IP header compression on all Frame Relay IP maps that are not explicitly configured for TCP header compression no frame relay ip tcp header compression frame relay map ip ip address dlci e Disable TCP IP header compression on a specified Frame Relay IP map nocompress tcp header compression Example Disabling Inherited TCP IP Header Compression In this first example the initial configuration is encapsulation frame relay ip address 131 108 177 179 255 255 255 0 frame relay ip tcp header compression passive frame relay map ip 131 108 177 177 177 broadcast frame relay map ip 131 108 177 178 178 broadcast tcp header compression serial interface 1 Enter these commands no frame relay ip tcp header compression August 1997 2524UM Page 13 43 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Use the show frame relay map command to display the resulting compression and encapsulation characteristics Router gt show frame relay map Serial 1 administratively down ip 131 108 177 177 177 dici 177 0xBl 0x2C10 static broadcast CISCO Serial 1 administratively down ip 131 108 177 178 178 dici 178 0xB2 0x2C20 static broadcast CISCO TCP IP Header Compression enabled As a result header compression is disab
205. ed burst size Bc frame relay bc out bits Set the incoming excess burst size Be frame relay be in bits August 1997 2524UM Page 13 11 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 12 Set the outgoing excess burst size Be frame relay be out bits 13 Set the idle timeout interval frame relay idle timer duration You can define multiple map classes A map class is associated with a static map not with the interface or subinterface Because of the flex ibility this association allows you can define different map classes fo different destinations Configure a Map Group with E 164 or X 121 Addresses After you have defined a map group for an interface you can associate the map group with a specific source and destination address such as E 164 or X 121 addresses In global configuration mode specify th map group for a specific interface map list group name source addr e164 x121 source address dest addr e164 x121 destination address Associate the Map Class with Static Protocol Address Maps To define the protocol addresses under a map 1list command and associate each protocol address with a specified map class use the class command for each protocol address In map class configura tion mode associate a map class with a protocol address protocol protocol address class class name ietf broadcast trigger The iet f keyword specifies RFC 1490 encapsulation th broad cast keyword specifies th
206. eeesseeeseeeeeeneeceecsaecsaecesecsaeenaecaeeesaeees 8 16 Enable RIP i 2int e a acs eee SHE ee ee ee ae 8 16 Allow Point to Point Updates for RI oo eee eeseeseeesecnseceseceseceeeeseeeseeeaeenes 8 16 Specily a RIP Version serto toeni ei a E E a 8 17 Enable RIP Authentication ectetuer eosi bris 8 18 Disable Route Summarization sssseseeeseeeeresreesesttsstrrrestesirsresrestesesrrseeseeerse 8 18 Run IGRP and RIP Concurrently cece eesceseceseceseceseceseeeseeeseeseeeeeaeesseeseeeaes 8 19 Disable the Validation of Source IP Addresses ecceecesceeseeseeeneeenseenseeees 8 19 Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps ccscccsssccssssccsescssssscssese 9 1 TntrOducti On 2 ste eyeta ete conic tee Feat esos Oa eke eth eee eee 9 1 ISO CLNS Configuration Task List eeeeeeeseeseeeseeeseecsceceaeceaeceaecesecsseesseeesessaeeaes 9 1 Understand Addresses occ ci 60 5 iieii teii heats castes E essays E aie 9 2 ISO IGRP NSAP Add ress 0 eesesseeeccesceecceeceeeccecececoaecneecnaecseeseseeenseessenacense 9 3 TS IS NSAP Address is esc nena ee tei Biel Nee Se ea 9 4 Addressing Rules ssc avgesru ode oe Sid eae haa nei ad Gani ces 9 5 Addressing Examples siiccctsscecsise ccohioueticiewthuatinleeiteneedd E ide n 9 6 Routing Table Example riisme onata diecsehe sone biedbouthe gees 9 6 Understand Routing Processes 0 ccsecesecssecsseceseceseceseceseesseeseeeseneseaeesaeeeaeesaaesaeeaeenaes 9 8 Dynamic Routine ic
207. elay encapsulated serial interfaces is supported on our access servers You can configure transparent bridging for point to point or point to multipoint subinterfaces Note All PVCs configured on a subinterface belong to the same bridge group Page 13 24 August 1997 2524UM Poi Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps nt to Point Subinterfaces In interface configuration mode configure transparent bridging for point to point subinterfaces 1 Specify a serial interface interface serial number Configure Frame Relay encapsulation on the serial interface encapsulation frame relay Specify a subinterface interface serial number subinterface number point to point Associate a DLCI with the subinterface frame relay interface dlci dlci option Associate the subinterface with a bridge group bridge group bridge group Example Unnumbered IP over a Point to Point Subinterface Thi s example sets up unnumbered IP over subinterfaces at both ends of a point to point connection In this example Router A functions as the DTE and Router B functions as the DCE Routers A and B are both attached to Token Ring networks Configuration for Router A frame relay switching interface token ring 0 ip address 131 108 177 1 25 I interface serial 0 no ip address encapsulation frame relay I 5 255 255 0 ETE interface Serial0 2 point to point ip unnumbered TokenRing0O ip p
208. ell IS IS and ES IS neighbors If no response is received within the specified time lim it a Type 2 PDU is sent To prevent packet looping a loop detec tion buffer is maintained on the router A Type 1 PDU is sent when youuse the tarp resolve command e Type 2 Sent when a device has a TID for which it has no match ing NSAP and no response was received from a Type 1 PDU Type 2 PDUs are sent to all Le vell and Lev el2 neighbors A time limit for Type 2 PDUs can also be specified A Type 2 PDU is sent when you use the tarp resolve command and specify the op tion 2 e Type 3 Sent as a response to a Type 1 Type 2 or Type 5 PDU Type 3 PDUs are sent directly to the originator of the request e Type 4 Sent as a notification when a change occurs locally fo example a TID or NSAP change A Type 4 PDU is sent when you use the tarp query command e Type 5 Sent when a device needs a TID that corresponds to a specific NSAP Unlike Type 1 and Type 2 PDUs that are sent to all Leve 11 and Level 2 neighbors a Type 5 PDU is sent only to a particular router In addition to the type TARP PDUs contain the sender s NSAP th sender s TID and the target s TID if the PDU is a Type 1 or Type 2 August 1997 2524UM Page 9 59 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit TARP Configuration Task List To configure TARP on the router complete these tasks only the first task is required all other tasks are optional e Enable TARP an
209. ello interval seconds by to determine the total holding time transmitted in the IS IS hello packet If not specified a multiplier of 3 is used isis hello multiplier multiplier level 1 level 2 The hello interval can be configured independently for Levell and Level 2 except on serial point to point interfaces Because there is only a single type of hello packet sent on serial links the hello packet is independent of Lev ell or Lev el2 Specify an optional level for X 25 SMDS and Frame Relay multiaccess networks Use the isis hello multiplier command in circumstances where hello packets are lost frequently and IS IS adjacencies are fail ing unnecessarily You can raise the hello multiplier and lower th hello interval isis hello interval command correspond ingly to make the hello protocol more reliable without increasing th time required to detect a link failure Set the Advertised CSNP Interval CSNPs are sent by the designated router to maintain database synchro nization In interface configuration mode configure the IS IS CSNP interval fo the interface isis csnp interval seconds level 1 level 2 This feature does not apply to serial point to point interfaces It does apply to WAN connections if the WAN is viewed as a multiaccess meshed network August 1997 2524UM Page 9 31 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Set the Retransmission Interval In interface configuration mode configure the number
210. em Config uration Dialog When you are configuring your router respond as ap propriate for your network At any time during the System Configuration Dialog you can request help by typing a question mark at a prompt Before proceeding with the System Configuration Dialog obtain from your system administrator the node addresses and the number of bits August 1997 2524UM Page 6 1 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit in the subnet field if applicable of the Ethernet and synchronous se rial ports Take these steps to configure the router using the System Configura tion Dialog 1 Connect a console terminal to the console connector on theAI2524 Note The default parameters for the console port are 9600 baud 8 data bits no parity and 2 stop bits 2 After about 30 seconds information similar to the following is dis played on the console screen Note The messages displayed vary depending on the Cisco IOS feature set you selected The screen displays in this section are for reference only and may not exactly reflect the screen displays on your console When you see this information you have successfully booted your router System Bootstrap Version X X XXXX XXXXX XX RELEASE SOFTWARE Copyright c 1986 1992 by Cisco Systems 2500 processor with 4096 Kbytes of main memory Notice NVRAM invalid possibly due to write erase F3 5797928 162396 258800 at 0x3000060 Restricted Rights Le
211. em Images e Allows you to save any configuration changes made before you exit out of the system image e Notifies users logged in to the system of the impending switch to the boot ROM image so that they do not lose their connections un expectedly e Logs console output during the Flash load helper operation into a buffer that is preserved through system reloads You can retrieve the buffer contents from a running image The output is useful when console access is unavailable or when a failure occurs in the download operation Flash load helper can also be used on systems with multiple banks of Flash memory that support Flash memory partitioning Flash load helper enables you to download a new file into the same partition from which the system is executing an image For information about how to partition multiple banks of Flash mem ory so your system can hold two different images refer to Partition Flash Memory Using Dual Flash Bank Flash Load Helper Configuration Task List Perform these tasks to use and monitor Flash load helper e Download a File Using Flash Load Helper e Monitor Flash Load Helper Download a File Using Flash Load Helper To download a new file to Flash memory using Flash load helper check to make sure that your boot ROMs support Flash load helper and then type the following in privileged EXEC mode copy tftp flash This error message appears if you are in a Telnet session and the sys tem is set for m
212. em flash Read ONLY Notice NVRAM invalid possibly due to write erase System Configuration Dialog At any point you may enter a question mark for help Refer to the Getting Started Guide for additional help Use ctrl c to abort configuration dialog at any prompt Default settings are in square brackets Would you like to enter the initial configuration dialog yes 3 Press lt Enter gt or enter yes to begin the configuration process August 1997 Page 16 7 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit First would you lik 4 When the System Configuration Dialog asks whether you want to view the current interface summary press lt Return gt or enter yes s the current interface summary yes CO Any interface listed wit NO O O Interface IP Address OK EthernetO unassigned BRIO unassigned Serialo unassigned Seriall unassigned O h OK value NO does not have a valid configuration Method Status Protocol not set up down not set up up not set down down not set down down 5 Configure the global parameters Choose which protocols to sup port on the Ethernet interface For IP installations you can press lt Enter gt to accept the default values in brackets for most of the questions A typical configuration is Configuring global parameters Ent eA Enter host name Router Next you are prompted to
213. ement and Security Scalability The Cisco IOS software uses scalable routing protocols to avoid need less congestion overcome inherent protocol limitations and bypass many of the obstacles that result from the complex scope and geo graphical dispersion of an internetwork The Cisco IOS software eliminates the need for static routes and re duces network costs by efficiently using network bandwidth and re sources Advanced features such as route filtering protocol termination and translation smart broadcasts and helper address ser vices combine to create a flexible scalable infrastructure that can keep pace with evolving network requirements Reliable Adaptive Routing The AI2524 Cisco IOS software identifies the best network paths and routes traffic around network failures Policy based features such as route filtering and route redistribution save network resources by pre venting data from being broadcast to nodes that do not need it Priority output queuing and custom queuing grant priority to important ses sions when network bandwidth is scarce Load balancing uses every available path across the internetwork to preserve bandwidth and im prove network performance The Cisco IOS software also provides the most effective and efficient scaling available for network applications that require transparent or source route bridging algorithms Remote Access and Protocol Translation Your router connects terminals modems microcompu
214. emote Alarms e Enable Loopcodes that Initiate Remote Loopbacks e Specify Timeslots Specify the Clock Source To specify the clock source for the FT1 T1 CSU DSU internal clock or the line clock type this in interface configuration mode service module t1 clock source internal line Enable Data Inversion Before Transmission Data inversion is used to guarantee the T1s density requirement on an AMI line when using bit oriented protocols such as High Level Data Link Control HDLC Point to Point Protocol PPP X 25 and Frame Relay August 1997 2524UM Page 14 1 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit To guarantee the ones density requirement on an AMI line using th FT1 T1 CSU DSU module type this in interface configuration mode service module t1 data coding inverted This command inverts bit codes by changi ng all 1 bits to Obits and all 0 bits to 1 bits If the timeslot speed is se t to 56kbps this command is rejected be cause line density is guaranteed when transmitti ng at 56kbps Use this command with the 64 kbps line speed If you transmit inverted bit codes both CSU DSUs must have this command configured for suc cessful communication To enable normal data transmission on a FT1 T1 network type this in interface configuration mode service module tx1 data coding normal or no service module t1 data coding inverted Specify the Frame Type of a FT T1 Line To specify the frame type for a l
215. ent application data from repli cating loopback codes when operating at 64 kbps on a 4 wire CSU DSU by scrambling bit codes before transmission service module 56k data coding scrambled Enable the scrambled configuration only in 64 kbps digital data ser vice DDS mode If the network type is set to switched the configu ration is refused If you transmit scrambled bit codes both CSU DSUs must have this command configured for successful communication In interface configuration mode enable normal data transmission fo the 4 wire 56 64 kbps module which is the default service module 56k data coding normal or no service module 56k data coding In interface configuration mode transmit packets in switched dial up mode or DDS mode using the 4 wire 56 64 kbps CSU DSU module service module 56k network type dds or service module 56k network type switched Do not use any form of these commands to transmit from a dedicated leased line in DDS mode DDS is enabled by default for the 4 wir CSU DSU Switched mode is enabled by default for the 2 wire CSU DSU In switched mode you need additional dialer configuration commands to configure dial out numbers Before you enable the service module 56k network type switched command both CSU DSUs must use a clock source coming from the line and the clock rate must be configured to auto or 56k kbps If the clock rate is not set cor rectly this command will not be accepted The 2 w
216. enter an enable secret password There are two types of privileged level passwords Enable secret password a very secure encrypted password Enable password a less secure nonencrypted password The enable password is used when the enable secret password does not exist For maximum security be sure the passwords are different If you enter the same password for both the router will accept your entry but will display a warning message indicating that you should enter a dif ferent password 6 Enter an enable secret password The enable secret is a one way cryptographic secret used instead of the enable password when it exists nable secret pail The enable password is user when there is no enable secret and when using older software and some boot images Page 16 8 August 1997 2524UM Cit Chapter 16 Basic Configuration 7 Enter the enable and virtual terminal passwords Enter enable password shovel Enter virtual terminal password vterml 8 Press lt Enter gt to accept Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP management or enter no to refuse it Configure SNMP Network Management yes no 9 In this example the router is configured for AppleTalk IP and IPX Configure the appropriate protocols for your router Configure Vines no Configure LAT no Configure AppleTalk no yes Multizone networks no yes Configure DECnet no Configure IP yes Configure IGRP routing yes Y
217. entered For example avrestore directory means that you type avrestore and if you need to include a directory type the actual path name CFGMSG n DEFAULT means that you type CFGMSG followed by message number a comma and optionally the word DEFAULT without brackets argument argument Arguments between braces are grouped into one unit The vertical bar signifies that either the first or second argument can be used The braces and vertical bar are not entered For example ls file directory means that you would type 1s followed by either a file or a directory name lt Keys gt Keyboard controls are shown in this style Angle brackets depict keys that do not ap pear on the screen when pressed such as the lt tab gt or lt return gt keys Keys used in combi nation are connected with a dash For exam ple to enter lt ALT SysRq gt hold down the Alt key while you press th SysRq key Page 1 6 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 1 Introduction Labels Labels are used in diagrams to designat physical components such as jumper straps switches and cable connectors For exam ple COM1 BOOT1 If the physical component being described is part of the text it appears as regular type To reset the COM port connector press th BOOT switch Menu Submenu Menu selections are shown in bold text The bar separates the main menu from submenus For exam
218. entication ip ospf message digest key key id md5 key Configure OSPF over Different Physical Networks OSPF classifies different media into three types of networks by de fault e Broadcast networks Ethernet Token Ring FDDI e Nonbroadcast multi access networks SMDS Frame Relay X 25 e Point to point networks HDLC PPP Configure your network as either a broadcast or a nonbroadcast multi access network X 25 and Frame Relay provide an optional broadcast capability that can be configured in the map to allow OSPF to run as a broadcast net work August 1997 2524UM Page 8 3 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Configure OSPF for Nonbroadcast Networks Because there might be many routers attached to an OSPF network a designated router is selected for the network It is necessary to use spe cial configuration parameters in the designated router selection if broadcast capability is not configured These parameters need only be configured in those devices that are themselves eligible to become the designated router or backup desig nated router To configure routers that interconnect to nonbroadcast networks type this command in router configuration mode neighbor ip address priority number poll interval seconds You can specify the following neighbor parameters as required e Priority for a neighboring route e Nonbroadcast poll interval e Interface through which the neighbor is reachable Configure OSP
219. er s local IP network and subnet mask and the IP address of the target router s BRI port Router config 3 ip route targetrouter_ipnetwork subnetmask targetBRIport_ipaddress 9 Enter the exit command to exit configuration mode 10 Enter the copy running config startup config command to save the configuration to NVRAM Page 4 RN194 Appendix B Acronyms Acronym Definition AAA Authentication Authorization and Accounting AMI Alternate Mark Inversion ANSI American National Standards Institute APPN Advanced Peer to Peer Networking ARA AppleTalk Remote Access Protocol ARP Address Resolution Protocol ARPA Advanced Research Projects Agency ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode AURP Appletalk Update based Routing Protocol Bc Committed Burst Size Be Excess Burst Size BECN Backward Explicit Congestion Notification BERT Bit Error Rate Tester BFE Blacker Front End BGP Border Gateway Protocol BRI Basic Rate Interface BSC Binary Synchronous Communications BSTUN Block Serial Tunnel CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph amp Telephone CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol Appendix B Acronyms August 1997 2524UM Page B 1 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual CIP Channel Interface Protocol CIR Committed Informa
220. er Installing the Cisco 2524 Router and then power ON the router 2 When you are prompted to enter the initial dialog enter no to go into the normal operating mode of the router Would you like to enter the initial dialog yes no 3 After a few seconds you will see the user EXEC prompt Router Enter the enable command to enter enable mode You can only make configuration changes in enable mode Router gt enable The prompt changes to the privileged EXEC enable prompt Router 4 Enterthe configure terminal command at the enable prompt to enter configuration mode Router configure terminal You can now enter any changes you want to the configuration 5 Press lt Ctrl Z Z gt to exit configuration mode To see the current operating configuration enter the show run ning config command at the enable prompt Router show running config August 1997 Page 16 3 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 6 To see the configuration in NVRAM enterth show startup config command at the enable prompt Router show startup config The results of the show running config and show star tup config commands will be different if you have mad changes to the configuration but have not yet written them to NVRAM 7 To make your changes permanent enter the copy running config startup config command at the enable prompt Router copy running config startup config KKKKKKK The router is now configu
221. er acquires its IP address Depending on the interface connection between the two routers and or access servers the new router s IP address is dynamically resolved by either SLARP re quests or BOOTP or RARP requests The new router resolves its name through network confg cisco net cfg or DNS The new router automatically requests and downloads its configu ration file from a TFTP server If a host name is not resolved the new router attempts to load router confg or ciscortr cfg Acquire the New Router s IP Address The new router newrouter resolves its interface s IP addresses as If newrouter is connected by an HDLC encapsulated serial line to the existing router existing newrouter sends a SLARP request to existing If newrouter is connected by an Ethernet Token Ring or FDDI in terface it broadcasts BOOTP and RARP requests If newrouter is connected by a Frame Relay encapsulated serial interface it first attempts the HDLC automatic installation process and then attempts the BOOTP or RARP process over Ethernet Token Ring or FDDI If both attempts fail the new router at tempts to automatically install over Frame Relay In this case a BOOTP request is sent over the lowest numbered serial or HSSI interface The existing router existing responds in one of these ways depending on the request type In response to a SLARP request existing sends a SLARP reply packet to newrouter The reply packet contains the IP ad
222. er to the router copy tftp running config startup config 2 When prompted enter the server IP address or domain name ip address name 3 If prompted enter the filename of the server system image filename Change the Buffer Size for Loading Configuration Files The buffer that holds the configuration commands is generally the size of NVRAM Complex configurations might need a larger configura tion file buffer size To change the buffer size 1 Enter configuration mode from the terminal configure terminal 2 Change the buffer size to use for booting a host or network config uration file from a network server boot buffersize bytes 3 To exit configuration mode press lt Ctrl Z gt Page 7 8 August 1997 2524UM Pil Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images 4 Save the configuration file to your startup configuration This step saves the configuration to NVRAM copy running config startup config In this example the buffer size is set to 50000 bytes Routerl configure terminal Routerl config boot buffersize 50000 Z Routerl copy running config startup config Verify the Image in Flash Memory Before booting from Flash memory verify that the checksum of the image in Flash memory matches the checksum listed in the README file that was distributed with the system software image The check sum of the image in Flash memory is displayed at the bottom of the screen when you issue th copy tftp fla
223. erge to a new path if one of the paths fails Control Traffic Distribution By default if IGRP or Enhanced IGRP have multiple routes of un equal cost to the same destination the Cisco IOS software will distrib ute traffic among the different routes by giving each route a share o the traffic in inverse proportion to its metric If you want to have faster convergence to alternate routes but you do not want to send traffic across inferior routes in the normal case you might prefer to have no traffic flow along routes with higher metrics To control how traffic is distributed among multiple routes of unequal cost type this command in router configuration mode traffic share balanced min Adjust the IGRP Metric Weights You can alter the default behavior of IGRP routing and metric compu tations Although IGRP metric defaults were carefully selected to pro vide excellent operation in most networks you can adjust the IGRP metric Adjusting IGRP metric weights can dramatically affect net August 1997 2524UM Page 8 13 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit work performance however so ensure that you make all metric ad justments carefully Note Because of the complexity of this task we recommend that you only perform it with guidance from an experienced system designer To adjust the IGRP metric weights type this command in router con figuration mode metric weights tos k1 k2 k3 k4 k5 By default the IGRP co
224. es In global configuration mode disable TID to NSAP address mapping in the TID cache no tarp allow caching Disable TARP PDU Origination and Propagation By default the router originates TARP PDUs and propagates TARP PDUs to its neighbors and the interface propagates TARP PDUs to its neighbor Disabling these capabilities means that the router no longer originates TARP PDUs Also the router and the specific interface no longer propagate TARP PDUs received from other routers e In global configuration mode disable origination of TARP PDUs no tarp originate e In global configuration mode disable global propagation of TARP PDUs no tarp global propagate e Ininterface configuration mode disable propagation of TARP PDUs on a specific interface no tarp propagate Configure Multiple NSAP Addresses A router may have more than one NSAP address When a request for an NSAP is sent Type 1 or Type 2 PDU the first NSAP address is returned To receive all NSAP addresses associated with the router enter a TID to NSAP static route in the TID cache for each NSAP ad dress In global configuration mode create a TID to NSAP static route tarp map tid nsap Configure Static TARP Adjacency and Blacklist Adjacency In addition to all its IS IS ES IS adjacencies a TARP router propa gates PDUs to all its static TARP adjacencies Ifa router is not running TARP the router discards TARP PDUs rather than propagating the PDUs to a
225. es The X 25 software provides commands to support X 25 user facilities options specified by the creators of the X 25 Recommendation that allow you to implement features such as accounting user identifica tion and flow control negotiation You can choose to configure facil ities on a per map basis or on a per interface basis In the following list the x25 map commands configure facilities on a per map basis the x25 facility commands specify the values sent for all encap sulation calls originated by the interface Routed calls are not affected by the facilities specified for the outgoing interface To set the supported X 25 user facilities perform one or more of these tasks in interface configuration mode e Select the closed user group x25 facility cug group number or x25 map protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address cug number e Set flow control parameter negotiation values to request on outgo ing calls x25 facility packetsize in size out size or x25 map protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address packetsize in size out size x25 facility windowsize in size out size or x25 map protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address windowsize in size outsize e Set reverse charging x25 facility reverse or x25 map protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address reverse Pa
226. es tination interface must be specified along with the PVC number on that interface To make a working PVC connection two commands must be specified each pointing to the other interface serial 0 encapsulation x25 X25 lte 5 x25 pvc 1 interface serial 1 pvc 4 I interface serial 1 encapsulation x25 x25 ltc 5 x25 pvc 4 interface serial 0 pvc In global configuration mode ensure that these TCP sessions remain connected in the absence of XOT traffic by enabling keepalives service tcp keepalives in service tcp keepalives out TCP keepalives also inform a router when an XOT SVCs session is not active thus freeing router resources Page 12 34 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps Example Simple Remote PVC Tunneling In this example a connection is established between two PVCs across a LAN Because the connection is remote across the LAN the tun neling command is used This example establishes a PVC between Router X Serial 0 PVC 1 and Router Y Serial 1 PVC 2 Keepalives are enabled to maintain connection notification Figure 12 4 provides a visual representation of the configuration Figure 12 4 X 25 Tunneling Connection P network 172 204 Seral ui ioi Sera wry bal 1 dF Saa Mal 12012 Configuration for Router X service tcp keepalives in service tcp keepalives out interface serial 0 x25 pvc 1 tunnel 172 20 1 2 interface serial 1 pvc
227. es PPP as an encapsulation method It also pro vides the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP and Password Authentication Protocol PAP on serial interfaces running PPP encapsulation By enabling PPP encapsulation on physical inter faces PPP can also be used on calls placed by dialer interfaces that use physical interfaces The current implementation of PPP supports option 3 authentication using CHAP or PAP option 4 Link Quality Monitoring and option 5 Magic Number configuration options The software always sends op tion 5 and negotiates for options 3 and 4 if so configured All other op tions are rejected Magic Number support is available on all serial interfaces PPP always attempts to negotiate for Magic Numbers which are used to detect looped back lines Depending on how th down when looped command is configured the router might shut down a link if it detects a loop The AI2524 supports the following upper layer protocols Bridging CLNS IP and IPX August 1997 2524UM Page 11 1 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit PPP Configuration Task List To configure PPP on a serial interface you must enable PPP encapsu lation You can also complete these tasks these tasks are optional but offer variety of uses and enhancements for PPP on your systems and net works e Enable CHAP or PAP Authentication e Enable Link Quality Monitoring LQM e Configure Automatic Detection of Encapsulation
228. es how to configure two routers for static mode Configuration for Router 1 interface serial 0 ip address 131 108 64 2 255 255 255 0 encapsulation frame relay keepalive 10 frame relay map ip 131 108 64 1 43 Page 13 4 August 1997 2524UM Pil Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps Configuration for Router 2 interface serial 0 ip address 131 108 64 1 255 255 255 0 encapsulation frame relay keepalive 10 frame relay map ip 131 108 64 2 43 IPX Routing Example This example illustrates how to send packets destined for IPX address 200 0000 0c00 7b21 out on DLCI 102 H px routing 000 0c00 7b3b I interfac thernet 0 ipx network 2abc interface serial 0 px network 200 encapsulation frame relay frame relay map ipx 200 0000 0c00 7b21 102 broadcast H onfigure the ocal Management Interface autosense enables the interface to Conf th Local Manag Interface LMD bles th f LMI determine the LMI type supported by the switch and eliminates the need to configure the Local Management Interface LMI explicitly Allow LMI Autosense to Operate LMI autosense is active in these situations e The router is powered up or the interface changes state to up e The line protocol is down but the line is up e The interface is a Frame Relay DTE e The LMI type is not explicitly configured The LMI Autosense Process When LMI autosense is active it sends out a full status request in all 3 LMI options
229. es neen ii a R aa es 9 27 Configure IS IS Interface Parameters 0 0 0 0 ee eseeseeseeeeeeceaeeeeeeseeeseeeaeseaeeaes 9 30 Configure CENS Static Routing cece cesceseceseceseceseeseeeseeeesaeeeaeeeaeecaaecsaecsaeceeeeaeens 9 33 Enable Static Routes enics otis ioet t anoni satin tesa bane een elesied 9 33 Examples Basic Static Routing cs eeeeseceseceseceseceeceseesseeeseeseneeeneeeaeeneenees 9 34 Example Static Intradoma inRouting 0 eee esceeseeseeenseceseceaeceeceeeeeseeeaeenes 9 36 Example Static Interdoma inRouting 0 ee eee esceeseeeseeenseceseceseceeceeeeeseeeaeenes 9 38 Configure Variations of the Static Route 0 ee ceeceseceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeees 9 41 Map NSAP Addresses to Media Addresses cescesceseceseceseeneeceeeceseensaeeees 9 41 Configure Miscellaneous Features ce eeceeseeseeescesseeeseecseeceseceseceaecnseceseeeseeseessaeeaes 9 43 Specify Shortcut NSAP Addresses cc ceccescesecsseceseceeeceseeeeeeseneeeaeeeneeeaeeeees 9 43 Use the IP Domain Name System to Discover ISO CLNS Addresses 9 44 Create Packet Forwarding Filters and Establish Adjacencies cece 9 44 Examples CLNS Filter jis s csc ata aues ee ee GR te Se ee 9 45 Redistribute Routing Information eee eeeeseeseeeneeenseceseceseeeeeeeesseeeaeenes 9 45 Examples Route Mapei oat faust ocd eetbeetates tn E E R 9 48 Specify Preferred Ro t S aiieieo dies irte ieie tae a a A in aa 9 49 Configure ES IS
230. ess matching one or more of the specified names the names can be a standard access list filter set or expression match clns address name name name e Match routes that have a next hop address matching one or more of the specified names the names can be a standard access list fil ter set or expression match clns next hop name name name e Match routes that have been advertised by routers matching one or more of the specified names the names can be a standard access list filter set or expression match clns route source name name name e Match routes that have the next hop out matching one or more o the specified interfaces match clns interface type number type number type number Match routes that have the specified metric match metric metric value e Match routes that have the specified route type match route type level 1 level 2 In route map configuration mode define set actions for redistribu tion of routes from one routing protocol into another by performing at least one of these e Set the routing level of the routes to be advertised into a specified are of the routing domain set level level 1 level 2 level 1 2 August 1997 2524UM Page 9 47 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit e Set the metric value to give the redistributed routes set metric metric value e Set the metric type to give the redistributed routes set metric type internal external
231. ess no outgoing Page 12 28 August 1997 2524UM Configure X 25 Routing Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps The X 25 software implementation allows virtual circuits to be routed from one X 25 interface to another and from one router to another The routing behavior can be controlled with switching and X 25 over TCP XOT configuration commands based on a locally built table X 25 encapsulation can share an X 25 serial interface with the X 25 switching support Switching or forwarding of X 25 virtual circuits can be completed two ways e Incoming calls received from a local serial interface running X 25 can be forwarded to another local serial interface running X 25 This is known as local X 25 switching because the router handles the complete path It does not matter whether the interfaces are configured as DTE or DCE device because the software takes the appropriate actions e An incoming call also can be forwarded to another Cisco router over a LAN using the TCP IP protocols Upon receipt of an in coming call a TCP connection is established to the router that is acting as the switch for the destination All X 25 packets are sent and received over this reliable data stream Flow control is main tained end to end This is known as X 25 over TCP or XOT XOT was previously called remote switching or tunneling It does not matter whether the interfaces are configured as DTE or DCE because the software takes the appropriate
232. estarts the packet service To configure X 25 virtual circuit ranges complete these tasks as ap propriate for your configuration 1 Set the lowest incoming only circuit number default is 0 x25 lic circuit number 2 Set the highest incoming only circuit number default is 0 x25 hic circuit number 3 Set the lowest two way circuit number default is 1 x25 ltc circuit number 4 Set the highest two way circuit number default is1024 for X 25 and 4095 for CMNS x25 htc circuit number 5 Set the lowest outgoing only circuit number default is 0 x25 loc circuit number 6 Set the highest outgoing only circuit number default is 0 x25 hoc circuit number Each of these parameters can range from 1 to 4095 inclusive The val ues for these parameters must be the same on both ends of an X 25 link For connection to a PDN these values must be set to the values assigned by the network Virtual circuit 0 is not available except for marking unused ranges by setting the lower and upper limits to 0 Example Virtual Circuit Ranges This example sets the virtual circuit ranges of 5 to 20 for incoming calls only from the DCE to the DTE and 25 to 1024 for either incom ing or outgoing calls It also specifies no virtual circuits for outgoing calls from the DTE to the DCE Up to 4 permanent virtual circuits can be defined on virtual circuits 1 through 4 Page 12 4 August 1997 2524UM x25 lic 5 x25 hic 20 x2
233. ete this task 5 Enterthe copy running config startup config command Router copy running config startup config Taking this step saves the configuration settings that the AutoInstall process created in the router If you do not do this your configuration will be lost the next time you reload the router Using the System Configuration Dialog If you do not plan to use AutoInstall make sure all the WAN cables are disconnected from the router This will prevent the router from at tempting to the run the AutolInstall process The router will attempt to run AutoInstall whenever you power it on if there isa WAN connec tion on both ends and the router does not have a configuration fil stored in NVRAM It can take several minutes for the router to deter mine that AutoInstall is not set up to a remote TCP IP host If your router does not have a configuration setup file and you are not using AutoInstall the router will automatically start the setup com mand facility An interactive dialog called the System Configuration Dialog appears on the console screen This dialog helps you navigat through the configuration process by prompting you for the configura tion information necessary for the router to operate Many prompts in the System Configuration Dialog include default an swers which are included in square brackets following the question August 1997 Page 16 5 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual rit To accept the defa
234. etec NEE amine a a aae 12 29 Enable X 25 ROUNE neetna teore e at a Se 12 30 Example X 25 Route Address Pattern Matching 0 00 0 cee eeeeeeeeeereeereeeneees 12 30 Configure a Local X 25 Route wo eee cesceseceseceseceseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeecaaesaecneeeaee 12 31 Example X25 ROUN nooi a E aigive ees E E as 12 32 Configure XOT Remote X 25 Rout 0 eccceeseceseceesneceeaeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaes 12 33 Configure a Locally Switched PVC ssseeseseeeesesreerrsressesrreserriesstrresesresseere 12 34 Example PVC Switching on the Same Router eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 12 34 Example Simple Remote PVC Tunneling 0 eee eeceseceseceneceneeeeeeeeeeeaeens 12 35 Configure an XOT Remote PVC ooo eeceeeeeeneeeseeeeceseceseeeseeseeeeeneeaeens 12 35 Example Remote PVC Tunneling eecesceseceseceseceeeeeseeseneeeneeeaeesaeeeees 12 36 Configure Additional X 25 Routing Features 0 cee eeeeeeeeeseeeseeeneeeeecnaeceaecnaeeaeens 12 38 Configure XOT to Use Interface Default Flow Control Values 12 38 August 1997 TOC 7 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Substitute Addresses in a Local X 25 Rout iceeceeceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeees 12 39 Configure XOT Alternate Destinations eee eeeessecseceecesecnaecneeeaeeeeaeens 12 39 Configure CMNS Routine e eronneen iar ain diva tetrad Weta 12 40 Enable CMNS on an Interface cee eesceseceseceseceseceseeseeeeeneeeceseceseeesaeeaeens 12 40 Specify a CMNS Static
235. example depicts switching CMNS over a packet switched PDN Figure 12 6 illustrates the general network topology for a CMNS switching application where calls are being made between resources on opposite sides of a remote link to Host A on an Ethernet and Host B on a Token Ring with a PDN providing the connection Figure 12 6 Example Network Topology for Switching CMNS over a PDN Host A MAC address 0800 4e02 2abe 33 8261 1800 0150 0010 0000 17 Ethemet Router C1 31 SenalX 121 address 2095551 000 Ethemet 0 MAC address 0000 0000 1309 Serax 121 address 4089551234 Token Ring 0 MAC address 0000 0000 69 Host B MAC address 0800 4202 165 38 8261 1700 0150 0029 8431 02 Siua This configuration listing allows resources on either side of the PD to call Host A or Host B This configuration allows traffic intended for the remote NSAP address specified in the x25 map cmns com mands for the serial ports to be switched through the serial interface for which CMNS is configured Configuration for Router C2 This configuration specifies that any traffic from any other interface intended for any NSAP address with NSAP prefix 38 8261 17 will be switched to MAC address 0800 4e02 1f9f through Token Ring 0 Page 12 42 August 1997 2524UM interface token 0 cmns enable x25 map cmns 38 8261 17 interface serial 0 encapsulation x25 x25 address 4085551234 x25 map cmns 38 8261 18 interfac thernet 0 cmns enable
236. ext Sensitive Helps sns rane eigen eae ead ea MU otha hdd ese 4 18 Get Word Helpssiis tatetetgatecviedls iver elt ater Relea ees 4 19 Get Commiand Syntax Help iste eisai ningeseress aes colibicetioss n 4 19 Get Help for Abbreviated Commands 0 eee eeeesceesceeececeaeeeeeeneeeaeecnaeeeaeenes 4 19 FPxamplesicsici iin ditties E de a ese 4 19 Check Command Syntax ccccccccecsceceecessteceeaeceeeeecneeeesaeceeaeeceeeeeenaeeneeeaees 4 21 Command History Features deniona aee a a a a i iais 4 23 Editing FeatUfes onie eE E ATA EAE AAEE AE Gea ATA E dees 4 24 Edit Command Lines that Wra eseesessseesssriesesrrssrrriesrssrrsresresressesrrssesreerses 4 26 Web Browser Interfaccia a aa R e A thc eine ta R 4 27 Web Browser Interface Task List cece esceesceesecnseceseceseceseceseceeesseesseeeaeees 4 27 Enable the Web Browser Interface 00 0 ee eeceeceseceseeeseeeeeeeeneesaeesaeeeaeceaeenes 4 27 Use Compatible Hardware and Software ccccccccessseceseceeeeceeeceenteceeeeeeeseens 4 27 Access Your Router s Home Pag oo eee eeseceeeeeceseeeesaeceeeeeceseeeesaeeseaeeeaee 4 28 Issue Commands Using the Web Browser Interfac oe eee eeseeeseceteceteeeees 4 29 Enter Commands Using Hypertext Links 0 0 0 ceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeneeees 4 29 Enter Commands Using the Command Field 000 0 ee eee eeeeeeeeereeeneeeneeenaeeees 4 30 Enter Commands Using the URL Window 00 eee ceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeaes 4 30 Chapter 5 Using A
237. f leaving Flash memory either in an erased state or with a file that cannot boot In run from Flash systems the software image is stored in and exe cuted from the Flash EPROM rather than from RAM This method re duces memory cost A run from Flash system requires enough Flash EPROM to hold the image and enough main system RAM to hold the routing tables and data structures The system does not need the same amount of main system RAM as arun from RAM system because the full image does not reside in RAM The AI2524 is a Run from Flash system Flash load helper e Confirms access to the specified source file on the specified server before erasing Flash memory and reloading to the ROM image for the actual upgrade e Warns you if the image being downloaded is not appropriate fo the system e Prevents reloads to the ROM image for a Flash upgrade if the sys tem is not set up for automatic booting and if the user is not on the console terminal In the event of a catastrophic failure during the upgrade Flash load helper can bring up the boot ROM image as last resort rather than forcing the system to wait at the ROM mon itor prompt for input from the console terminal e Retries Flash downloads automatically up to six times The retry sequence is First try Immediate retry Retry after 30 seconds Reload ROM image and retry Immediate retry Retry after 30 seconds Page 7 30 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 7 Manually Loading Syst
238. face to a bridge group bridge group bridge group 5 Define the type of spanning tree protocol bridge bridge group protocol ieee dec Note This feature requires use of theencapsulation lapb multi command You cannot use the encapsulation lapb protocol command with a bridge keyword to configure this feature Monitor and Maintain LAPB and X 25 To monitor and maintain X 25 and LAPB perform any of these tasks in EXEC mode Clear all virtual circuits at once everything encapsulation rout ed calls and PAD calls is cleared or clear the single virtual cir cuit specified clear x25 vc type number lcn Display CMNS information show cmns type number Display operation statistics for an interface show interfaces serial number August 1997 2524UM Page 12 53 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit e Display CMNS connections over LLC2 show llc2 e Display the protocol to X 121 address map show x25 map e Display routes assigned by the x25 route command show x25 route e Display details of active virtual circuits show x25 vc lcn Example Transparent Bridging for Multiprotocol LAPB Encapsulation This example configures transparent bridging for multiprotocol LAPB encapsulation no ip routing interface Ethernet 1 no ip address no mop enabled bridge group 1 ij interface serial 0 no ip address encapsulation lapb multi bridge group 1 bridge 1 protocol ieee Example
239. figuration Steps Router Detroit This configuration shows how to configure Router Detroit for dynamic interdomainrouting Comment lines have been eliminated from this example to avoid redundancy router iso igrp B net 47 0006 0200 0004 0102 0104 0506 00 redistribute iso igrp C router iso igrp C net 47 0008 0200 0005 0102 01040 506 00 redistribute iso igrp B interface serial 0 clns router iso igrp B interface serial 1 clns router iso igrp C Chicago injects a prefix route for domain A into domai nB Domai nB injects this prefix route and a prefix route for doma inB into do mainC You also can configure a border router between d o mainA and domai nC Configure ISO IGRP Parameters Cisco s ISO IGRP implementation allows you to customize certain ISO IGRP parameters e Adjust ISO IGRP Metrics e Adjust ISO IGRP Timers e Enable or Disable Split Horizon Adjust ISO IGRP Metrics You have the option of altering the default behavior of ISO IGRP rout ing and metric computations This allows for example the tuning of system behavior to allow for transmissions via satellite Although ISO IGRP metric defaults were carefully selected to provide excellent op eration in most networks you can adjust the metric August 1997 Page 9 17 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Warning Adjusting the ISO IGRP metric can dramatically affect network performance so ensure that all metric adjust ments are made carefu
240. figuration methods Understanding the User Interfac This chapter introduces Cisco IOS softwar interface and includes instructions for ac cessing command modes context sensitiv help and command history and editing fea tures Using Autolnstall This chapter describes how use AutolInstall for automatic and dynamic configuration o the AI2524 Using the System Configuration Dialog This chapter describes how to use the System Configuration Dialog to manually configure the router Manually Loading System Images This chapter describes how to manually load system images in the event that typical start up procedures malfunction August 1997 2524UM Page 1 1 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Chapter 8 AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps This chapter describes how to configure th AI2524 for OSPF TCP IP IGRP TCP IP and RIP TCP IP Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps This chapter describes how to configure th AI2524 for ISO IGRP dynamic routing IS IS dynamic routing and CLNS static routing Chapter 10 Serial Interface Configuration Steps This chapter describes how to configure syn chronous serial interfaces Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps This chapter describes how to enable PPP en capsulation and perform a variety of PPP configuration tasks Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps This chapter describes how to configure th X 25 interface an
241. figuring inter Default client figuring inter Default client figuring inter Default client figuring inter IPX network number IPX network number E IP address IP address IP address IP address IP address IP address A IP address IP address IP address IP address IP address IP address IP address IP address IP address face Async2 IPX network number 5 face Async3 IPX network number 6 face Async 4 IPX network number 7 face Asyncd IPX network number 8 face Async IPX network number 9 face Async7 face Asyncs8 IPX network number B face Async9 IPX network number C face Asyncl0 IPX network number D face Asyncll face Asyncl2 IPX network number F face Asyncl3 IPX network number 10 face Asyncl4 IPX network number 11 face Asyncl5 IPX network number 12 face Asyncl IPX network number 13 ZZ Serial this this this this this this this this this this this this this this this 2 yes interface interface face inter face inter interface interface interface interface interface interface interface interface face inter interface interface Chapter 5 Using AutoInstall none 172 16 72 4 172 16 72 9 172 16 72 6 172 16 72 7 172 16 72 8 172 16 72 9 172 16 72 10
242. for each network protocol The Cisco IOS software provides a user interface called a command interpreter or EXEC that allows you to configure and manage th router or access server The user interface also provides context sensi tive help The command interpreter has several command modes each of which provides a group of related commands that you can use to configure the routing device and display its status Some commands are available to all users others can be executed only after the user en ters an enabling password Context sensitive help gives information about command syntax The command interpreter and its help feature are described in the Understanding the User Interface chapter You use the command interpreter also known as the command line parser to configure interfaces terminal sessions and asynchronous communications lines Interfaces are connections to network media such as Ethernet Token Ring and serial media You configure them to run routing and networking protocols You configure terminal ses sions and modems connected to the router or access server so that other network users can log in to the network over asynchronous lines You can configure and manage the router or access server performing such tasks as naming the device setting the time configuring SNMP and setting security Follow this basic process to set up your access server or router 1 Attach an RS 232 ASCII terminal to the system console port l
243. for instance a loopback interface is specified for the XOT connection s source address TCP can use a pri mary interface or any backup interface to reach the other end of th connection However if a physical interface address is specified as the source address the XOT connection is terminated if that interface goes down In global configuration mode configure an XOT route thus adding it to the X 25 routing table x25 route position x121 address cud pattern ip ip address xot source type number August 1997 Page 12 33 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Configure a Locally Switched PVC You can configure an X 25 PVC in the X 25 switching software As a result DTEs that require permanent circuits can be connected to router acting as an X 25 switch and have a properly functioning con nection X 25 resets will be sent to indicate when the circuit comes up or goes down Both interfaces must define complementary locally switched PVCs To configure a locally switched PVC type in interface configuration mode x25 pvc numberl interface type number pvc number2 option The command options ar packetsize in out and window size in out they allow a PVC s flow control values to be defined if they differ from the interface defaults Example PVC Switching on the Same Router In this example a PVC is connected between two serial interfaces on the same router In this type of interconnection configuration the d
244. formation and services for router man agement applications Management services are matched by their security capabilities Th Cisco IOS software includes a diverse tool kit for partitioning re sources and prohibiting access to sensitive or confidential information and processes Multidimensional filters prevent users from knowing that other users or resources are on the network Encrypted passwords dial in authentication multilevel configuration permissions network data encryption and accounting and logging features provide protec tion from and information about unauthorized access attempts and data eavesdropping attempts Supported Media The AI2524 supports these industry standard networking media e Channelized T1 e Ethernet IEEE 802 3 and Type I e Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDID single and dual mode e High Speed Serial Interface HSSD supports T1 e Synchronous serial V 35 RS 232 RS 449 and RS 530 Supported Network Protocols The Cisco IOS software supports many networking protocols as well as their associated routing protocols These protocols are based on both open standards and proprietary protocols from a variety of ven dors The Cisco IOS software can receive and forward packets concurrently from any of these combinations August 1997 AI2524UM Page 2 5 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit WAN protocols e Frame Relay e High Level Data Link Control HDLC e PPP e X 25a Network pro
245. ge 12 26 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps Allow reverse charging acceptance x25 accept reverse or x25 map protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address accept reverse Select throughput class negotiation x25 facility throughput in out or x25 map protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address throughput in out Select transit delay x25 facility transit delay value or x25 map protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address transit delay milliseconds Set the Recognized Private Operation Agency RPOA to use x25 facility rpoa name or x25 map protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address rpoa name Set the AI2524 standard network user identification x25 map protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address nuid username password Set a user defined network user identification allowing the format to be determined by your network administrator x25 map protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address nudata string The windowsize and packetsize options are supported for PVCs although they have aslightly different meaning because PVCs do not use the call setup procedure If the PVC does not use the inter August 1997 2524UM Page 12 27 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit
246. gend Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR sec 52 227 19 and subparagraph c 1 ii of the Right in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS sec 252 227 7013 Cisco Systems Inc 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose California 95134 1706 Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS tm X000 Softwar IGS J L Version XX X XXXX XXXXX XXX Copyright c 1986 1996 by Cisco Systems Inc Compiled Fri 20 Oct 95 16 02 by XXXXX Image text base 0x03030FCO data base 0x00001000 Cisco 252X 68030 processor revision A with 4092K 2048K bytes of memory Processor board ID 00000000 Bridging software SuperLAT software copyright 1990 by Meridian Technology Corp X 25 software Version X X NET2 BFE and GOSIP compliant TN3270 Emulation software copyright 1994 by TGV Inc Basic Rate ISDN software Version X X 1 Ethernet IEEE 802 3 interface 2 Serial network interfaces 1 ISDN Basic Rate interface Page 6 2 August 1997 2524UM Pil Chapter 6 Using the System Configuration Dialog 32K bytes of non volatile configuration memory 8192K bytes of processor board System flash Read ONLY Notice NVRAM invalid possibly due to write erase System Configuration Dialog At any point you may enter a question mark for help Refer to the Gett
247. git called addresses to be routed through interface serial 0 The incoming DNIC field is moved to the end of the address The fifth sixth ninth and tenth digits are deleted and the thirteenth and fourteenth are moved before the eleventh and twelfth peile f Configure a Local X 25 Route When an incoming call needs to be forwarded two fields in the X 25 routing table are consulted to determine a local X 25 route e Destination X 121 address e X 25 packet s CUD field optional When the destination address and the CUD of the incoming packet fit the X 121 and CUD patterns in the routing table the call is forwarded Forwarding to a specified interface is called local routing or local switching To configure a local X 25 route thus adding the local route to the rout ing table type in global configuration mode x25 route position x121 address cud pattern interface type number August 1997 Page 12 31 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit x25 x25 x25 x25 x25 x25 x25 rout x25 route routing Example X 25 Routing This example shows how to enable X 25 switching as well as how to enter routes into the X 25 routing table Enable X 25 forwarding Enter routes into the table Without a positional parameter entries ar appended to the end of the table route 100 interface serial 0 route 100 cud pad interface serial 2 route 100 interface serial 1 route 3306 interface serial 3 ro
248. gt Use the logout command Privileged From user EXEC mode Router To exit back to user EXEC EXEC type enable requires a mode type disable To enter password global configuration mode use the configure privileged EXEC command ROM monitor From privileged EXEC gt To exit to user EXEC mode mode type reload Press type continue lt Break gt during the first 60 seconds while the system is booting Global configu From privileged EXEC Router config To exit to privileged EXEC mode type exit or end or press lt Ctrl Z gt To enter interface configuration mode enter an interface config uration command Interface config uration From global configuration mode type interface type numbe Router config if To exit to global configuration mode type exit To exit to privileged EXEC mode type exit or press lt Ctrl Z gt To enter subinterface configuration mode specify a subinterface with the interface com mand Subinterface configuration From global configuration mode type interface type number encap sulation frame relay interface type number sub interface nunbe Router config subif To exit to global configuration mode type exit To enter priv ileged EXEC mode type end or press lt Ctrl Z gt Router configu ration From global configuration mode type router key word Router config router To exit to global configuration mode type exit To exit to privileged E
249. guration System Bootstrap Version X X XXXX XXXXX XX RELEASE SOFTWARE Copyright c 1986 1992 by Cisco Systems 2500 processor with 4096 Kbytes of main memory Notice NVRAM invalid possibly due to write erase F3 5797928 162396 258800 at 0x3000060 Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR sec 52 227 19 and subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DEARS 252 227 7013 Cisco Systems Inc 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose California 95134 1706 Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS to X000 Softwar IGS J L Version XX X XXXX XXXXX XXX Copyright c 1986 1996 by Cisco Systems Inc Compiled Fri 20 Oct 95 16 02 by XXXXX Image text base 0x03030FC0O data base 0x00001000 Cisco 252X 68030 processor revision A with 4092K 2048K bytes of memory Processor board ID 00000000 Bridging software SuperLAT software copyright 1990 by Meridian Technology Corp X 25 software Version X X NET2 8FE and GOSIP compliant TN3270 Emulation software copyright 1994 by TGV Inc Basic Rate ISDN software Version X X 1 Ethernet IEEE 802 3 interface 2 Serial network interfaces 1 ISDN Basic Rate interface 32K bytes of non volatile configuration memory 8192K bytes of processor board Syst
250. h is congested The mechanism that allows a Frame Relay switch to identify such packets is the discard eligibility DE bit This feature requires that the Frame Relay network be able to interpret the DE bit Some networks take no action when the DE bit is set Other networks use the DE bit to determine which packets to discard The most desirable interpretation is to use the DE bit to determine which packets should be dropped first and also which packets have lower time sensitivity You can define DE lists that identify the characteristics of packets to be eligible for discarding and you can also specify DE groups to iden tify the DLCI that is affected e In global configuration mode define a DE list specifying which packets can be dropped when the Frame Relay switch is congest ed frame relay de list list number protocol protocol interface type number characteristic You can specify DE lists based on the protocol or the interface and on characteristics such as fragmentation of the packet a specific TCP o User Datagram Protocol UDP port an access list number or a packet size e Ininterface configuration mode define a DE group specifying th DE list and DLCI affected frame relay de group group number dlci Configure DLCI Priority Levels DLCI priority levels allow you to separate different types of traffic and can provide a traffic management tool for congestion problems caused by these situations e Mixing batch and
251. h on de mand and reduces transmission latency across WAN links Multilink PPP is designed to work over single or multiple interfaces that are configured to support both dial on demand rotary groups and PPP encapsulation e Asynchronous serial interfaces e Basic Rate Interfaces BRIs e Primary Rate Interfaces PRIs Configure Multilink PPP on Asynchronous Interfaces Beginning in global configuration mode configure an asynchronous interface to support DDR and PPP encapsulation 1 Specify an asynchronous interface interface async number 2 Specify no IP address for the interface no ip address 3 Enable PPP encapsulation encapsulation ppp 4 Enable DDR on the interface dialer in band 5 Include the interface in a specific dialer rotary group dialer rotary group number Repeat these steps for additional asynchronous interfaces as needed At some point adding more asynchronous interfaces does not improve performance With the default maximum transmission unit MTU size Multilink PPP should support three asynchronous interfaces August 1997 2524UM Page 11 19 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit using V 34 modems However packets might be dropped occasionally if the MTU is small or if large bursts of short frames occur Beginning in global configuration mode configure a dialer interface to support PPP encapsulation and Multilink PPP 1 Define a dialer rotary group interface dialer number
252. he remote router to return a boot image from the host to the router booting over X 25 August 1997 2524UM Page 12 57 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Page 12 58 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps Introduction Frame Relay Hardware Configuration This chapter describes how to perform a variety of frame relay config uration tasks and enable frame relay encapsulation Routers and access servers can connect directly to e The Frame Relay switch e Achannel service unit digital service unit CSU DSU which then connects to a remote Frame Relay switch A Frame Relay network is not required to support only routers that are connected directly or only routers connected via CSU DSUs Within network some routers can connect to a Frame Relay switch through direct connection and others through connections via CSU DSUs However a single router interface configured for Frame Relay can be only one or the other The CSU DSU converts V 35 or RS 449 signals to the properly coded T1 transmission signal for successful reception by the Frame Relay network Figure 13 1 illustrates the connections between the different components Figure 13 1 Typical Frame Relay Configuration Public Frame Relay network August 1997 2524UM Page 13 1 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Frame Relay Configuration Task List Enable
253. he sys tem that sent it If the next hello packet is not received within the in terval specified the adjacency times out and the adjacent node is considered unreachable A default rate has been set for hello packets and packet validity but it can be changed In global configuration mode change the defaults e Specify the rate at which ES hello and IS hello packets are sent clns configuration time seconds e Allow the sender of an ES hello or IS hello packet to specify the length of time you consider the information in these packets to be valid clns holding time seconds A default rate has been set for the ES Configuration Timer ESCT op tion but it can be changed In interface configuration mode specify how often the end system should transmit ES hello packet PDUs clns esct time seconds Page 9 50 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps Configure CLNS This section provides general information about running ISO CLNS over WANS over WANS You can use CLNS routing on serial interfaces with HDLC PPP LAPB X 25 Frame Relay DDR or SMDS encapsulation To use HDLC encapsulation you must have a router at both ends of the link If you use X 25 encapsulation and if IS IS or ISO IGRP is not used on an interface you must manually enter the NSAP to X 121 address mapping The LAPB SMDS Frame Relay and X 25 encapsulations interoperate with other vendors Both ISO IGRP and IS IS can b
254. if your router or access server is connected to another vendor s equipment across a Frame Relay network IETF encapsulation is supported either at the interface level or on a per vir tual circuit basis Page 13 2 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps Examples IETF Encapsulation The first example sets IETF encapsulation at the interface level The second example sets IETF encapsulation on a per DLCI basis In the first example the keyword ietf sets the default encapsulation method for all maps to IETF encapsulation frame relay IETF frame relay map ip 131 108 123 2 48 broadcast frame relay map ip 131 108 123 3 49 broadcast In this example IETF encapsulation is configured on a per DLCI ba sis This configuration has the same result as the configuration in th first example encapsulation frame relay frame relay map ip 131 108 123 2 48 broadcast ietf frame relay map ip 131 108 123 3 49 broadcast ietf Configure Dynamic or Static Address Mapping Dynamic address mapping uses Frame Relay Inverse ARP to request the next hop protocol address for a specific connection given its known DLCI Inverse ARP is enabled by default for all protocols it supports but can be disabled for specific protocol DLCI pairs As a re sult you can use dynamic mapping for some protocols and static map ping for other protocols on the same DLCI Configure Dynamic Mapping Inverse ARP is enabled by default for
255. ify that it does not have an individual protocol address no ip address Enable PPP encapsulation encapsulation ppp Set the dialer idle timeout period using the same timeout for each of the BRI interfaces you configure dialer idle timeout seconds Add the interface to the rotary group dialer rotary group group number August 1997 2524UM Page 11 23 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Cit 6 Specify the dialer load threshold for bringing up additional WAN links dialer load threshold load Repeat Steps 1 through 6 for each BRI you want to belong to the same dialer rotary group When Multilink PPP is configured and you want a multilink bundle to be connected indefinitely use the dialer idle timeout com mand to set a very high idle timer The dialer load threshold 1 command does not keep a mul tilink bundle of n links connected indefinitely and the dialer load threshold 2 command does not keep a multilink bundle of two links connected indefinitely Page 11 24 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps Example Multilink PPP on Multiple ISDN Interfaces This example configures multiple ISDN BRIs to belong to the same di aler rotary group for Multilink PPP Th dialer rotary group command is used to assign each of the ISDN BRIs to that dialer rotary group interface BRIO no ip address encapsulation ppp dialer idle timeout 500 dialer rotary group 0 dialer load thre
256. iguration Dialog Introduction System Configuration Dialog This chapter describes the System Configuration Dialog process using a sample configuration The System Configuration Dialog can be manually used to configure the router instead of using AutolInstall If you do not plan to use AutoInstall refer to the Using AutolInstall chapter make sure all the WAN cables are disconnected from the router This will prevent the router from attempting to the run the Au toInstall process The router will attempt to run AutoInstall whenever you power it on if there is a WAN connection on both ends and the router does not have a configuration file stored in NVRAM It can take several minutes for the router to determine that AutoInstall is not set up to aremote TCP IP host If your router does not have a configuration setup file and you are not using AutoInstall the router will automatically start the setup com mand facility An interactive dialog called the System Configuration Dialog appears on the console screen This dialog helps you navigat through the configuration process by prompting you for the configura tion information necessary for the router to operate Many prompts in the System Configuration Dialog include default re sponses which are included in square brackets following the question To accept a default answer press lt Enter gt Otherwise type your re sponse This section gives an example configuration using the Syst
257. iguration commands access expression apollo appletalk arp backup bandwidth bridge group clns clockrate custom queue list decnet delay description dialer dialer group down when looped encapsulation ethernet transit oui exit frame relay hdh help hold queue ip ipx isis iso igrp keepalive lapb llc2 lnm locaddr priority loopback mac address mop mtu netbios no ntp ppp priority group pulse time pup sdlc sdllc shutdown smds source bridge stun transmit interface Build a bridge boolean access Apollo interface subcommands Appletalk interface subcommands Set arp type arpa probe snap or timeout Modify dial backup parameters Set bandwidth informational parameter Transparent bridging interface parameters CLNS interface subcommands Configure serial interface clock speed Assign a custom queue list to an interface Interface DECnet config commands Specify interface throughput delay Interface specific description Dial on demand routing DDR commands Assign interface to dialer list Force looped serial interface down Set encapsulation type for an interface Token ring to Ethernet OUI handling Exit from interface configuration mode Set frame relay parameters Set HDH mode Description of the interactive help system Set hold queue depth Interface Internet Protocol config commands Novell interface subcommands IS IS commands ISO IGRP interface subcommands
258. ile EERE EEEE S 12 14 Example Point to Point Subinterface Configuration cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 16 Map Protocol Addresses to X 121 Addresses 00 0 0 ceccesceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneens 12 16 Map Datagram Addresses to X 25 HoSts cscescessceesseceseceseceeceseceseeeseeeaeens 12 18 Establish an Encapsulation PVC ce ceeceeceseeeseeseeeeeeeesaeecececeeeeeeecneeeaee 12 20 Example PVC Used to Exchange IP Traffic ce eeeeseesecesecneecrseenseeeseees 12 21 Set X 25 TCP IP Header Compression csssesccsseceseceseceneceeeesseeeeeeeaeeues 12 22 Contisure X 25 Bridging ie eai t tose acho deaauk AE A EE S 12 22 Configure Additional X 25 Datagram Transport Features cs eseeesseceseceteceneeees 12 23 Configure X 25 Payload Compression c cesccseseeeseeeseeeneeeseeenaeeeaeceaeeaeens 12 23 Configure the Encapsulation Virtual Circuit Idle Time 0 0 eee eneeee 12 24 Increase the Number of Virtual Circuits Allowed ou eee eeceeeseceteceteceeseees 12 25 Configure the Ignore Destination Time 0 ec eeeeceesecseceeceeceeceseeeseeeaeens 12 25 Establish the Packet Acknowledgment POlicy eeceeeessecsseceteceteceteeeeeeeeees 12 25 Configure X 25 User Facilities 0 0 0 cei cescescesecesceseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeecaesaecneseaee 12 26 Define the Virtual Circuit Packet Hold Queue Size eccccccecteseesteeeeeenees 12 28 Restiict Map Usage ve ccna die cnet a ied eens diester E E EE teenies 12 28 Configure X 2I ROVN S ireo i E W
259. im sparse mode frame relay interface dlci 20 August 1997 2524UM Page 13 25 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Configuration for Router B frame relay switching interface token ring 0 ip address 131 108 178 1 255 255 255 0 interface serial 0 no ip address encapsulation frame relay I bandwidth 384 clockrate 4000000 frame relay intf type dce I ETF interface serial 0 2 point to point ip unnumbered TokenRing1 ip pim sparse mode bandwidth 384 frame relay interface dlci 20 Point to Multipoint Interfaces In interface configuration mode configure transparent bridging for point to multipoint subinterfaces 1 Specify a serial interface interface serial number Configure Frame Relay encapsulation on the serial interface encapsulation frame relay Specify a subinterface interface serial number subinterface number multipoint Define the mapping between a next hop protocol address and the DLCI used to connect to the address frame relay map bridge dlci broadcast ietf Associate the subinterface with a bridge group bridge group bridge group Page 13 26 August 1997 2524UM interface serial 0 Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps Example Transparent Bridging Using Subinterfaces In this example Frame Relay DLCIs 42 64 and 73 are to be used as separate point to point links with transparent bridging running over them The bridging spanning
260. ine using the FT1 T1 CSU DSU mod ule type this in interface configuration mode service module t1 framing sf esf Note Choose either D4 Super Frame sf or Extended Super Frame esf In most cases the service provider determines which framing type ei ther esf or sf is required for your circuit Specify the CSU Line Build Out To decrease the outgoing signal strength to an optimum value for the telecommunication carrier network type this in interface configura tion mode service module t1 lbo 15 db 7 5 db This command decreases the outgoing signal strength in decibels Page 14 2 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 14 T1 Interface Configuration Steps To transmit packets without decreasing outgoing signal strength typ this in interface configuration mode service module t1 lbo none The ideal signal strength should be between 15 dB and 22 dB which is calculated by adding the phone company loss cable length loss and line build out You may use this command in back to back configurations but it is not needed on most actual T1 lines Specify FT1 T1 Line Code Type To configure the line code for the FT1 T1 CSU DSU module type this in interface configuration mode service module t1 linecode ami b8zs Choose alternate mark inversion AMI or binary 8 zero substitution B8ZS Configuring B8ZS is a method of ensuring the T1s density require ment on a T1 line by substituting intentional bipolar viol
261. ing An interface that is configured for static routing cannot reroute around failed links Routing Decisions A CLNP packet sent to any of the defined NSAP addresses or NETs will be received by the router The Cisco IOS software uses this algo rithm to select which NET to use when it sends a packet e Ifnodynamic routing protocol is running use the NET defined for the outgoing interface if it exists otherwise use the NET defined for the router e If ISO IGRP is running use the NET of the ISO IGRP routing pro cess that is running on the interface e If IS IS is running use the NET of the IS IS routing process that is running on the interface August 1997 2524UM Page 9 9 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Configure ISO IGRP Dynamic Routing The ISO IGRP is a dynamic distance vector routing protocol designed by Cisco for routing an autonomous system that contains large arbi trarily complex networks with diverse bandwidth and delay character istics To configure ISO IGRP complete the tasks outlined in these sections Only enabling ISO IGRP is required the remaining task is optional al though you might be required to perform it depending upon your spe cific application e Enable ISO IGRP e Configure ISO IGRP Parameters In addition you can also configure these miscellaneous features e Filter routing information refer to Create Packet Forwarding Fil ters and Establish Adjacencies e Re
262. ing Started Guide for additional help Use ctrl c to abort configuration dialog at any prompt Default settings are in square brackets Would you like to enter the initial configuration dialog yes 3 Press lt Enter gt or type yes to begin the configuration process 4 When the System Configuration Dialog asks whether you want to view the current interface summary press lt Enter gt or type yes First would you like to s the current interface summary yes Any interface listed with OK value NO does not have a valid configuration Interface IP Address OK Method Status Protocol Ethernet0 unassigned NO not set up down BRIO unassigned NO not set up up Serialo unassigned NO not set down down Seriall unassigned NO not set down down 5 Configure the global parameters Choose which protocols to sup port on the Ethernet interface For IP installations you can press lt Enter gt to accept the default values in brackets for most of the questions A typical configuration is Configuring global parameters Enter host name Router Next you are prompted to enter an enable secret password There are two types of privileged level passwords e Enable secret password a very secure encrypted password e Enable password a less secure nonencrypted password The enable password is used when the enable secret password does not exist For maximum security be sure the passwords are different If you enter th
263. ing th Cisco IOS software to send out only L evel2 routing updates on certain interfaces Level information is not passed on the interfaces for which the Level 2 option is set In interface configuration mode enable ISO IGRP on specified inter faces and set the level type for routing updates clns router iso igrp tag level 2 Example Dynamic Routing within the Same Area Figure 9 5 and the example configuration illustrate how to configure dynamic routing within a routing domain The router can exist in on or more areas within the domain The router named Router A exists in a single area Figure 9 5 CLNS Dynamic Routing within a Single Area Domain 47 0004 004d Area 0002 1 Define a tag castor for the routing process August 1997 2524UM Page 9 11 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 2 Configure the net for the process in area2 doma in47 0004 004d net 47 0004 004d 0002 0000 0C00 0506 00 3 Specify iso igrp routing using the previously specified tag castor interfac thernet 0 clns router iso igrp castor 4 Specify iso igrp routing using the previously specified tag castor interfac thernet 1 clns router iso igrp castor 5 Specify iso igrp routing using the previously specified tag castor interface serial 0 clns router iso igrp castor Example Dynamic Routing in More Than One Area Figure 9 6 and the example configuration illustrate how to configure router named Router A that ex
264. int to point subinterfaces can be unnumbered for us with IP reducing the addressing burden that might otherwise result For example suppose you have a 5 node Frame Relay network see Figure 13 2 that is partially meshed Network A If the entire net work is viewed as a single subnetwork with a single network number assigned most protocols assume that node A can transmit a packet di rectly to node E when in fact it must be relayed through nodes C and D This network can be made to work with certain protocols for ex ample IP but will not work at all with other protocols because nodes C and D will not relay the packet out the same interface on which it was received One way to make this network function fully is to creat a fully meshed network Network B but doing so requires a larg number of PVCs which may not be economically feasible Using subinterfaces you can subdivide the Frame Relay network into three smaller subnetworks Network C with separate network num bers Nodes A B and C are connected to a fully meshed network and nodes C and D as well as nodes D and E are connected via point to point networks In this configuration nodes C and D can access two subinterfaces and can therefore forward packets without violating split horizon rules If transparent bridging is being used each subinterfac is viewed as a separate bridge port August 1997 2524UM Page 13 19 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Figure 13
265. interfaces Dynamic address mapping uses Frame Relay Inverse ARP to request the next hop protocol address for a specific connection given a DLCI Responses to Inverse ARP requests are entered in an address to DLC mapping table on the router or access server the table is then used to supply the next hop protocol address or the DLCI for outgoing traffic Since the physical interface is now configured as multiple subinter faces you must provide information that distinguishes a subinterface from the physical interface and associates a specific subinterface with a specific DLCI In interface configuration mode associate a specific multipoint sub interface with a specific DLCI frame relay interface dlci dlci Inverse ARP is enabled by default for all protocols it supports but can be disabled for specific protocol DLCI pairs As a result you can use dynamic mapping for some protocols and static mapping for other pro tocols on the same DLCI You can explicitly disable Inverse ARP for a protocol DLCI pair if you know the protocol is not supported on th other end of the connection Because Inverse ARP is enabled by default for all protocols that it sup ports no additional command is required to configure dynamic ad dress mapping on a subinterface Example Frame Relay Multipoint Subinterface with Dynamic Addressing This example configures two multipoint subinterfaces for dynamic ad dress resolution Each subinterface is provided wi
266. ire and 4 wire 56 64 kbps CSU DSU modules use V 25 bis dial commands to interface with the router Therefore the interfac must be configured using the dialer in band command DTR dial is not supported Warning Any loopbacks in progress are terminated when switching between modes August 1997 2524UM Page 15 3 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Enable Acceptance of a Remote Loopback Request Select a Service Provider In interface configuration mode enable the acceptance of a remot loopback request on a 2 or 4 wire 56 64 kbps CSU DSU module service module 56k remote loopback Theno service module 56k remote loopback command prevents the local CSU DSU from being placed into loopback by re mote devices on the line Unlike the T1 module the 2 or 4 wire 56 64 kbps CSU DSU module can still initiate remote loopbacks with the no form of this command In interface configuration mode select a service provider to use with a 2 or 4 wire 56 64 kbps dial up line service module 56k switched carrier att other sprint The att keyword specifies AT amp T or another digital network service provider as the line carrier which is the default for the 4 wire 56 64 kbps CSU DSU module Th sprint keyword specifies Sprint or an other service provider whose network carries mixed voice and data as the line carrier which is the default for the 2 wire switched 56 kbps CSU DSU module In a Sprint network echo canceler tone
267. ists in two areas Figure 9 6 CLNS Dynamic Routing within Two Areas Domain 47 0004 004d Page 9 12 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps 1 Define a tag orion for the routing process router iso igrp orion 2 Configure the net for the process in area 1 doma in47 0004 004d net 47 0004 004d 0001 212223242526 00 3 Specify iso igrp routing using the previously specified tag orion interface ethernet 0 clns router iso igrp orion 4 Specify iso igrp routing using the previously specified tag orion interfac thernet 1 clns router iso igrp orion Example Dynamic Routing in Overlapping Areas This example illustrates how to configure a router with overlapping ar eas 1 Define a tag capricorn for the routing process router iso igrp capricorn 2 Configure the NET for the process in area 3 domai n47 0004 004d net 47 0004 004d 0003 0000 0C00 0508 00 3 Define a tag cancer for the routing process router iso igrp cancer August 1997 Page 9 13 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 4 Configure the NET for the process in area 4 domai n47 0004 004d net 47 0004 004d 0004 0000 0C00 0506 00 5 Specify iso igrp routing on interface ethernet 0 using the tag cap ricorn interfac thernet 0 clns router iso igrp capricorn 6 Specify iso igrp routing on interface ethernet 1 using the tags cap ricorn and cancer interfac thernet 1 clns router iso ig
268. iving a remote alarm yel low alarm by issuing the show service module command To disable remote alarms type this in interface configuration mode no service module tl remote alarm enable Enable Loopcodes that Initiate Remote Loopbacks To configure the remote loopback code used to transmit or accept CSU loopback requests and type this in interface configuration mode service module t1 remote loopback full To configure the loopback code used by the local CSU DSU to gener ate or detect payload loopback commands type this in interface configuration mode service module t1 remote loopback payload alternate v54 Note By entering the service module t1 remote loopback command without specifying any keywords you enable the standard loopup codes which use a 1 in 5 pattern for loopup and a 1 in 3 pattern for loopdown You can simultaneously configure the full and payload loopback points However only one loopback payload code can be configured at a time For example if you configure the service module t1 remote loopback payload alternate command a pay load v 54 request which is the industry standard and default cannot b transmitted or accepted Full and payload loopbacks with standard loopup codes are enabled by default The no form of this command disables loopback requests For exam ple the no service module t1 remote loopback full command ignores all full bandwidth loopback transmissions and re quests Configu
269. l e Enable Static Routes e Configure Variations of the Static Route e Map NSAP Addresses to Media Addresses Enable Static Routes To configure static routing you must enable CLNS on the router and on the interface CLNS routing is enabled on the router by default when you configure ISO IGRP or IS IS routing protocols NSAP ad dresses that start with the NSAP prefix you specify are forwarded to the next hop node In global configuration mode configure CLNS on the router 1 Configure CLNS clns routing 2 Assign an NSAP address to the router if the router has not been configured to route CLNS packets dynamically using ISO IGRP or IS IS clns net net address name 3 Enter a specific static route clns route nsap prefix next hop net name August 1997 2524UM Page 9 33 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Warning If you have not configured the router to route CLNS pack ets dynamically using ISO IGRP or IS IS you must as sign an address to the router You also must enable ISO CLNS for each interface you want to pass ISO CLNS packet traffic to end systems but for which you do not want to perform any dynamic routing on the interface This is done au tomatically when you configure IS IS or ISO IGRP routing on an in terface however if you do not intend to perform any dynamic routing on an interface you must manually enable CLNS You can assign an NSAP address for a specific interface This allo
270. l setting correct default flow control parameters for window size and packet size is es sential Mismatched default flow control values will cause X 25 local procedure errors evidenced by Clear and Reset events To configure flow control parameters complete these tasks Thes tasks are optional if your X 25 attachment uses the standard default values for maximum packet sizes 128 bytes incoming and outgoing and window sizes 2 packets incoming and outgoing e Set Default Window Sizes e Set Default Packet Sizes Note Because the X 25 protocol requires the DTE and DCE to have identical default maximum packet sizes and default window sizes changes made to the window and packet sizes when the interface is up are held until the X 25 pro tocol restarts the packet service Set Default Window Sizes X 25 networks have a default input and output window size the preset value is 2 that is defined by your network administrator You must set the Cisco IOS software default input and output window sizes to match those of the network These defaults are the values that an SVC uses if itis set up without explicitly negotiating its window sizes PVCs also use these default values unless different values are configured In interface configuration mode set the default window sizes 1 Set the default virtual circuit receive window size x25 win packets 2 Set the default virtual circuit transmit window size x25 wout packets Set Defa
271. led for the first map with DLCI 177 which inherited its header compression characteristics from the interface However header compression is not disabled for the second map DLCI 178 which is explicitly configured for header compression Example Disabling Explicit TCP IP Header Compression In this second example the initial configuration is the same as the pre vious example but you enter these commands serial interface 1 no frame relay ip tcp header compression frame relay map ip 131 108 177 178 178 nocompress Use the show frame relay map command display the resulting compression and encapsulation characteristics Router gt show frame relay map Serial 1 administratively down ip 131 108 177 177 177 dlei 177 0xB1 0x2C10 static broadcast CISCO Serial 1 administratively down ip 131 108 177 178 178 dici 178 0xB2 0x2C20 static broadcast ISCO The result of the commands is to disable header compression for th first map with DLCI 177 which inherited its header compression characteristics from the interface and also explicitly to disable header compression for the second map with DLCI 178 which was explic itly configured for header compression Page 13 44 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps Configure Discard Eligibility You can specify which Frame Relay packets have low priority or low time sensitivity and will be the first to be dropped when a Frame Relay switc
272. left arrow key Move the cursor forward one charac Press lt Ctrl F gt or press the ter right arrow key Move the cursor to the beginning of Press lt Ctrl A gt the command line Move the cursor to the end of th Press lt Ctrl E gt command line Move the cursor back one word Press lt Esc B gt Move the cursor forward one word Press lt Esc F gt Prompt the system to complete a par Press lt Tab gt or lt Ctrl I gt tial entry Obtain a list of commands that begin with that set of characters Recall the most recent entry in the Press lt Ctrl Y gt buffer Page 4 24 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 4 Understanding the User Interface Editing Commands Contd Command Format Recall the next buffer entry The buffer contains only the last 10 items you have deleted or cut If you press lt Esc Y gt more than 10 times you will cycle back to the first buffer entry Press lt Esc Y gt Erase the character to the left of the cursor Press lt Delete gt or lt Back space gt Delete the character at the cursor Press lt Ctrl D gt Delete all characters from the cursor to the end of the command line Press lt Ctrl K gt Delete all characters from the cursor to the beginning of the command line Press lt Ctrl U gt or lt Ctrl X gt Delete the word to the left of the cur sor Press lt Ctrl W gt Scroll down one line Press lt Enter gt Scroll down one screen
273. ling mechanism used on router interfaces by completing these actions e Define the Global Default Mechanism e Configure Per Interface IP Address Assignment Define the Global Default Mechanism The Global Default Mechanism applies to all point to point interfaces asynchronous synchronous ISDN BRI ISDN PRI and dialer inter faces that support PPP encapsulation and that have not otherwise been configured for IP address pooling You can define the Global Default Mechanism to be either DHCP or local address pooling To configure the global default mechanism for IP address pooling per form one of these tasks e Define DHCP as the Global Default Mechanism e Define Local Address Pooling as the Global Default Mechanism After you have defined a global default mechanism you can disable it on a specific interface by configuring the interface for some other pooling mechanism You can define a local pool other than the default pool for the interface or you can configure the interface with a specifi IP address to be used for dial in peers Page 11 10 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps Define DHCP as the Global Default Mechanism The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP specifies these components e A DHCP server A host based DHCP server configured to accept and process requests for temporary IP addresses e A DHCP proxy client An access server configured to arbitrate DHCP calls bet
274. list enable end exit frame relay help hostname interface ip ipx line lnm locaddr priority list logging login string mop netbios no ntp priority list queue list rif route map router scheduler interval service smt queue threshold snmp server source bridge stun tacacs server tftp server End with CNTZL Z Add an access list entry Apollo global configuration commands Appletalk global configuration commands Set a static ARP entry odify system bootp parameters Specify local AS number to which we belong Define a login banner odify system boot parameters Transparent bridging Adjust system buffer pool parameters Display message when connection to host fails Define a modem chat script Global CLNS configuration subcommands Configure time of day clock Global DECnet configuration subcommands Default character bits values Create a dialer list entry odify enable password parameters Exit from configure mode Exit from configure mode Global frame relay configuration commands Description of the interactive help system Set system s network name Select an interface to configure Global IP configuration subcommands Novell IPX global configuration commands Configure a terminal lin IBM Lan Manager Establish queueing priorities based on LU address odify message logging facilities Define a host specific login string The DEC MOP Server NETBIOS access control filtering Negate a command
275. ll its adjacencies To allow TARP to bypass routers enroute August 1997 2524UM Page 9 61 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit that may not have TARP running TARP provides a static TARP adja cency capability Static adjacencies are maintained in a special queue In global configuration mode create a static TARP adjacency tarp route static nsap To stop TARP from propagating PDUs to an IS IS ES IS adjacency that may not have TARP running TARP provides a blacklist adja cency capability The router will not propagate TARP PDUs to black listed routers In global configuration mode bypass a router not running TARP tarp blacklist adjacency nsap Determine TIDs and NSAPs In EXEC mode determine an NSAP address for a TID or a TID for an NSAP address 1 Get the TID associated with a specific NSAP tarp query nsap 2 Get the NSAP associated with a specific TID tarp resolve tid 1 2 To determine the TID the router first checks the local TID cache I there is a TID entry in the local TID cache the requested information is displayed If there is no TID entry in the local TID cache a TARP Type 5 PDU is sent out to the specified NSAP address To determine the NSAP address the router first checks the local TID cache If there is an NSAP entry in the local TID cache the requested information is displayed If there is no NSAP entry in the local TID cache a TARP Type 1 or Type 2 PDU is sent out By default a Typ
276. llustrates specifying a single NET router isis Pieinthesky net 47 0004 004d 0001 0000 0c11 1111 00 This example illustrates using a name for a NET clns host NAME 39 0001 0000 0c00 1111 00 router isis net NAME IS IS Multihoming This example illustrates the assignment of three separate area ad dresses for a single router using net commands Traffic received that includes an area address of 47 0004 004d 0001 47 0004 004d 0002 or 47 0004 004d 0003 and that has the same system ID is forwarded to this router router isis eng areal IS IS Area System ID S net 47 0004 004d 0001 0000 0C00 1111 00 net 47 0004 004d 0002 0000 0C00 1111 00 net 47 0004 004d 0003 0000 0C00 1111 00 Example Router in Two Areas These two examples show how to configure a router in two areas The first example configures ISO IGRP the second configures IS IS August 1997 Page 9 25 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit ISO IGRP In this example the router is in domai n49 0001 and has a system ID of aaaa aaaa aaaa The router is in two areas 31 and 40 decimal Fig ure 9 8 illustrates this configuration Figure 9 8 ISO IGRP Configuration Test proc 1 514005 Test proc 2 router iso igrp test procl OO1F in this example net is the hex value for area 31 net 49 0001 001F aaaa aaaa aaaa 00 router iso igrp test proc2 0028 in this example net is the hex value for area 40 net 49 0001 0028 aaaa aaaa a
277. lly Because of the complexity of this task it is not recommended unless it is done with guidance from an experienced system designer You can use different metrics for the ISO IGRP routing protocol on CLNS In router configuration mode configure the metric constants used in the ISO IGRP composite metric calculation of reliability and load metric weights qos k1 k2 k3 k4 k5 Two additional ISO IGRP metrics can be configured the bandwidth and delay associated with an interface Warning Using the bandwidth and delay commands to change the values of the ISO IGRP metrics also changes the val ues of IP IGRP metrics Adjust ISO IGRP Timers The basic timing parameters for ISO IGRP are adjustable Because the ISO IGRP routing protocol executes a distributed asynchronous rout ing algorithm it is important that these timers be the same for all rout ers in the network In router configuration mode adjust ISO IGRP timing parameters timers basic update interval holddown interval invalidinterval Enable or Disable Split Horizon Split horizon blocks information about routes from being advertised out the interface from which that information originated This feature usually optimizes communication among multiple routers particularly when links are broken In interface configuration mode either enable or disable split horizon for ISO IGRP updates e Enable split horizon for ISO IGRP updates clns split horizon Page 9
278. loopback interface perform thes tasks starting in global configuration mode 1 Create a loopback interface which places you in interface config uration mode interface loopback 0 2 Assign an IP address to this interface ip address address mask Disable Default OSPF Metric Calculation Based on Bandwidth OSPF calculates the OSPF metric for an interface according to the bandwidth of the interface To disable this feature type this command in router configuration mode no ospf auto cost determination Configure OSPF on Simplex Ethernet Interfaces Because simplex interfaces between two devices on an Ethernet repre sent only one network segment for OSPF you must configure the transmitting interface to be a passive interface This prevents OSPF from sending hello packets for the transmitting interface Both devices are able to see each other via the hello packet generated for the receiv ing interface To configure OSPF on simplex Ethernet interfaces type this command in router configuration mode passive interface type number Page 8 8 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 8 AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps Configure Route Calculation Timers You can configure the delay time between when OSPF receives a to pology change and when it starts a Shortest Path First SPF calcula tion You can also configure the hold time between two consecutive SPF calculations Type this command in router configuration mode timers s
279. loops Warning The clns want erpdu global configuration command has no effect on routing packets ES IS ISO IGRP and ISIS originated by the router it applies to pings and trac eroute packets Example Performance Parameters This example shows how to set ES hello packet and IS hello packet pa rameters in a simple ISO IGRP configuration as well as the MTU for a serial interface router iso igrp xavier net 49 0001 004d 0002 0000 0C00 0506 00 1 Send IS ES hellos every 45 seconds clns configuration time 45 2 Recipients of the hello packets keep information in the hellos for 2 minutes clns holding time 120 3 Specify an mtu of 978 bytes generally do not alter the default mtu value interface serial 2 clns mtu 978 Page 9 56 August 1997 2524UM Monitor and Maintain the ISO CLNS Network Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps Use these EXEC commands to monitor and maintain the ISO CLNS caches tables and databases Clear and reinitialize the CLNS routing cache clear clns cache Remove ES neighbor information from the adjacency database clear clns es neighbors Remove IS neighbor information from the adjacency database clear clns is neighbors Remove CLNS neighbor information from the adjacency data base clear clns neighbors Remove dynamically derived CLNS routing information clear clns route Invoke a diagnostic tool for testing connectivity ping clns host address
280. ly and that Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP traffic is sent only when there is no other traffic to send Pri ority queuing in this example can starve the non Telnet traffic custom queuing can be used instead to ensure that some traffic of all categories is sent Both priority queuing and custom queuing can be defined but only one method can be assigned to a given interface To configure priority and custom queuing for LAPB perform thes tasks 1 Perform the standard priority and custom queuing tasks except the task of assigning a priority or custom group to the interface 2 Perform the standard LAPB encapsulation tasks as specified in the Configure a LAPB Datagram Transport section of this chapter 3 Assign either a priority group or a custom queue to the interface Page 12 52 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps Note The lapb hold queue command is no longer supported but the same functionality is provided by the hold queue size out standard queue control command Configure Transparent Bridging over Multiprotocol LAPB To configure transparent bridging over multiprotocol LAPB perform these tasks beginning in global configuration mode 1 Specify the serial interface and enter interface configuration mode interface serial number 2 Assign no IP address to the interface no ip address 3 Configure multiprotocol LAPB encapsulation encapsulation lapb multi 4 Assign the inter
281. mber associated with the username Page 3 AI2524 Router Card Version 1 00 Release Notes August 1997 5 Some ISDN switch types such as Basic NI1 or DMS 100 switch service require you to configure a service profile identifie SPID Enter the SPID information substituting the appropriat entries for your installation Router config if isdn spidl SPID_no phone_number Router config if isdn spid2 SPID_no phone_number 6 To set up a second B channel for bandwidth on demand enter the load threshold command to set the ISDN load threshold The load threshold determines the percentage of network loading at which the second ISDN B channel is triggered The value ranges from 1 to 255 100 percent Router config if 3 dialer load threshold 128 In this example the value of 128 means that when the first B chan nel reaches 50 percent of its bandwidth capacity 128 equals 50 percent of 255 the second B channel will be activated to assist with the bandwidth load 7 Enter the access list command to configure the ISDN line to come up whenever IP packets are to be sent Router config if access list access list number permit ip sourcerouter ipnetwork sourcerouter subnetmask targetrouter ipnetwork targetrouter subnetmask Router config dialer list groupnumber list access list number 8 Configure a static route to allow connectivity to the target router s local network Enter the network number of the target rout
282. me Gateway This example provides configurations for one NAS and one Gateway that might have two parallel tunnels between them Two different do main names are associated with two different virtual interface config urations Users dialing in with domain name domain1 com will be forwarded to the home gateway and be given a virtual access interface based on vir tual template 1 Users dialing in with the domain2 com will be for warded to the same home gateway and be given a virtual access interface based on virtual template 2 NAS 1 vpdn enable vpdn outgoing domainl com nasl ip 1 1 1 1 vpdn outgoing domain2 com nas2 ip 1 1 1 1 Page 11 30 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps Gateway 1 vpdn incoming nasl gateway virtual template 1 vpdn incoming nas2 gateway virtual template 2 interface virtual template 1 ip unnumbered Ethernet0 peer default ip address pool domainl pool ppp authentication chap interface virtual template 2 p unnumbered Ethernet0O peer default ip address pool domain2 pool ppp authentication chap pis Example Using TACACS for Forwarding from the NAS This example provides configurations for an NAS and a public domain TACACS server On the NAS itis only necessary to enable AAA and to use the vpdn enable command Users with structured logins user domain com will have their do main authorized on the TACACS server and will be forwarded if there isa V
283. me Relay Download the New Router s Host Configuration File After the router successfully resolves its host name newrouter sends TFTP broadcast requesting the file newrouter confg or newrouter cfg The name newrouter confg must be in all lowercase letters even if th true host name is not If newrouter cannot resolve its host name it sends a TFTP broadcast requesting the default host configuration fil router confg The file is downloaded to newrouter where the configu ration commands take effect immediately August 1997 2524UM Page 5 9 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit When using Autolnstall over Frame Relay you are put into setup mode while the AutoInstall process is running If the configuration file is successfully installed the setup process is terminated If you expect the AutoInstall process to be successful either do not respond to the setup prompts or respond to the prompts as Would you like to nter the initial configuration dialog yes no Would you like to terminate autoinstall yes no If you do not expect the AutoInstall process to be successful create configuration file by responding to the setup prompts The AutoInstall process is terminated transparently You will see this display as the AutoInstall operation is in progress If the host configuration file contains only the minimal information you must connect to existing using Telnet From there connect via Telnet to newrouter Then r
284. mediate System ISO International Organization for Standardization ISP Internet Service Provider ITU International Telecommunications L2F Level 2 Forwarding LAN Local Area Network LANE LAN Emulation Appendix B Acronyms August 1997 2524UM Page B 3 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual LAPB Link Access Procedure Balanced LAPB Link Access Procedure Balanced LAPF Link Access Procedure for Frame Relay LAT Local Area Transport LC Logic Channel LCI Logic Channel Identifier LEN Low Entry Networking Levell Station Router Level Level2 Area Router Level LLC2 Logical Link Control type 2 LMI Local Management Interface LQM Link Quality Monitoring LQR Link Quality Reports LSP Link State PDU LU Logical Unit MAC Media Access Control M bit More Data Bit MBRI Multiport BRI MIP MultiChannel Interface Processor MLP Multilink PPP MMP Multichasis Multilink PPP MOP Maintenance Operation Protocol MTU Maximum Transmission Limit NAS Network Access Server NASI Netware Asynchronous Services Interface NCD Network Control Device Inc Page B 4 August 1997 2524UM NCIA Native Client Interface Architecture NET Network Entity Titles NETID Network Identifier NLSP Netware Link Services Protocol NMP Network Processor Module NNI Network to Network Interface NSAP Net
285. mote router does or does not update the cache tarp urc 0 1 3 Specify the N selector used to identify TARP PDUs tarp selector hex digit 4 Specify the protocol type used in outgoing TARP PDUs Only FE to indicate CLNP is supported tarp protocol hex digit Monitor and Maintain the TARP Protocol Use these EXEC commands to monitor and maintain the TARP caches tables and databases e Reset the TARP counters that are shown with th show tarp traffic command clear tarp counters e Remove all system ID to sequence number mapping entries in the TARP loop detection buffer table clear tarp ldb table e Remove all dynamically created TARP TID to NSAP address mapping entries in the TID cache clear tarp tid table e Display all global TARP parameters show tarp Page 9 64 August 1997 2524UM clns routing tarp run tarp tid myname interfac thernet 0 tarp enable Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps List all adjacencies that are blacklisted that is adjacencies that will not receive propagated TARP PDUs show tarp blacklisted adjacencies Display information about a specific TARP router stored in the lo cal TID cache show tarp host tid List all interfaces on the router that have TARP enabled show tarp interface type number Display the contents of the loop detection buffer table show tarp ldb List all the static entries in the TID cache show tarp map List all static
286. mplementation are described in the next sections The OSI network NSAP address format is illustrated as Domain Area System ID S 47 0004 004D 0003 0000 0C00 62E6 00 This is an example of the GOSIP NSAP address structure This struc ture is mandatory for addresses allocated from the International Code Designator ICD 0005 addressing domain Refer to the GOSIP docu ment U S Government Open Systems Interconnection Profile GO SIP Draft Version 2 0 April 1989 for more information Domain Area System ID S 47 0005 80 ffff00 0000 ffff 0004 0000 0c00 62e6 00 AFI IDI DFI AAI Resv RD Routing Table Example You enter static routes by specifying NSAP prefix and next hop NET pairs by using the clns route command The NSAP prefix can be any portion of the NSAP address NETs are similar in function to NSAP addresses If an incoming packet has a destination NSAP address that does not match any existing NSAP addresses in the routing table the Cisco IOS software will try to match the NSAP address with an NSAP prefix to route the packet In the routing table the best match means the longest NSAP prefix entry that matches the beginning of the destination NSAP address Page 9 6 August 1997 2524UM Pil Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps This table shows a sample static routing table in which the nexthop NETs are listed for completeness but are not necessary to understand the routing algorithm
287. mposite metric is a 24 bit quantity that is a sum of the segment delays and the lowest segment bandwidth scaled and inverted for a given route For a network of homogeneous media this metric reduces to a hop count For a network of mixed media FDDI Ethernet and serial lines running from 9600 bps to T1 rates the route with the lowest metric reflects the most desirable path to destination Disable Holddown When the Cisco IOS software learns that a network is at a greater dis tance than was previously known or it learns the network is down th route to that network is placed in holddown During the holddown pe riod the route is advertised but incoming advertisements about that network from any router other than the one that originally advertised the network s new metric will be ignored All devices in an IGRP au tonomous system must be consistent in their use of holddowns To dis able holddowns with IGRP type this command in router configuration mode no metric holddown Enforce a Maximum Network Diameter The Cisco IOS software enforces a maximum diameter to the IGRP network Routes whose hop counts exceed this diameter are not adver tised The default maximum diameter is 100 hops The maximum di ameter is 255 hops To configure the maximum diameter type this command in router configuration mode metric maximum hops hops Page 8 14 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 8 AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps Validate So
288. mtolinstalll ss iiccicsccsccseccessvecvsesoncdcvce ssucncevsdaesavetteoecovedesdvantevscncessessie 5 1 Intro duct Onset haa teehee eid assay So So eee 5 1 Preparing for AutoInstall oe eee eeeeseeesceeseecseecssecesecesecesecnsecaaccsaecaecsaecnseeeseceseeeaeens 5 1 AutoInstall Requirements 0 ce eeceseceseceseceeeceseessecesecaecseceseesseeseeesseeseneeeaeeesessaeeaes 5 2 Use a DOS Based TETP Servet inio ok AE E E A A A A A i 5 4 How Autolnstalll Works ceren uctens eevsenteeenttaa eea E E E oeelegeenewi eis 5 5 Acquire the New Router s IP Address 00 0 eeeeesceeseeesecsseceseceseceseeesecneeeeaeenes 5 5 Resolve the IP Address to the Host Name ssseesesesesessreeresreerrsrresrrrreesese 5 7 Download the New Router s Host Configuration Fil eeeeeeeeceenereerereee 5 9 Perform the AutoInstall Procedur oo ee eee eeeeseeeseeeseeececnceceseceaeceaeceseesseesseeseeeaeeaes 5 11 Modify the Existing Router s Configuration cece ceeceseeeeeeereeeeeeeeeneeees 5 11 SetUp the TRIP S verine ainda ncn eae hain ess 5 14 Set Up the BOOTP or RARP Server ccccecsccceeeceeeteceeeaeceeaceceeeeeeeaeeeeaeeaees 5 16 Connect the New Router to the Network cee eeeceseceseceseceeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeaeeees 5 17 Use Setup for Configuration Changes 0 ceeceeesesceeseeeseeeseecaeecnaeeeaeceseceseenaecnseeaaeees 5 19 Setup Command Facility Task List cesceseceseceeeceseeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeceeaeeeee 5 19 TOC 2 August 1997 2524UM AI252
289. must map NSAP addresses to ei ther MAC layer addresses or X 121 addresses depending on th application For CMNS support over dedicated serial links such as leased lines an X 121 address is not needed but can be included You must specify the X 121 address for CMNS connections over a packet switched net work and you must specify a MAC address for CMNS connections over a nonserial medium Ethernet FDDI or Token Ring To map the NSAP addresses to either a MAC address or X 121 ad dress perform one of these tasks in interface configuration mode e Statically map an NSAP address to a nonserial MAC layer ad dress x25 map cmns nsap mac address e Statically map an NSAP address to X 25 with an optional X 121 destination address x25 map cmns nsap x121 address Example CMNS Configured for X 121 and MAC Addresses This example illustrates enabling CMNS and configuring X 121 and MAC address mappings Map NSAP to MAC address on Ethernet0 x25 map cmns 38 8261 1000 0150 1000 17 0000 0c00 f f89 interface serial 0 encapsulation x25 Map NSAP to X 121 address on Serial0 assuming the link is over PDN x25 map cmns 38 8261 1000 0150 1000 18 3110451 Specify cmns support for Seriall assuming that the link is over leased line August 1997 2524UM Page 12 41 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit interface serial 1 encapsulation x25 x25 map cmns 38 8261 1000 0150 1000 20 Example CMNS Switched over a PDN This
290. n Th partly written file is marked as deleted and a new file is opened with the same name If Flash memory runs out of free space in this process the copy operation terminates After Flash load helper finishes copying whether or not the copy op eration is successful it automatically attempts an automatic or a man ual boot depending on the value o f bitO of the configuration registe boot field e Bit0 0 The system attempts a default boot from Flash memory to load the first bootable file in Flash memory This default boot is equivalent to a manual b flash command at the ROM monitor prompt e Bit0 1 The system attempts to boot based on the boot configuration commands If no boot configuration commands exist the system attempts a default boot from Flash memory that is it attempts to load the first bootable file in Flash memory Page 7 34 August 1997 2524UM Manually Load a System Image from ROM Monitor Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images Monitor Flash Load Helper To view the system console output generated during the Flash load helper operation use the image booted up after the Flash memory up grade Type this command in privileged EXEC mode show flh log If you are a remote Telnet user performing the Flash upgrade without a console connection this task allows you to retrieve console output when your Telnet connection terminates due to the switch to the ROM image The output indicates e
291. n To configure the 4 wire 56 64 kbps DSU CSU WAN module for circuit switched service follow the instructions in the previous section Configuring Switched 56 Take these steps to configure the 4 wire 56 64 kbps DSU CSU mod ule for DDS substituting the correct addresses and host names as ap propriate for your network 1 Enter enable mode Router gt enable password enablepassword 2 Enter configuration mode Router config term Router config 3 Assign an IP address to the serial port on the module Router config interface serial port _number Router config if ip address ipaddress subnet mask Router config if no keepalive 4 Set the network type to DDS Router config if service module 56k network type ads 5 Return to user EXEC mode Router config if exit Router config exit Router exit Router gt Page 16 16 August 1997 2524UM Cit Chapter 16 Basic Configuration Configuring the This section describes how to configure the fractional TI T1 DSU Fractional T1 T1 CSU WAN module is configured for Extended Superframe Format ESF signal format bipolar zero substitution B8ZS and full band DSU CSU WAN width as the factory default Depending on networking environment Module you might need to change these settings Take these steps to configure the fractional TI T1 DSU CSU WAN module for a typical leased line connection substituting the correct addresses and host names as appro
292. n IP addresses and host names The second file the server attempts to load is the host configuration file containing commands applicable to one router in particular Both the network and host configuration files must reside on a network server reachable via TFTP and must be readable You can specify an ordered list of network configuration and host con figuration filenames The Cisco IOS software scans this list until it successfully loads the appropriate network or host configuration file Page 7 18 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images Specify the Startup Configuration File Task List To specify a startup configuration file perform either the first two tasks or the third task e Download the Network Configuration File e Download the Host Configuration Fil Download the Network Configuration File To configure the Cisco IOS software to download a network configu ration file from a server at startup 1 Enter configuration mode from the terminal configure terminal 2 Enter the network configuration filename to download a file using TFTP boot network tftp filename ip address 3 Enable the router to automatically load the network file upon re start service config 4 To exit configuration mode press lt Ctrl Z gt 1 Save the configuration file to your startup configuration On most platforms this step saves the configuration to NVRAM copy running config startup config F
293. n file or from a default system image stored on a network server August 1997 2524UM Page 7 17 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Routerl show version GS Software Version 9 0 1 Copyright c 1986 1992 by Cisco Systems Inc Compiled Fri 14 Feb 92 12 37 System Bootstrap Version 4 3 Routerl uptime is 2 days 10 hours 0 minute System restarted by reload System image file is unknown booted via tftp from 131 108 13 111 Host configuration file is thor boots booted via tftp from 131 108 13 111 Network configuration file is network confg booted via tftp from 131 108 13 111 CSC3 68020 processor with 4096K bytes of memory X 25 software Bridging software 1 MCI controller 2 Ethernet 2 Serial 2 Ethernet IEEE 802 3 interface 2 Serial network interface 32K bytes of non volatile configuration memory Configuration register is 0x0 Routerl configure terminal Routerl config config register OxF Z Routerl reload Specify the Startup Configuration File Configuration files can be stored on network servers You can config ure the router to automatically request and receive two configuration files from the network server at startup e Network configuration fil e Host configuration file The server first attempts to load the network configuration file This file contains information shared among several routers For example you can use it to provide mapping betwee
294. n global configuration mode conditionally control the redistribu tion of routes between domains route map map tag permit deny sequence number One or more match command and one or more set commands typ ically follow a route map command to define the conditions for re distributing routes from one routing protocol into another If there are no match commands everything matches If there are no set com mands nothing is done other than the match Each route map command has a list of match and set commands associated with it The match commands specify the match criteria the conditions under which redistribution is allowed for the current Page 9 46 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps route map command The set commands specify the redistribu tion set actions the particular redistribution actions to perform if th criteria enforced by th match commands are met When all matc criteria are met all set actions are performed The match route map configuration command has multiple for mats The match commands may be given in any order and all de fined match criteria must be satisfied to cause the route to be redistributed according to th set actions given with the set com mands In route map configuration mode define the match criteria for redis tribution of routes from one routing protocol into another by perform ing at least one of these e Match routes that have a network addr
295. n host normally re fuses a call if the CUD is absent or if the protocol identification isn t recognized The PAD protocol however specifies that unidentified calls be treated as PAD connection requests Other applications re quire that they be treated as IP encapsulation connection requests per RFC 877 In interface configuration mode configure either PAD or IP encapsu lation treatment of unidentified calls x25 default ip pad Page 12 12 August 1997 2524UM Configure an X 25 Datagram Transport Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps Disable Packet Level Protocol PLP Restarts By default a PLP restart is performed when the link level resets for example when LAPB reconnects Although PLP restarts can be dis abled for those few networks that do not allow restarts do not disable these restarts because doing so can cause anomalous packet layer be havior In interface configuration mode disable PLP restarts no x25 linkrestart X 25 support is most commonly configured as a transport for data grams across an X 25 network Datagram transport or encapsulation is a cooperative effort between two hosts communicating across an X 25 network You configure datagram transport by establishing a mapping on the encapsulating interface between the far host s protocol address for example IP and its X 121 address Because the call iden tifies the protocol that the virtual circuit will carry in the CUD field th
296. n place of typing the long set of numbers associated with an NSAP address In global configuration mode define a name to NSAP address map ping clns host name nsap The assigned NSAP name is displayed where applicable in show and debug EXEC commands However some effects and requirements are associated with using names to represent NETs and NSAP ad dresses The clns host global configuration command is generated after all other CLNS commands when the configuration file is parsed As a re sult you cannot edit the nonvolatile random access memory NVRAM version of the configuration to specifically change the ad dress defined in the originalclns host command You must spe cifically change any commands that refer to the original address This affects all commands that accept names The commands that are affected by these requirements include e net router configuration command e clns is neighbor interface configuration command e clns es neighbor interface configuration command e clns route global configuration command August 1997 2524UM Page 9 43 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Use the IP DomainNa me System to Discover ISO CLNS Addresses If your router has both ISO CLNS and IP enabled you can use the Domain Naming System DNS to query ISO CLNS addresses by using the NSAP address type as documented in RFC 1348 This fea ture is useful for the ISO CLNS ping EXEC command and when making Telnet conn
297. n the PPP IPCP negotiation is completed In interface configuration mode disable this default behavior o reenable it once it has been disabled e Disable creation of neighbor routes no peer neighbor route e Reenable creation of neighbor routes peer neighbor route Note If entered on a dialer or async group interface this command affects all member interfaces For situations in which a routed network needs connectivity to a re mote bridged Ethernet network a serial or ISDN interface can be con figured to function as a PPP half bridge The line to the remote bridge functions as a virtual Ethernet interface The router s serial or ISDN in terface functions as a node on the same Ethernet subnetwork as the re mote network The bridge sends bridge packets to the PPP half bridge which con verts them to routed packets and forwards them to other router pro cesses Likewise the PPP half bridge converts routed packets to Ethernet bridge packets and sends them to the bridge on the sam Ethernet subnetwork Note An interface cannot function as both a half bridge and a bridge Figure 11 1 shows a router with a serial interface configured as a PPP half bridge The interface functions as a node on the Ethernet subnet work with the bridge Note that the serial interface has an IP address on the same Ethernet subnetwork as the bridge August 1997 2524UM Page 11 17 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Figurel1 1 Router
298. n the domai nnamed Sales Page 9 36 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps Figure 9 10 CLNS X 25 Intradomain Routing Chicago This example shows one way to configure the router in Chicago 1 Define the name chicago to be used in place of this NSAP clns host chicago 47 0004 0050 0001 0000 0c00 243b 00 2 Define the name detroit to be used in place of this NSAP clns host detroit 47 0004 0050 0002 0000 0c00 1e12 00 3 Enable ISO IGRP routing of CLNS packets router iso igrp sales 4 Configure net chicago as shown in steps 1 3 net chicago 5 Specify iso igrp routing using the specified tag sales interfac thernet 0 clns router iso igrp sales August 1997 Page 9 37 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 6 Set the interface up as a DTE with X 25 encapsulation interface serial 0 encapsulation x25 x25 address 1111 x25 nvc 4 7 Specify iso igrp routing using the specified tag sales clns router iso igrp sales 8 Define a static mapping between Detroit s nsap and its X 121 ad dress x25 map clns 2222 broadcast This configuration brings up an X 25 virtual circuit between the router in Chicago and the router in Detroit Routing updates will be sent across this link This implies that the virtual circuit could be up contin uously If the Chicago office should grow to contain multiple routers it would be appropriate for each of those routers to k
299. n the primary and alternate paths is used to determine the feasibility of a potential route Only paths that are feasible can be used for load balancing and are included in the routing table These condi Page 8 12 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 8 AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps tions limit the number of cases in which load balancing can occur but ensure that the dynamics of the network will remain stable These general rules apply to IGRP unequal cost load balancing e IGRP will accept up to four paths for a given destination network e The local best metric must be greater than the metric learned from the next router that is the next hop router must be closer have a smaller metric value to the destination than the local best metric e The alternative path metric must be within the specified variance of the local best metric The multiplier times the local best metric for the destination must be greater than or equal to the metric through the next router If these conditions are met the route is deemed feasible and can b added to the routing table By default the amount of variance is set to one equal cost load bal ancing You can define how much worse an alternate path can be be fore that path is disallowed by defining the variance associated with a particular path variance multiplier Note By using the variance feature the Cisco IOS software can balance traffic across all feasible paths and can immediately conv
300. n to a specified destination by packets in the network trace clns destination e Display the routing table in which the specified CLNS destination is found which route nsap address clns name Page 9 58 August 1997 2524UM Configure TARP on ISO CLNS Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps Some applications typically used by telephone companies running on Synchronous Optical Network SONET devices identify these de vices by a target identifier TID Therefore it is necessary for the router to cache TID to network address mappings Because these ap plications usually run over OSI the network addresses involved in the mapping are OSI NSAPs When a device must send a packet to another device it does not know about that is it does not have information about the NSAP address corresponding to the remote device s TID the device needs a way to request this information directly from the device or from an interme diate device in the network This functionality is provided by an ad dress resolution protocol called Target Identifier Address Resolution Protocol TARP Requests for information and associated responses are sent as TARP protocol data units PDUs which are sent as CLNP data packets TARP PDUs are distinguished by a unique N selector in the NSAP ad dress Here are the five types of TARP PDUs e Type 1 Sent when a device has a TID for which it has no match ing NSAP Type 1 PDUs are sent to all Le v
301. name The secret passwords must be identical on the remote device and the local router By transmitting this response the secret is never transmitted in clear text preventing other devices from stealing it and gaining illegal ac cess to the system Without the proper response the remote device cannot connect to the local router CHAP transactions occur only at the time a link is established The local router or access server does not request a password during the rest of the call The local device can however respond to such re quests from other devices during a call When PAP is enabled the remote router attempting to connect to the local router or access server is required to send an authentication re quest If the username and password specified in the authentication re quest are accepted the Cisco IOS software sends an authentication acknowledgment After you have enabled CHAP or PAP the local router or access server requires authentication from remote devices If the remote device does not support the enabled protocol no traffic will be passed to that de vice 1 In interface configuration mode enable PPP encapsulation encapsulation ppp 2 In interface configuration mode enable CHAP or PAP authentica tion on an interface configured for PPP encapsulation ppp authentication chap chap pap pap chap pap if needed list name default callin The ppp authentication chap optional keyword is used only
302. ne r 9 61 Disable TARP PDU Origination and Propagation 9 61 Configure Multiple NSAP Addresses 00 ce eeeessessceeseecsseceseceseceeeeeeeseeeaeenes 9 61 Configure Static TARP Adjacency and Blacklist Adjacency 0 0 00 cece 9 61 Determine TIDs and NSAPS cece ceecssecsseceseceseceseceseceseesseesseeseneeeneeeneeeaenes 9 62 Configure TARP Timers 0 ee ee eeceeseesseeseceseceseesseesseeeeneesaeeeaeesaeecaaecaeeseeeaes 9 63 August 1997 TOC 5 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Configure Miscellaneous TARP PDU Information o n 9 64 Monitor and Maintain the TARP Protocol ce cesceseceseceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeaes 9 64 Examples TARP Configuration 0 ccceescsseceseceseceseceseceseeeseeeeeeeeaeeeaeeseenaes 9 65 Chapter 10 Serial Interface Configuration Steps ccssscsssscccsssssesssscssssssesees 10 1 Introduction ae ch ai eet ae a ea ee ee at a adn lat ened 10 1 Configure the Synchronous Serial Interfaces eee eceeeeeeseeeneeeneeeeeeaeceaeceseeneens 10 1 Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps csssccssssccssssssssssccssssees 11 1 Introduction e 3252552525 2 Sonat a eee eat ea ee a eet eet 11 1 Configuration OvervieW rare oropani E REEE a EEE O EE EE A oaa 11 1 PPP Configuration Task List cece cesceseceseceseceeeeseneeeeeeeaeecececeeeeneecneseaee 11 2 Enable PPP Encapsulation s ucns asea a titi naa ien 11 3 Enable CHAP or PAP Authentication sssseeeeseeeeeseereeseeris
303. network Otherwise the LMI type can be set to suit the needs of your privat Frame Relay network In interface configuration mode set one of three types of LMIs ANSI T1 617 Annex D Cisco or ITU T Q 933 Annex A 1 Set the LMI type frame relay lmi type ansi cisco q933a 2 Write the LMI type to NVRAM Use the command form that is appropriate to your router platform copy running config destination Page 13 6 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps Set the LMI Keepalive Interval A keepalive interval must be set to configure the LMI By default this interval is 10 seconds and per the LMI protocol must be less than the corresponding interval on the switch To set the keepalive interval type in interface configuration mode keepalive number To turn off keepalives on networks without an LMI no keepalive Set the LMI Polling and Timer Intervals You can set various optional counters intervals and thresholds to fine tune the operation of your LMI DTE and DCE devices Set these attributes by performing one or more of these tasks in interface config uration mode Set the DCE and Network to Network Interface NNI error threshold frame relay lmi n392dce threshold Set the DCE and NNI monitored events count frame relay lmi n393dce events Set the polling verification timer on a DCE or NNI interface frame relay lmi t392dce timer Set a full status polling interval on
304. nfig ure the ISO CLNS protocol e Understand Addresses e Understand Routing Processes e Configure ISO IGRP Dynamic Routing e Configure IS IS Dynamic Routing e Configure CLNS Static Routing e Configure Miscellaneous Features e Configure CLNS over WANs e Enhance ISO CLNS Performance e Monitor and Maintain the ISO CLNS Network e Configure TARP on ISO CLNS August 1997 Page 9 1 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Understand Addresses Addresses in the ISO network architecture are referred to as NSAP ad dresses and network entity titles NETs Each node in an OSI network has one or more NETs In addition each node has many NSAP ad dresses Each NSAP address differs from one of the NETs for that node in only the last byte This byte is called the N selector Its func tion is similar to the port number in other protocol suites The AI2524 router supports all NSAP address formats that are defined by ISO 8348 Ad2 however the AI2524 router provides ISO IGRP o IS IS dynamic routing only for NSAP addresses that conform to the address constraints defined in the ISO standard for IS IS ISO 10589 An NSAP address consists of these two major fields as shown inFig ure 9 1 e The initial domain p art IDP is made up of 1 byte authority and format identifier AFI and a variable length initial domai nidentifier IDI The length of the IDI and the encoding format for the domai nspecific part DSP are based on the valu
305. nfiguration Changes Chapter 5 Using AutoInstall The setup command facility is an interactive facility that allows you to perform first time configuration and other basic configuration proce dures on all routers The facility prompts you to enter basic informa tion needed to start a router quickly and uneventfully Although the setup command facility is a quick way to set up a router you can also use it after first time startup to perform basic configura tion changes This section focuses on e Using the setup command facility after first time startup e Using the streamlined setup facility Refer to your hardware platform s user guide for more information on using setup for first time startup Whenever you use the setup command facility be sure that you know e Router interfaces e Router protocols e Bridging setting e Network addresses for the protocols being configured e Password strategy for your environment Setup Command Facility Task List You can perform these tasks to make configuration changes using the setup command facility Both tasks are optional e Use Setup after First Time Startup e Use the Streamlined Setup Facility Use Setup after First Time Startup The command parser allows you to make very detailed changes to your configurations however some major configuration changes do not re quire the granularity provided by the command parser In these cases you can use the setup command facility to make
306. nfiguration commands take effect immediately If the configuration file is complete the new router should be fully oper ational To save the complete configuration to NVRAM complete these tasks in privileged EXEC mode 1 Enter privileged mode at the system prompt on the new router enable password 2 Save the information from the name config file into your startup configuration This step saves the configuration to NVRAM copy running config startup config August 1997 2524UM Page 5 17 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Note Verify that the existing and new routers and or access servers are connected before entering th copy running config startup config EXEC command to save configuration changes Use the ping EXEC command to verify connectivity If an incorrect configuration file is downloaded the new router will load NVRAM configuration information before it can enter AutolInstall mode If the configuration file is a minimal configuration file the new router comes up but with only one interface operational Complete the fol lowing steps to connect to the new router and configure it 1 Establish a Telnet connection to the existing router telnet existing 2 From the existing router establish a Telnet connection to the new router telnet newrouter 3 Enter privileged EXEC mode enable password 4 Enter setup mode to configure the new router setup Page 5 18 August 1997 2524UM Use Setup for Co
307. nfigure Route Calculation Timers ce eeeeesceeseeseecseeceseceseceeeeeeeeseeeaeenes 8 9 Configure OSPF over On Demand Circuits 0 0 00 eeceeceseceseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeees 8 9 Network stration 22 2 cs hne eevee ee dt ected tet e ei ene eens 8 10 AI2524 IGRP TCP IP Configuration Steps 0 0 ee eesesseeeseeeneeceeeceseceseceeeseeeseeeaeenes 8 11 IGRP lt Update 25 0 sce hie etd te te heehee ee a ees 8 11 IGRP Configuration Task List 0 0 cesecsseceseceseeseeeeeceecsaecsaecnseesaeeeseenaes 8 11 Create the IGRP Routing Process 0 0 0 ee eeeeeseeseeeseeeseeesseceaeceseceaeesseeeseeeaeenes 8 12 Allow Point to Point Updates for IGRP eee ceeceeceseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeees 8 12 Define Unequal Cost Load Balancing 00 0 eceecceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeseaeeaes 8 12 Control Traffic Distribution 0 cc cee eeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeseesaeeceaeceaeeeeeeaeeeaeenes 8 13 Adjust the IGRP Metric Weights cc eeseessecesecreeseesseecneecnsecsaeceaecsseeeseenaes 8 13 Disable HOlddoWN ciro ereet tes cieesene as i aae a eonia 8 14 Enforce a Maximum Network Diamete sssseeseeeseseeeseseeeresreeresreesesrrssesrrsresrs 8 14 Validate Source IP Addresses cee ceeesseessecsseceeceseceseceseeeseeseeeseneeeneeeaeeeaeones 8 15 Network Illustrations teretna e a wera eee 8 15 AI2524 RIP TCP IP Configuration seeeeseeeeseereeseerisserriesreeresreeesressesresseesresresreresestes 8 16 RIP Configuration Task List 00 0 0 eee ee
308. nfigure a dialer map class for PPP callback map class dialer classname August 1997 2524UM Page 11 15 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit interface BRIO 12 Configure a dialer map class as a callback server dialer callback server username The enable timer default is 15 seconds The time between the initial call and the return call can be improved by reducing this number but care should be taken to ensure that the initial call is completely discon nected before the timer expires Note On the PPP callback server the dialer enable timeout functions as the timer for returning calls to the callback client Example PPP Callback Server The PPP callback server is configured on an ISDN BRI interface in router in Atlanta The callback server requires an enable timeout and map class to be defined ip address 7 1 1 7 255 255 255 0 encapsulation ppp dialer callback secure dialer enable timeout 2 dialer map ip 7 1 1 8 name atlanta class diall 81012345678901 dialer group 1 ppp callback accept ppp authentication chap map class dialer diall dialer callback server usernam Page 11 16 August 1997 2524UM Disable or Reenable Peer Neighbor Routes Configure PPP Half Bridging Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps The Cisco IOS software automatically creates neighbor routes by de fault that is it automatically sets up aroute to the peer address on point to point interface whe
309. nges permanent enter the copy running con fig startup config command at the enable prompt Router copy running config startup config The router is now configured and will boot with the configuration you entered Configuration This section describe the software tools you can use to configure your Overviews router via the Cisco IOS software e Configuration Builder e Command Interpreter e Web Browser Interface e Use ClickStart Use Configuration Builder The Configuration Builder allows you to create configuration files for multiple routers or access servers without knowing the command line language or syntax It is a Microsoft Windows based application that runs on an IBM PC or compatible computer If you do not have the platform required to run Configuration Builder configure your device using the command interpreter Use the Command Interpreter You can build most straightforward configurations and create a con figuration file using the setup command facility Refer to the Using AutolInstall chapter for more information Before configuring your router or access server you must determine these items e Which network protocols you are supporting for example IP and Novell IPX e The addressing plan for each network protocol Page 3 4 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 3 Configuration Overview e Which WAN protocols you will run on each interface for exam ple Frame Relay HDLC SMDS and X 25 e Which routing protocol you will use
310. nk state advertisements LSAs from the core into the area but it can import AS external routes in a limited fashion within the area NSSA allows importing of Type 7 AS external routes within NSSA area by redistribution These Type 7 LSAs are translated into Type 5 LSAs by NSSA Area Border Router ABR which are flooded throughout the whole routing domain Summarization and filtering are supported during the translation Use NSSA to simplify administration if you are an Internet service provider ISP or a network administrator that must connect a central site using OSPF to a remote site that is using a different routing proto col Prior to NSSA the connection between the corporate site border router and the remote router could not be run as OSPF stub area because routes for the remote site could not be redistributed into stub area A simple protocol like RIP was usually run to handle the redistribution This meant maintaining two routing protocols With NSSA you can extend OSPF to cover the remote connection by defining the area be tween the corporate router and the remote router as an NSSA In router configuration mode specify these area parameters as needed to configure OSPF NSSA area area id nssa no redistribution default information originate In router configuration mode on the ABR specify this command to control summarization and filtering of Type 7 LSA into Type 5 LSA optional summary address prefix mask not a
311. nks of Flash memory Benefits Partitioning Flash memory provides these benefits e For any system partitioning rather than having one logical Flash memory device provides a cleaner way of managing different files in Flash memory especially if the Flash memory size is large e For systems that execute code out of Flash memory partitioning allows you to download a new image into the file system in one Flash memory bank while an image is being executed from the file system in the other bank The download is simple and causes no network disruption or downtime After the download is complete you can switch over to the new image at a convenient time e One system can hold two different images one image acting as backup for the other Therefore if a downloaded image fails to boot for some reason the earlier running good image is still avail able Each bank is treated as a separate device Page 7 24 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images Flash Load Helper versus Dual Flash Bank You might use Flash load helper rather than dual Flash bank for one of these reasons e You want to download a new file into the same bank from which the current system image is executing e You want to download a file that is larger than the size of a bank and hence want to switch to a single bank mode e You have only one single bank Flash SIMM installed In this case Flash load helper is the best option for upgrading
312. now how to get to Detroit Add the following command to redistribute information between rout ers in Chicago router iso igrp sales redistribute static Example Static InterdomainRo uting Figure 9 11 andthe example configurations illustrate how to configure two routers that distribute information across domains In this exam ple Router A in dom ainOrion and Router B i n domainPleiades communicate across a serial link Page 9 38 August 1997 2524UM Pil Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps Figure 9 11 CLNS Interdomain S tatic Routing Domain 47 0006 0200 Domain 47 0007 0200 Area 0100 Area 0200 Router A S107 4o This configuration shows how to configure Router A for stati interdomainrouting 1 Define tag orion for net 47 0006 0200 0100 0102 0304 0506 00 router iso igrp orion 2 Configure this network entity title for the routing process net 47 0006 0200 0100 0102 0304 0506 00 3 Define the tag bar to be used in place of Router B s NSAP clns host bar 47 0007 0200 0200 1112 1314 1516 00 4 Specify iso igrp routing using the specified tag orion interfac thernet 0 clns router iso igrp orion August 1997 Page 9 39 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 5 Pass ISO CLNS traffic to end systems without routing interface serial 1 clns enable 6 Configure a static route to Router B clns route 39 0001 bar Router B This configuration shows how to configure Rou
313. ns ddetynsntaweatecdeteatts 17 1 Chapter 18 System Error Messages ccsccccssssssssssccsssscsssssccsssessssccccssssssssscssesses 18 1 JAANE KOYG LOKO RTO i PERSE AE EAE AEA EE AEAT AA 18 1 Chapter 19 Debug Command Reference eesssoessossssessscessocssocsesecesocesoccssocsssosssse 19 1 Introduction ssn eriet t a aSa e a EEE A OEE E E E oat 19 1 Appendix A Release Notes sesssoessocesoccescccsoccsocossoosesocecoecssocssoeceocossoosssosssscsssosssosse A 1 New Features oeeie na eaa cies Aaaa aN Eea nT aS AEEA ao DaRk A 1 ISDN BRI Intettace 0 rme n e a A AA N A e tek A 2 Configuring ISDN aguse ennt And cies rie TE E EER E a a a A 3 Appendix B A CLO VIS oes sso csecsctecktecesasevseddve cess ceess ssadeseanpninanceunsdeusoceccensentdedeessnseeccens B 1 TOC 10 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 1 Introduction Documentation This manual documents the use and operation of the AI2524 in an Overview AISwitch system These topics are covered Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 This chapter provides a documentation over view related documentation contact infor mation and text conventions AI2524 Overview This chapter describes the Cisco IOS soft ware features and AI2524 hardware specifi cations Configuration Overview This chapter describes the process of booting the router for the first time and provides over views of con
314. nter Configuration Mode and Select a Configuration Source e Modify the Configuration Register Boot Field e Specify the Startup Configuration Fil Enter Configuration Mode and Select a Configuration Source To enter configuration mode enter th configure command at the privileged EXEC prompt The Cisco IOS software responds with this prompt by asking you to specify the terminal or memory or a file stored on a network server network as the source of configuration commands Configuring from terminal memory or network terminal These methods are described in these sections e Configure the Cisco IOS software from the Terminal e Configure the Cisco IOS software from Memory e Configure the Cisco IOS software from the Network The Cisco IOS software accepts one configuration command per line You can enter as many configuration commands as you want You can add comments to a configuration file describing the com mands you have entered Precede a comment with an exclamation point Because comments are not stored in NVRAM or in the active copy of the configuration file comments do not appear when you list the active configuration with th show running config EXEC command Also when the startup configuration is NVRAM com ments do not show up when you list the startup configuration with th show startup config EXEC command Comments are stripped out of the configuration file when it is loaded onto the router How
315. nterface configuration mode transmit ERPDUs 1 Send an ERPDU when the routing software detects an error in data PDU this is enabled by default clns send erpdu 2 Set the minimum interval in milliseconds between ERPDUs clns erpdu interval milliseconds Control Redirect Protocol Data Units RDPDUs If a packet is sent out the same interface it came in on a redirect pro tocol data unit RDPDU also can be sent to the sender of the packet You can control RDPDUs with one of these actions e By default CLNS sends RDPDUs when a better route for a given host is known You can disable this feature Disabling this feature reduces bandwidth because packets may continue to unnecessarily go through the router clns send rdpdu e Youcan set the interval times between RDPDUs clns rdpdu interval milliseconds Warning SNPA masks are never sent and RDPDUs are ignored by the Cisco IOS software when the router is acting as an IS August 1997 2524UM Page 9 55 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Configure Parameters for Locally Sourced Packets In global configuration mode configure parameters for packets origi nated by a specified router e Specify in seconds the initial lifetime for locally generated pack ets clns packet lifetime seconds e Specify whether to request ERPDUs on packets originated by the router clns want erpdu You should set the packet lifetime low in an internetwork that has fre quent
316. o cated at the rear of the router 2 Configure the terminal to operate at 9600 baud 8 data bits no par ity 2 stop bits 3 Power up the router The setup command facility runs automati cally for initial startup 4 Perform general system configuration 5 Configure your system by referring to the appropriate part in th documentation To enhance the configuration perform the protocol specific tasks de scribed in the appropriate chapters of this guide August 1997 2524UM Page 3 5 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Configuration Storage and Hot Swap Use the Web Browser Interface You can issue most of the AI2524 commands using a Web browser You access the Web Browser interface through the router s home page AI2524 routers loaded with the latest version of the Cisco IOS soft ware have a home page which is password protected From the router s home page click on the Monitor the Router hyper text link This link takes you to a Web page that has a Command field You can type commands in this field as if you were using the com mand interpreter on a terminal connected to the router The page also displays a list of hypertext commands that can be executed with a mouse click This feature is documented in Web Browser Interface The AI2524 card must have its configuration stored on the AI198 card to insure the ability to perform hot swap The configuration is stored in Menu 4 18 for the port associated with the
317. o 1 1 Documentation OVerview reroccirriini rii tieni ai i AAE E AEEA 1 1 Related Documentation serenade a a aE E AT A OAE AEA KEN 1 3 Contact Information oien ere naa ha eae R E ae a ae Relies 1 4 Text Conventions oceneni i Rese ati EA N T tel atee a a eaten 1 5 Chapter 2 AI2524 Overview sessseccseecsoscccocsoooesosossoocccocecocecoocsooocsecocosocsosssssesosessosso 2 1 TTL O AUCH ONE oss sis Sareea tse cai a a a a a E A 2 1 TRCSO DS Uson areata t e E alien te deal cet dich Ale ean RAG 2 1 Four Wires 56K CSU DS Uhinaren rea E E aerteenenituans cele E 2 1 5 IN 1 Serial Cable Interface cceccceesseceesseceeececeeeeecaeceeaeeceeneeenaeeeeaeenas 2 1 Software Features and Functions 00 ccccccescceceseceseeceeseecesececeaeceeeeesaeceeaeeceeeeeceeaeenaeees 2 2 Scalability ne einne aise Se ee eee Wes a ol ae 2 2 Reliable Adaptive Routing eee eeeeseeseeeseeeseecnseceseceseceseceseeseesneessesaeeaes 2 2 Remote Access and Protocol Translation cccccceeseeeeeceeseeceeeeeceeeeeeneesaes 2 2 Management and Security ee eeeeeeeeeseeeseesseeeneeeaeceaecaeceaeceseeaecaaecaeeaeenaes 2 5 Software Specifications arerin ee ees wk ae So es eed ee dels 2 5 Supported Media i2 ieeehah ie eas idl adie eh Hal een ia 2 5 Supported Network Protocols ceescesssecsseceseceseceseceseceseeeseeeseeseeeeeaeeeneeneenaes 2 5 Connec Hons seen anneni e n e e e e aiea 2 7 External Connection Requirements ssssessseereeseeresresreeresrrsserris
318. o identify their encapsulation The primary difference between the available AI2524 and IETF en capsulation methods is the specific value used to identify a protocol When any of the methods establishes a virtual circuit for carrying single protocol the protocol is identified in the call packet by the CUD When a virtual circuit is established to carry more than one pro tocol only available using the RFC 1356 methodology a protocol identification field precedes the datagram encapsulated in the X 25 data packet every datagram exchanged over that virtual circuit has its protocol identified This table summarizes the values used in the CUD field to identify protocols oe IETF RFC 1356 Protocol Protocol ta Protocol Identifier Identifier Apollo Domain 0xD4 0x80 5 byte SNAP encoding Bridging 0xD5 Not implemented ISO CLNS 0x81 0x812 Compressed TCP 0xD8 0x00 5 byte SNAP encoding IP OxCC OxCC or 0x80 5 byte SNAP encoding Novell IPX 0xD3 0x80 5 byte SNAP encoding PAD 0x01 0x015 QLLC 0xC3 Not available Multiprotocol Not available 0x00 August 1997 2524UM Page 12 17 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual rit 1 Subnetwork Access Protocol SNAP encoding is defined from the Assigned Numbers RFC The AI2524 implementation recog nizes only the IETF organizational unique identifier OUI 0x0000 00 followed by a 2 byte Ethernet protocol type 2 The use of 0x81 for CLNS
319. ode type continue To initialize the router or access server enter th i command Th i command causes the bootstrap program to reinitialize the hardware clear the contents of memory and boot the system Use the i command before you run any tests or boot the software To boot the system image file use the b command August 1997 Page 4 9 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual rit Global Configuration Mode Commands Global configuration commands apply to features that affect the sys tem as a whole Use the configure privileged EXEC command to enter global configuration mode When you enter this command the system EXEC prompts you for the source of the configuration com mands Configuring from terminal memory or network terminal You can specify either the terminal nonvolatile random access mem ory NVRAM or a file stored on a network server as the source of configuration commands The default is to enter commands from th terminal console Pressing lt Enter gt begins this configuration method Page 4 10 August 1997 2524UM Router configure Chapter 4 Understanding the User Interface Configuring from terminal memory or network terminal Enter configuration commands one per line Router config Configure commands access list apollo appletalk arp async bootp autonomous system banner boot bridge buffers busy message chat script clns clock decnet default value dialer
320. of all par titions 1 Display the directory of the first parti tion 22 Display the directory of the second par tition q Quit the copy command August 1997 2524UM Page 7 27 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Manually Boot from Flash Memory To manually boot the router from Flash memory perform one of thes tasks in ROM monitor mode e Boot the first bootable file found in any partition boot flash flash flash e Boot the first bootable file from the specified partition boot flash flash flash partition number e Boot the specified file from the first partition boot flash flash flash filename e Boot the specified file from the specified partition boot flash flash flash partition number filename The result of booting a relocatable image from Flash memory depends on where and how the image was downloaded into Flash memory This table describes the various ways an image might be downloaded and the corresponding results of booting from Flash memory Method of Downloading Result of Booting from Flash The image was downloaded as the first file by a nonrelocat able image The image will execute in place from Flash memory like a run from Flash image The image was downloaded not as the first file by a nonre locatable image The nonrelocatable image will not relocate the image before storage in Flash memory This image will not be booted
321. of seconds be tween retransmission of LSPs for point to point links isis retransmit interval seconds The value you specify should be an integer greater than the expected round trip delay between any two routers on the network The setting of this parameter should be conservative or needless retransmission will result The value you determine should be larger for serial lines and virtual links Specify Designated Router Election You can configure the priority to use for designated router election Priorities can be configured for Levell an d Level2 individually Th designated router enables a reduction in the number of adjacencies re quired on a multiaccess network which in turn reduces the amount of routing protocol traffic and the size of the topology database In interface configuration mode configure the priority to use for des ignated router election isis priority value level 1 level 2 Specify the Interface Circuit Type It is normally not necessary to configure this feature because the IS IS protocol automatically determines area boundaries and keeps L evell and Leve 12 routing separate However you can specify the adjacency levels on a specified interface In interface configuration mode configure the adjacency for neigh bors on the specified interface isis circuit type level 1 level 1 2 level 2 only If you specify Level 1 a Level 1 adjacency is established if there is at least one area address common
322. omplete these steps in EXEC mode 1 Restart the router reload 2 Press lt Break gt during the first 60 seconds of system startup 3 Manually boot the router from ROM boot In this example a router is manually booted from ROM Use the System Image Instead of Reloading To return to EXEC mode from the ROM monitor to use the system image instead of reloading type the following in ROM monitor mode continue August 1997 2524UM Page 7 37 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Page 7 38 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 8 AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps Chapter 8 AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps Introduction This chapter describes the AI2524 protocol configuration steps for th OSPF TCP IP IGRP TCP IP and RIP TCP IP AI2524 OSPF Open Shortest Path First OSPF is an IGP designed expressly for IP TCP IP networks OSPF supports IP subnetting and tagging of externally de Confi ti rived routing information OSPF also allows packet authentication and onuguraton uses IP multicast when sending receiving packets Steps OSPF typically requires coordination among many internal routers area border routers routers connected to multiple areas and autono mous system boundary routers At a minimum OSPF based routers or access servers can be configured with all default parameter values no authentication and interfaces assigned to areas If you plan to custom ize your environment ensure coordinated configur
323. ontrol System TCP Transmission Control Protocol TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol THC TCP IP Header Compression TOS Type of Service Page B 6 August 1997 2524UM UDP User Datagram Protocol UP Usage Parameter URL Universal Resource Locator VCN Virtual Circuit Nember VPDN Virtual Private Dial up Network VTY Virtual Terminal WAN Wide Area Network XNS Xerox Network Systems XOT X 25 Over TCP Appendix B Acronyms August 1997 2524UM Page B 7 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Page B 8 August 1997 2524UM
324. or X 25 networks The AI2524 has one Ethernet LAN interface with both a backplane IRB port and a 10BaseT port on the front panel The backplane port provides connections to a large number of interfaces and protocols through a variety of AISwitch interface modules The base module accepts two serial interface modules in any combi nation The three available modules are T1 CSU DSU The AI2524 T1 module is an integrated CSU DSU that supports full or fractional T1 leased line services It may be remotely managed using Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Four Wires 56K CSU DSU The AI2524 4W56 module is an integrated CSU DSU that supports 4 wire 56k leased line or switched services It may be remotely man aged using Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 5 IN 1 Serial Cable Interface The AI2524 5N1 module provides a cable interface to a synchronous serial line It supports full and half duplex operations up to 2 048 MHz full duplex Dependent upon the interface DTE DCE and NRZ NRZ1 operations are available Cables are available for the these interfaces August 1997 AI2524UM Page 2 1 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Software Features and Functions RS 232 DTE or DCE EIA 530 DTE RS 449 DTE or DCE OR V 35 DTE or DCE up to E1 speeds The AI 2524 incorporates Cisco IOS software This software provides e Scalability Reliable Adaptive Routing e Remote Access and Protocol Translation e Manag
325. or Step 2 if you do not specify a network configuration filename th Cisco IOS software uses the default filename network confg If you omit the tftp keyword the software assumes that you are using TFTP to transfer the file and that the server whose IP address you specify supports TFTP You can specify more than one network configuration file The soft ware tries them in order until it loads one successfully This procedur can be useful for keeping files with different configuration information loaded on a network server Download the Host Configuration File To configure the Cisco IOS software to download a host configuration file from a server at startup complete the following tasks Step 2 is op tional If you do not specify a host configuration filename the router uses its own name to form a host configuration filename by converting August 1997 2524UM Page 7 19 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit the name to all lowercase letters removing all domain information and appending confg If no host name information is available the software uses the default host configuration filename router confg 1 Enter configuration mode from the terminal configure terminal Optionally enter the host configuration filename to be down loaded boot host tftp filename ip address Enable the device to automatically load the host file upon restart service config To exit configuration mode press lt Ctrl Z gt Sav
326. or each of the priority levels the last DLCI specified in the command line is used as the value of the remaining arguments However you must provide at least the high priority and the medium priority DLCIs Page 13 46 August 1997 2524UM Monitor the Frame Relay Connections Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps To monitor Frame Relay connections perform any of these tasks in EXEC mode Clear dynamically created Frame Relay maps which are created by the use of Inverse ARP clear frame relay inarp Display information about Frame Relay DLCIs and the LMI show interfaces serial number Display LMI statistics show frame relay lmi type number Display the current Frame Relay map entries show frame relay map Display PVC statistics show frame relay pvc type number dlci Display configured static routes show frame relay route Display Frame Relay traffic statistics show frame relay traffic Display information about the status of LAPF show frame relay lapf Display all the SVCs under a specified map list show frame relay svc maplist Example Configuration Providing Backward Compatibility This example configuration provides backward compatibility and in teroperability with earlier versions that are not compliant with RFC 1490 The ietf keyword is used to generate RFC 1490 traffic This con figuration is possible because of the flexibility provided by separately defining each map en
327. or fewer with a three letter exten sion Therefore when an attempt to load network confg fails AutoIn stall automatically attempts to download the filecisconet cfg from the TFTP server If cisconet cfg exists and is downloaded successfully the server is as sumed to be a DOS machine The AutolInstall program then attempts to resolve the host name for the router through host commands in cisconet cfg If cisconet cfg does not exist or cannot be downloaded or if the pro gram is unable to resolve a host name DNS attempts to resolve the host name If DNS cannot resolve the host name the router attempts to download ciscortr cfg If the host name is longer than eight charac ters itis truncated to eight characters For example a router with a host name australia will be treated as australi and AutoInstall will at tempt to download australi cfg The format of cisconet cfg and ciscortr cfg is the same as those de scribed for network confg and hostname confg If neither network confg nor cisconet cfg exists and DNS is unable to resolve the host name AutoInstall attempts to load router confg and then ciscortr cfg if router confg does not exist or cannot be down loaded The cycle is repeated three times Page 5 4 August 1997 2524UM How AutolInstall Works Chapter 5 Using AutoInstall Once the requirements for using AutoInstall are met the dynamic con figuration of the new router occurs in this order 1 The new rout
328. or set its defaults Configure NTP Build a priority lis Build a custom queue lis Source route RIF cache Create route map or enter route map command mode Enable a routing process aximum interval before running lowest priority process odify use of network based services Set the max number of unprocessed SMT frames odify SN parameters Source route bridging ring groups STUN global configuration commands odify TACACS query parameters Provide TFTP service for netload requests August 1997 2524UM Page 4 11 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit tn3270 tn3270 configuration command username Establish User Name Authentication vines Vines global configuration commands X 25 X 25 Level 3 xns XNS global configuration commands Interface Configuration Mode Commands Many features are enabled on a per interface basis Interface configu ration commands modify the operation of an interface such as an Ethernet Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI or serial port Inter face configuration commands always follow an interface global configuration command which defines the interface type This example shows how to access interface configuration commands for serial interface 0 and how to list the available commands Page 4 12 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 4 Understanding the User Interface Router config interface serial 0 Router config if Interface conf
329. ork through an end to end L2F tunnel shown by the dotted line August 1997 2524UM Page 11 27 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Figure 11 2 Configure a Virtual Template and Create a Vir tual Template Interface on the Home Gateway E ca _ Public Det a Ebi a Four bial SP or Comore Remote use makes Network Home balcao nes galway sevice provider Access across corporal network to spect LAN server or application i Beginning in global configuration mode configure a virtual templat for interfaces on a home gateway access server 1 Specify a default local IP address pool ip local pool default ip address Create a virtual template interface and enter interface configura tion mode interface virtual template number Identify the virtual template interface type and number on the LAN ip unnumbered ethernet 0 Enable PPP encapsulation on the virtual template interface encapsulation ppp Enable PPP authentication on the virtual template interface ppp authentication chap Page 11 28 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps Configure Incoming VPDN Connections on the Home Gateway In global configuration mode configure virtual private dialup net working on a home gateway router or access server 1 Enable virtual private networking vpdn enable 2 Specify the remote host the local name to use for authenticating and the virtual template
330. ork correctly the new router must resolve its host name and then download a name confg or a name cfg file from a TFTP server The new router can resolve its host name by using a network confg or a cisconet cfg file downloaded from a TFTP server or by using the DNS To set up a TFTP server to support AutoInstall complete these tasks Step 2 includes two ways to resolve the new router s host name Use the first method if you want tous network confg file to resolve the new router s host name Use the second method if you want to us DNS to resolve the new router s host name Page 5 14 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 5 Using AutoInstall 1 Enable TFTP on a server Consult your host vendor s TFTP serve documentation and RFCs 906 and 783 2 If you want to use a network confg or cisconet cfg file to resolve the new router s name create the network confg or cisconet cfg file containing an IP address to host name mapping for the new router Enter the ip host command into the TFTP config file not into the router The IP address must match the IP address that is to be dynamically obtained by the new router or if you want to use DNS to resolve the new router s name create an address to name map ping entry for the new router in the DNS database The IP address must match the IP address that is to be dynamically obtained by the new router ip host hostname address Contact the DNS administrator or refer to RFCs 1101 and 1183 3 Createth
331. orted for RFC 1356 opera tion Bridge maps must include the broadcast option for correct oper ation In interface configuration mode enable the X 25 bridging capability x25 map bridge x12l address broadcast option Page 12 22 August 1997 2524UM Configure Additional X 25 Datagram Transport Features Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps The Cisco IOS software allows you to configure additional X 25 dat agram transport features including various user facilities defined for X 25 call setup This section describes the X 25 datagram transport features you can configure by using the options in the x25 map or x25 pvc en capsulation command or by setting an interface default Th tasks you perform depend upon your needs the structure of your net work and the requirements of the service provider To configure the optional parameters user facilities and special fea tures perform one or more of these tasks e Configure X 25 Payload Compression e Configure the Encapsulation Virtual Circuit Idle Time e Increase the Number of Virtual Circuits Allowed e Configure the Ignore Destination Time e Establish the Packet Acknowledgment Policy e Configure X 25 User Facilities e Define the Virtual Circuit Packet Hold Queue Size e Restrict Map Usage Configure X 25 Payload Compression For increased efficiency on relatively slow networks the Cisco IOS software supports X 25 payload comp
332. ossible correc tive actions To maintain low EMI levels we suggest that you use only metal connectors and shielded cable grounded to the frame Electrostatic Discharge Warning The AlSwitch and its peripherals contain electrostatic sensitive components Proper handling shipping and storage precautions must be exercised Removal and installation of circuit boards must be performed ina Static free environment This means the technician should wear an anti static wrist strip and stand on an anti static mat Both the wrist strap and mat must be grounded at the same point as th AlSwitch enclosure When not in use circuit boards must be kept in their anti static plastic bags Circuit boards must only be removed from their anti static plastic bags immediately prior to installation into the AlSwitch enclosure e Immediately upon removal from the enclosure circuit boards must be inserted into their anti static bags Donot ship or store the electronic circuit boards near strong elec trostatic electromagnetic magnetic or radioactive fields Applied Innovation Inc 5800 Innovation Drive Dublin Ohio 43016 3271 614 798 2000 800 247 9482 FAX 614 798 1770 RN194 August 1997 New Features RN194 AI2524 Router Card Version 1 00 Release Notes AISwitch Release Notes AI2524 Version 1 00 Router Card August 1997 These release notes document new or enhanced features and com mands upgrade instructions an
333. ou do not erase Flash memory and there is no file duplication th dialog continues Erase flash device before writing confirm n Copy abc igs kf 914 from TFTP server as abc igs kf 914 into Flash WITHOUT erase y If you do not erase Flash memory and if there was file duplication the dialog continues Erase flash device before writing confirm n File abc igs kf 914 already exists it will be invalidated Invalidate existing copy of abc igs kf in flash memory confirm y Copy abc igs kf 914 from TFTP server as abc igs kf 914 into Flash WITHOUT erase y August 1997 Page 7 33 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual rit If the configuration was modified but not saved you are asked to save the configuration System configuration has been modified Save confirm If you confirm to save the configuration you might also receive this message Warning Attempting to overwrite an NVRAM configuration previously written by a different version of the system image Overwrite the previous NVRAM configuration confirm Users with open Telnet connections are notified of the system reload as xSystem going down for Flash upgrade If the TFTP process fails the copy operation is retried up to thre times If the failure happens in the middle of a copy operation so only part of the file has been written to Flash memory the retry does not erase Flash memory unless you specified an erase operatio
334. our IGRP autonomous system number 1 15 Configure CLNS No Configure bridging no Configure IPX no yes Configure XNS no Configure Apollo no 10 Enter the ISDN BRI switch type for the router The ISDN switch type appropriate for the router depends on the ISDN provider s equipment This table lists the ISDN switch types Enter ISDN BRI Switch Type none besic 5ess Country ISDN Switch Type Description Australia basic ts013 Australian TS013 switches Europe basic 1tr6 German ITR6 ISDN switches basic nwnet3 Norwegian NET3 ISDN switches phase 1 basic net3 NET3 ISDN switches UK and others vn2 French VN2 ISDN switches August 1997 Page 16 9 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Country ISDN Switch Type Description vn3 French VN3 ISDN switches Japan ntt Japanese NTT ISDN switches North America basic Sess AT amp T basic rate switches basic dms100 NT DMS 100 basic rate switches basic nil National ISDN 1 switches New Zealand basic nznet3 New Zealand NET3 switch Configuring the Ethernet or Token Ring Interfaces Take these steps to configure the Ethernet or Token Ring interface to allow communication over a LAN To configure the interface param eters you need to know your Ethernet or Token Ring interface net work addresses In this example the system is being configured for an Ethernet LAN using IP 1
335. our devices to be used as depicted in this Frame Relay network Perform the tasks in these sections as necessary to configure Frame Relay switching e Enable Frame Relay Switching e Configure a Frame Relay DTE Device DCE Switch or NNI Sup port e Specify the Static Rout Enable Frame Relay Switching In global configuration mode enable packet switching before config uring it on a Frame Relay DTE or DCE or with Network to Network Interface NNI support frame relay switching Configure a Frame Relay DTE Device DCE Switch or NNI Support In interface configuration mode configure an interface as a DTE de vice or a DCE switch or as a switch connected to a switch to support NNI connections frame relay intf type dce dte nni DCE is the default Specify the Static Route In interface configuration mode specify a static route for PVC switch ing frame relay route in dlci out interface out dlci August 1997 2524UM Page 13 29 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Example PVC Switching Configuration You can configure your router as a dedicated DCE only Frame Relay switch Switching is based on DLCIs The incoming DLCI is exam ined and the outgoing interface and DLCI are determined Switching takes place when the incoming DLCI in the packet is replaced by the outgoing DLCI and the packet is sent out the outgoing interface In this example the router switches two PVCs between interfac
336. outer Card User s Manual Page A 2 August 1997 2524UM AISwitch Release Notes AI2524 Version 1 00 Router Card August 1997 Applied Innovation Inc 5800 Innovation Drive Dublin Ohio 43016 3271 614 798 2000 800 247 9482 FAX 614 798 1770 RN194 AI2524 Router Card Version 1 00 Release Notes August 1997 Copyright Copyright 1983 1997 Applied Innovation Incorporated AII The material discussed in this manual is the proprietary property of AII and AII retains all rights to reproduction and distribution of this document AlSwitch AISwitch Series 180 and AISwitch Series 130 are regis tered trademarks of Applied Innovation Inc Any other trademarks appearing in this documentation are regis tered trademarks of their respective companies FCC Warning The Federal Communications Commission has set limits for emit ted radio interference and the AISwitch is constructed with this elec tromagnetic interference EMI limitation in mind The AISwitch is classified under FCC regulations as a Class A device that is a device for use in commercial environments and not in residential areas This device has been tested and shown to comply with the following FCC rule Part 15 Subpart J Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference to radio and TV reception requiring the user to take whatever steps are necessary to correct the interference Information is available from the FCC describing p
337. p file name When you omit the device the system uses the default device specified by th cd command If you try to copy a file into Flash memory and that file is already in Flash memory a prompt informs you that a file with the same nam already exists The new file replaces the existing file The first copy o the file still resides within Flash memory but it is rendered unusable in favor of the newer version and is listed with the deleted tag when you use the show flash command If you terminate the copy pro cess the newer file is marked deleted because the entire file was not copied and is invalid In this case the original file in Flash memory is still available to the system Page 7 4 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images This example demonstrates the use of the copy tftp flash com mand to copy a system image named gs7 k when Flash memory is too full to copy the file The filename gs7 k can be in lowercase or upper case the system sees GS7 K as gs7 k If more than one file of the sam name is copied to Flash regardless of case the last file copied is th valid file env chassis copy tftp flash IP address or name of remote host 255 255 255 255 dirt Translating DIRT domain server 255 255 255 255 OK Name of file to copy gs7 k Copy gs7 k from 131 108 13 111 into flash memory confirm Flash is filled to capacity Erasure is needed before flash may be written Erase flash before
338. packets and maximum packet size of 128 bytes ac cording to the standards any SVC can be negotiated to use these val ues Thus when XOT receives a call from an older XOT implementation it can specify in the Call Confirm packet that thes flow control values must revert to the lowest common denominator What the older XOT implementations required was that the source and destination XOT router use the same default flow control values on the two X 25 interfaces that connect the SVC Consequently connections with mismatched flow control values were created when this assump Page 12 38 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps tion was not true resulting in mysterious problems The current imple mentation s practice of signaling the values in the Call Confirm packet avoids these problems Occasionally the older XOT implementation will be connected to a piece of X 25 equipment that cannot handle modification of the flow control parameters in the Call Confirm packet These configurations should be upgraded to use a more recent version of XOT when up grade is not possible XOT s behavior causes a migration problem In this situation you may configure the Cisco IOS software to cause XOT to obtain unspecified flow control facility values from the desti nation interface s default values Modify XOT s source of unencoded flow control values by adding the option use tcp if defs when enabling X 25 routing in global
339. parately and add them each to the same rotary group Beginning in global configuration mode set up the dialer rotary inter face for the BRI interfaces 1 Specify the dialer rotary interface interface dialer number Specify the protocol address for the dialer rotary interface ip address address mask Enable PPP encapsulation encapsulation ppp Specify in band dialing dialer in band Specify the dialer idle timeout period using the same timeout pe riod as the individual BRI interfaces dialer idle timeout seconds Page 11 22 August 1997 2524UM 10 Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps Map the next hop protocol address and name to the dial string needed to reach it dialer map protocol next hop address name hostname spc speed 56 64 broadcast dial string isdn subaddress Specify the dialer load threshold using the same threshold as the individual BRI interfaces dialer load threshold load Control access to this interface by adding it to a dialer access group dialer group group number Optional Enable PPP CHAP authentication ppp authentication chap Enable Multilink PPP ppp multilink If you do not use PPP authentication procedures your telephone ser vice must pass caller ID information Beginning in global configuration mode configure each of the BRIs to belong to the same rotary group 1 Specify one of the BRI interfaces interface bri number Spec
340. pf spf delay spf holdtime Configure OSPF over On Demand Circuits The OSPF on demand circuit is an enhancement to the OSPF protocol that allows efficient operation over on demand circuits like ISDN X 25 SVCs and dial up lines This feature supports RFC 1793 ex tending OSPF to Support Demand Circuits With this feature periodic hellos are suppressed and the periodic re freshes of LSAs are not flooded over the demand circuit To configure OSPF for on demand circuits perform these tasks 1 Enable OSPF operation router ospf process id 2 Configure OSPF on an on demand circuit ip ospf demand circuit If the router is part of a point to point topology then only one end of the demand circuit must be configured with this command However all routers must have this feature loaded If the router is part of a point to multipoint topology only the multi point end must be configured with this command Implementation Considerations Because LSAs that include topology changes are flooded over an on demand circuit it is advised to put demand circuits within OSPF August 1997 2524UM Page 8 9 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Network Illustration This list outlines key features supported in OSPF implementation Stub areas Definition of stub areas is supported Route Routes learned via any IP routing protocol redistribution can be redistributed into any other IP routing protocol At th
341. ple File Exit indicates that you should select the File menu and then select the Exit menu item Screen output Screen shots system prompts and error messages displayed on the screen are shown in this style CONFIG PORT LPORT 40 HPORT 47 BITS 8 CONFIG PORT LPORT 48 HPORT 49 BITS 7 CONFIG PORT LPORT 50 BITS 8 0778 Warning Warning messages indicate critical informa tion required for your safety or for correct system operation For example Warning Failure to heed this important text could cause damage or unre liable results August 1997 2524UM Page 1 7 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Page 1 8 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 2 AI2524 Overview Chapter 2 AI2524 Overview Introduction ACTIVITY LINK E D A B 3 s o O zZ a fo o m This chapter describes the Cisco IOS software features and the AI2524 hardware specifications The AI2524 multi protocol router adds the Cisco Internetworking Operating System IOS routing software to the NEBS compliant AISwitch 180 Series The AI2524 adds leading edge routing capabilities through TCP IP and OSI networks to the AI 180 Switch protocol conversion and data port concentration capabili ties The AI2524 is designed for reliable connectivity to a Wide Area Net work WAN It can provide WAN DCN connections to centralized operations support systems from central office based LAN LCN
342. ple Typical LAPB Configuration In this example the frame size N1 window size k and maximum retransmission N2 parameters retain their default values The en capsulation interface configuration command sets DCE opera tion to carry a single protocol IP by default The lapb t1 interfac configuration command sets the retransmission timer to 4 000 milli seconds 4 seconds for a link with a long delay or slow connecting DTE device Modify LAPB Protocol Parameters X 25 Level 2 or LAPB operates at the data link layer of the OSI refer ence model LAPB specifies methods for exchanging data in units called frames detecting out of sequence or missing frames retrans mitting frames and acknowledging frames Several protocol parame August 1997 2524UM Page 12 49 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual ters can be modified to change LAPB protocol performance on particular link Because X 25 operates the PLP on top of the LAPB protocol these tasks apply to both X 25 links and LAPB links The pa rameters and their default values are summarized in this table Values TONAR Command or Default Parameter R anges Set the modulo Lapb modulo 8 or 128 8 modulus Set the window lapb k window l mod 7 size K size ulo minus 1 frames Set the maxi lapb n1 bits Bits must Based on mum bits per be a mul hardware frame N1 tiple of 8 MTU and protocol overhead Set the count for lapb n2 trie
343. priate for your network 1 Enter enable mode Router gt enable password enablepassword 2 Enter configuration mode Router config term Router config 3 Assign an IP address to the serial port on the module Router config interface serial port_number Router config if ip address ipaddress suLnetmask Router config if no keepalive 4 Enter the framing type and line code type substituting framing_type with sf Superframe o esf Extended Super frame and linecode_type with ami alternate mark inversion o b8zs bipolar eight zero substitution Router config if service module tl framing framing_type Router config if service module tl linecode linecode typ 5 Ifyou are using fractional T1 service enter the time slot range and speed In this example the time slot range is from 1 to 20 and the speed is 64 kbps Router config f service module tl timeslots 1 20 speed 64 August 1997 Page 16 17 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 6 Return to user EXEC mode Router config if exit Router config exit Router exit Router gt Specifying the You can enter multiple boot commands in the configuration in pecilying p g Boot Method NVRAM to provide a backup method for loading the Cisco IOS image onto the router The router boots using the first boot command that succeeds If you enter multiple boot commands the router executes them in the order they are entered There a
344. ption 0 location is determined by user authenti cation Option 1 dialing string and Option 3 E 164 number Return calls are made through the same dialer rotary group but not necessarily the same line as the initial call Note If the return call fails because the line is not answered or the line is busy no retry occurs If the callback server has no interface available when attempting the return call it does not retry August 1997 2524UM Page 11 13 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Configure a Router as a Callback Client Beginning in global configuration mode configure a router interface as a callback client 1 Specify the interface interface serial number Enable DDR Set parity on synchronous serial interfaces and asyn chronous interfaces dialer in band no parity odd parity Enable PPP encapsulation encapsulation ppp Enable CHAP or PAP authentication ppp authentication chap pap Map the next hop address to the host name and phone number dialer map protocol next hop address name hostname dial string Enable the interface to request PPP callback for this callback map class ppp callback request Optional Configure a dialer hold queue to store packets for this callback map class dialer hold queue packets timeout seconds Example PPP Callback Client The PPP callback client is configured on an ISDN BRI interface in a router in Dallas The callback client does not requir
345. r for these applications To configure less common X 25 interface parameters for these special needs perform these tasks as needed e Configure the X 25 Level 3 Timers e Configure X 25 Addresses e Establish a Default Virtual Circuit Protocoll e Disable Packet Level Protocol PLP Restarts Configure the X 25 Level 3 Timers The X 25 Level 3 retransmission timers determine how long the Cisco IOS software waits for acknowledgment of control packets You can set these timers independently Only those timers that apply to the in terface are able to be configured A DTE interface does not have the T1x timers and a DCE interface does not have the T2x timers To set the retransmission timers perform any of these tasks in inter face configuration mode e Set DTE T20 Restart Request x25 t20 seconds August 1997 2524UM Page 12 9 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit e Set DCE T10 Restart Indication x25 t10 seconds e Set DTE T21 Call Request x25 t21 seconds Set DCE T11 Incoming Call x25 t11 seconds Set DTE T22 Reset Request x25 t22 seconds Set DCE T12 Reset Indication x25 t12 seconds e Set DTE T23 Clear Request x25 t23 seconds e Set DCE T13 Clear Indication x25 t13 seconds Configure X 25 Addresses When establishing SVCs X 25 uses addresses in the form defined by the ITU T Recommendation for X 121 An X 121 address has from zero to 15 digits Because of the importance of a
346. rable size and service rate A broadcast queue is given a maximum transmission rate throughput limit measured in both bytes per second and packets per second The queue is serviced to ensure that no more than this maximum is pro vided The broadcast queue has priority when transmitting at a rate below the configured maximum and hence has a guaranteed minimum bandwidth allocation The two transmission rate limits are intended to avoid flooding the interface with broadcasts The actual transmission rate limit in any second is the first of the two rate limits that is reached In interface configuration mode create a broadcast queue frame relay broadcast queue size byte rate packet rate Configure Payload Compression You can configure payload compression on point to point or multi point interfaces or subinterfaces Payload compression uses the stac method to predict what the next character in the frame will be Becaus the prediction is done packet by packet the dictionary is not con served across packet boundaries Payload compression on each virtual circuit consumes approximately 40 kilobytes for dictionary memory e Configure payload compression on a specified multipoint inter face or subinterface frame relay map protocol protocol address dlci payload compress packet by packet e Configure payload compression on a specified point to point in terface or subinterface frame relay payload compress packet by packet
347. rameters When you define a map class for Frame Relay you can define the av erage and peak rates in bits per second allowed on virtual circuits as sociated with the map class You can also specify either a custom queue list or a priority queue group to use on virtual circuits associ ated with the map class optional Beginning in global configuration mode define a map class 1 Specify a map class to define map class frame relay map class name 2 Define the traffic rate for the map class frame relay traffic rate average peak 3 Specify a custom queue list frame relay custom queue list number 4 Specify a priority queue list frame relay priority group number Define Access Lists You can specify access lists and associate them with the custom queue list defined for any map class The list number specified in th access list and the custom queue list tie them together See the appropriate protocol chapters for information about defining access lists for the protocols you want to transmit on the Frame Relay network Define Priority Queue Lists for the Map Class You can define a priority list for a protocol and a default priority list The number used for a specific priority list ties the list to the Frame Relay priority group defined for a specified map class For example if you enter th frame relay priority group 2 command for the map class fast_vcs and then you enter th prior ity list 2 protocol decnet
348. ration mode frame relay interface dlci dlci option If you define a subinterface for point to point communication you cannot reassign the same subinterface number to be used for multi point communication without first rebooting the router or access server Instead you can simply avoid using that subinterface numbe and use a different subinterface number instead Examples Basic Subinterface In this example subinterface 1 models a point to point subnet and sub interface 2 models a broadcast subnet For emphasis the multipoint keyword is used for serial subinterface 2 even though a subinterface is multipoint by default encapsulation frame relay interface serial 0 1 point to point ip address 10 0 1 1 255 255 255 0 frame relay interface dlci 42 interface serial 0 2 multipoint ip address 10 0 2 1 255 255 255 0 frame relay map 10 0 2 2 18 Addressing on Multipoint Subinterfaces If you specified a multipoint subinterface in Step 3 under Define Frame Relay Subinterfaces perform the tasks in one or both of the these sections e Accept Inverse ARP for Dynamic Address Mapping on Multi point Subinterfaces e Configure Static Address Mapping on Multipoint Subinterfaces August 1997 2524UM Page 13 21 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit You can configure some protocols for dynamic address mapping and others for static address mapping Accept Inverse ARP for Dynamic Address Mapping on Multipoint Sub
349. re you can retrieve other system images and config uration files from a network server and modify them for use in you routing environment This section describes tasks related to retrieving system images and configuration files for modification Retrieve System Images and Configuration File Task List When retrieving system images and configuration files perform these tasks The first two are required the rest are optional e Copy System Images from a Network Server to Flash Memory e Copy Configuration Files from a Network Server to the Router e Change the Buffer Size for Loading Configuration Files e Verify the Image in Flash Memory e Display System Image and Configuration Information e Reexecute the Configuration Commands in Startup Configuration e Clear the Configuration Information Copy System Images from a Network Server to Flash Memory You can copy system images from a Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP server to Flash memory 1 Make a backup copy of the current system software image Refer to Copy System Images from Flash Memory to a Network Server for more information 2 Copy asystem image to Flash memory copy tftp flash 3 When prompted enter the server IP address or domain name ip address or name 4 If prompted enter the server system filename filename 5 If prompted enter the Flash memory device that is to receive th copy of the system image device August 1997
350. re two ways to load the Cisco IOS image from Flash memory or from a TFTP server on the network 1 Flash memory Information stored in Flash memory is not vulnerable to network failures that might occur when you load system software from servers In this example replace filename with the filename of the Cisco IOS image Router gt enable Password enablepassword Router configure terminal Router config boot system flash filename Router config Ctrl Z Router copy running config startup config Building configuration OK Router exit Router gt Page 16 18 August 1997 2524UM Router gt Chapter 16 Basic Configuration 2 TFTP server If Flash memory is not available or if Flash memory does not con tain a valid Cisco IOS image you can specify that system software be loaded from a TFTP server on your network as a backup boot method for the router In this example replace filename with the filename of the Cisco IOS image and replace IP address with the IP address of the TFTP server enable Password enablepassword Router configure terminal Router config boot system tftp filename ipaddress Router config Ctrl Z Router copy running config startup config Building configuration OK Router exit Router gt August 1997 Page 16 19 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Checking the Enter the show version command to check the software version Configuration
351. rea2 plus system ID and area3 plus system ID where the system ID is the same A router can dynamically learn about any adjacent router As part o this process the routers inform each other of their area addresses If two routers share at least one area address the set of area addresses of the two routers are merged The merged set cannot contain more than three addresses If there are more than three the three addresses with the lowest numerical values are kept and all others are dropped Beginning in global configuration mode configure multiple area ad dresses in IS IS areas 1 Enable IS IS routing and enter router configuration mode router isis tag 2 Configure NETs for the routing process The router can have up to three NETs Enter each command separately Examples NETs Configuration These are examples of configuring NETs for both ISO IGRP and IS IS ISO IGRP This example illustrates specifying a NET net 47 0004 004d 0001 0000 0c11 1111 00 clns host NAMI This example illustrates using a name for a NET E 39 0001 0000 0c00 1111 00 router iso igrp Marketing net NAME Page 9 24 August 1997 2524UM Pil Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps The use of this net router configuration command configures the sys tem ID area address and d omainaddress Only a single NET per rout ing process is allowed router iso igrp local net 49 0001 0000 0c00 1111 00 IS IS This example i
352. red and will boot with the configuration you entered Using AutolInstall The AutoInstall process is designed to configure the router automati cally after connection to your WAN For AutoInstall to work properly a Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP host on your network must be reconfigured to provide the required configura tion files The TCP IP host may exist anywhere on the network as long as these conditions are maintained 1 The host must be on the remote side of the router s synchronous serial connection to the WAN 2 User Datagram Protocol UDP broadcasts to and from the router and the TCP IP host must be enabled This functionality is coordinated by your system administrator at th site where the TCP IP host is located You should not attempt to us AutoInstall unless the required files have been provided on the TCP IP host AutoInstall works on synchronous serial connections only Take these steps to prepare your router for the AutoInstall process 3 Attach the WAN cable to the router Page 16 4 August 1997 2524UM Cit Chapter 16 Basic Configuration 4 Turn ON power to the router The router will load the operating system image from Flash mem ory If the remote end of the WAN connection is connected and properly configured the AutoInstall process will begin If AutoInstall successfully completes you can write the configu ration data to the router s NVRAM Perform this step to compl
353. relay map command to display the result ing compression and encapsulation characteristics the IP map has in herited passive TCP IP header compression Router gt show frame relay map Serial l administratively down ip 131 108 177 177 dici 177 0xB1 0x2C10 static broadcast CISCO TCP IP Header Compression inherited passive inherited Example Using an IP Map to Override TCP IP Header Compression This example shows the use of a Frame Relay IP map to override the compression set on the interface interface serial 1 encapsulation frame relay ip address 131 108 177 178 255 255 255 0 frame relay map ip 131 108 177 177 177 broadcast nocompress frame relay ip tcp header compression passive Use the show frame relay map command to display the result ing compression and encapsulation characteristics the IP map has not inherited TCP header compression Serial 1 administratively down ip 131 108 177 177 dlci 177 0xB1 0x2C10 static broadcast CISCO Page 13 42 August 1997 2524UM interface serial 1 Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps Disable TCP IP Header Compression You can disable TCP IP header compression by using either of two commands that have different effects depending on whether Fram Relay IP maps have been explicitly configured for TCP IP header compression or have inherited their compression characteristics from the interface Frame Relay IP maps that have explicitly configur
354. ress the X 121 address that has zero digits is a special case The router acts as the destination host for any call it re ceives that has the null destination address Understand X 25 Subaddresses A subaddress is an X 121 address that matches the digits defined for the interface s X 121 address but has additional digit s after the base address X 25 acts as the destination host for an incoming Packet As sembler Disassembler PAD call with a destination that is a subad dress of the interface s address the trailing digits specify which line a PAD connection is requesting Other calls that use a subaddress can be accepted if the trailing digit s are zeros otherwise the router will not act as the call s destination host Configure an Interface Alias Address You can supply alias X 121 addresses for an interface This allows the interface to act as the destination host for calls having a destination ad dress that is neither the interface s address an allowed subaddress o the interface nor the null address Local processing for example IP encapsulation can be performed only for incoming calls whose destination X 121 address matches the serial interface or alias of the interface In global configuration mode configure an alias x25 route position x121 address pattern cud pattern alias type number August 1997 Page 12 11 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Suppress or Replace the Calling Address Some
355. ression of outgoing encapsula tion traffic Several restrictions apply to X 25 payload compression e The compressed virtual circuit must connect two Cisco routers because X 25 payload compression is not standardized The data packets conform to the X 25 protocol rules so a com pressed virtual circuit can be switched through standard X 25 equipment However only Cisco routers can compress and de compress the data e Only datagram traffic can be compressed although all the encap sulation methods supported by Cisco routers are available For ex ample an IETF multiprotocol virtual circuit can be compressed SVCs cannot be translated between compressed and uncom pressed data nor can PAD data be compressed August 1997 2524UM Page 12 23 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit e X 25 payload compression must be applied carefully Each compressed virtual circuit requires significant memory re sources for a dictionary of learned data patterns and computation resources every data packet received is decompressed and every data packet sent is compressed Excessive use of compression can cause unacceptable overall performance e X 25 compression must be explicitly configured for map com mand A received call that specifies compression will be rejected if the corresponding host map does not specify the compress option An incoming call that does not specify compression can however be accepted by a map that specifies
356. rial 0 clns router iso igrp remot Assign Multiple Area Addresses to IS IS Areas IS IS routing supports the assignment of multiple area addresses on the same router This concept is referred to as multihoming Multi homing provides a mechanism for smoothly migrating network ad dresses as e Splitting up an area Nodes within a given area can accumulate to a point that they are difficult to manage cause excessive traffic or threaten to exceed the usable address space for an area Multiple area addresses can be assigned so that you can smoothly partition a network into separate areas without disrupting service e Merging areas Use transitional area addresses to merge as many as three separate areas into a single area that share a common area address e Transition to a different address You may need to change an are address for a particular group of nodes Use multiple area address es to allow incoming traffic intended for an old area address to continue being routed to associated nodes August 1997 Page 9 23 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit router iso igrp Finance You must statically assign the multiple area addresses on the router You can assign up to three area addresses on the AI2524 The number of areas allowed in a doma inis unlimited All the addresses must have the same system ID For example you can assign one address areal plus system ID and two additional ad dresses in different areas a
357. ring the no form of the command may not prevent telco line providers from looping your router in esf mode because fractional T1 T1 telcos use facilities data link messages to initiate loopbacks If you enable the service module t1 remote loopback command the loopback remote commands on the FT1 T1 CSU DSU module will not be successful Page 14 4 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 14 T1 Interface Configuration Steps Specify Timeslots To define timeslots for FT1 T1 module type this in interface configu ration mode service module t1 timeslots range all speed 56 64 This command specifies which timeslots are used in fractional T1 op eration and determines the amount of bandwidth available to the route in each timeslot The range specifies the DSO timeslots that constitute the FT1 T1 chan nel The range is from 1 to 24 where the first timeslot is numbered 1 and the last timeslot is numbered 24 Specify this field by using a series of subranges separated by commas The timeslot range must match the timeslots assigned to the channel group In most cases the service pro vider defines the timeslots that comprise a channel group Use th no form of this command to select all FT1 T1 timeslots transmitting at 64 kbps which is the default To use the entire T1 line enable the service module T1 timeslots all command August 1997 2524UM Page 14 5 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Page 14 6 August 1997 25
358. rnet 0 thernet 0 clns router isis Page 9 20 August 1997 2524UM interface ethernet 1 clns router isis interface serial 0 clns router isis router isis Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps 4 Enable IS IS routing on ethernet 1 5 Enable IS IS routing on serial 0 Level2 Routing Only This example illustrates a similar configuration featuring a single area address being used for specification of Level 1 and Level routing However in this case interface serial interface 0 is configured for Level 2 routing only Most comment lines have been eliminated from this example to avoid redundancy net 47 0004 004d 0001 0000 0c00 1111 00 interfac thernet 0 clns router isis interfac thernet 1 clns router isis interface serial 0 clns router isis 1 Configure a level 2 adjacency only for interface serial 0 isis circuit type level 2 only router isis areal OSI Configuration This example illustrates an OSI configuration example In this exam ple IS IS runs with two area addresses metrics tailored and different circuit types specified for each interface Most comment lines have been eliminated from this example to avoid redundancy 1 Enable IS IS routing in area 1 August 1997 2524UM Page 9 21 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 2 Router is in areas 47 0004 004d 0001 and 47 0004 004d 0011 net 47 0004 004d 0001 0000 0c11 1111 00 net 47 0004 004d 0011 0000 0c11 1111 00
359. rotocol configuration mode Description of the interactive help system Specify a neighbor router Enable routing on an IP network Negate or set default values of a command Add or subtract offset from IGRP RIP or HELLO metrics Suppress routing updates on an interface Redistribute information from another routing protocol Adjust routing timers IPX Router Configuration Mode Internet Packet Exchange IPX is a Novell network layer protocol In this example IPX RIP routing is configured Router config ipx router rip Router config ipx router Novell router configuration commands distribute list exit Filter networks in routing updates Exit from IPX routing protocol configuration mode help Description of the interactive help system network Enable routing on an IPX network no Negate or set default values of a command redistribute Enable routing protocol redistribution Page 4 16 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 4 Understanding the User Interface Route Map Configuration Mode Use the route map configuration mode to configure routing table and source and destination information In this example a route map named arizonal is configured Router config route map arizonal Router config route map Route Map configuration exit help match no set 2 commands Exit from route map configuration mode Description of the interactive help system atch values from routing table Negate or
360. router However an autonomous system boundary router does not by default generate a default route into the OSPF routing domain To force the autonomous system boundary router to generate a default route type this command in router configuration mode default information originate always metric metricvalue metric type type value route map map name Configure Lookup of DNS Names You can configure OSPF to look up Domain Naming System DNS names for use in all OSPF show command displays This featur makes it easier to identify a router because it is displayed by nam rather than by its router ID or neighbor ID To configure DNS name lookup type this command in global config uration mode ip ospf name lookup August 1997 2524UM Page 8 7 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Force the Router ID Choice with a Loopback Interface OSPF uses the largest IP address configured on the interfaces as its router ID If the interface associated with this IP address is ever brought down or if the address is removed the OSPF process must re calculate a new router ID and resend all its routing information over its interfaces If a loopback interface is configured with an IP address the Cisco IOS software will use this IP address as its router ID even if other inter faces have larger IP addresses Since loopback interfaces never go down greater stability in the routing table is achieved To configure an IP address on a
361. rovide a mechanism for supporting par tially meshed Frame Relay networks Most protocols assume transitiv ity on a logical network that is if station A can talk to station B and station B can talk to station C then station A should be able to talk to station C directly Transitivity is true on LANs but not on Fram Relay networks unless A is directly connected to C Additionally certain protocols such as transparent bridging cannot b supported on partially meshed networks because they require split horizon in which a packet received on an interface cannot be trans mitted out the same interface even if the packet is received and trans mitted on different virtual circuits Page 13 18 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps Configuring Frame Relay subinterfaces ensures that a single physical interface is treated as multiple virtual interfaces This capability allows us to overcome split horizon rules Packets received on one virtual in terface can now be forwarded out another virtual interface even if they are configured on the same physical interface Subinterfaces address the limitations of Frame Relay networks by pro viding a way to subdivide a partially meshed Frame Relay network into a number of smaller fully meshed or point to point subnet works Each subnetwork is assigned its own network number and ap pears to the protocols as if it is reachable through a separate interface Note Po
362. rp capricorn clns router iso igrp cancer 7 Specify iso igrp routing on interface ethernet 2 using the tag can cer interfac thernet 2 clns router iso igrp cancer Page 9 14 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps Example Dynamic Interdomain R outing Figure 9 7 and the example configurations illustrate how to configur three domains that are to be transparently connected Figure 9 7 CLNS Dynamic Interdomain R outing Router Chicago This configuration shows how to configure Router Chicago for dy namic interdomai nrouting 1 Define a tag A for the routing process router iso igrp A 2 Configure the NET for the process in area 2 domai n47 0007 0200 net 47 0007 0200 0002 0102 0104 0506 00 3 Redistribute iso igrp routing information througho u t domainA redistribute iso igrp B August 1997 Page 9 15 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 4 Define a tag B for the routing process router iso igrp B 5 Configure the NET for the process in area 3 domai n47 0006 0200 net 47 0006 0200 0003 0102 0104 0506 00 6 Redistribute iso igrp routing information througho u t domainB redistribute iso igrp A 7 Specify iso igrp routing with the tag A interfac thernet 0 clns router iso igrp A 8 Specify iso igrp routing with the tag B interface serial 0 clns router iso igrp B Page 9 16 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Con
363. rt Department techsupp aiinet com Investment Relations invest aiinet com Feedback for Engineering R amp D feedback aiinet com About SNMP snmp aiinet com Webmaster webmaster aiinet com Documentation Department aidoc aiinet com Page 1 4 August 1997 2524UM Cif Chapter 1 Introduction Text Conventions Important concepts throughout this manual are emphasized with these special text styles Buttons Function buttons that appear on a screen ar shown in regular body text and enclosed in square brackets For example Close Send Commands In command lines type text that appears in this style exactly as shown avdumpdb BNC OFF Press the lt Return gt or lt Enter gt key after all commands Variable Variable arguments are text that you specify Arguments They are shown in italics For example avaccess switch_name In this case switch_name is variable text To enter the command type avaccess and then the actual name of the switch Ellipses signify that the preceding argu ment can be repeated a number of times For example Cat filename means that you would typ cat followed by one or more filenames August 1997 Page 1 5 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Optional Arguments Some arguments are optional This means that you have the choice of including them or not Optional arguments are shown enclosed in square brackets which are not
364. rted on synchronous and asynchronous serial interfaces When using CHAP or PAP authentication each router or access server iden tifies itself by a name This identification process prevents a route from placing another call to a router to which it is already connected and prevents unauthorized access Access control using CHAP or PAP is available on all serial interfaces that use PPP encapsulation The authentication feature reduces the risk of security violations on your router or access server You can config ure either CHAP or PAP for the interface Note To use CHAP or PAP you must be running PPP encapsulation When CHAP is enabled on an interface and a remote device attempts to connect to it the local router or access server sends a CHAP packet to the remote device The CHAP packet requests or challenges the re mote device to respond The challenge packet consists of an ID a ran dom number and the host name of the local router The required response consists of two parts e An encrypted version of the ID a secret password or secret and the random number e Either the host name of the remote device or the name of the user on the remote device When the local router or access server receives the response it verifies the secret by performing the same encryption operation as indicated in August 1997 2524UM Page 11 3 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit the response and looking up the required host name or user
365. rver filename 4 Confirm the entry Y The command prompts you for the destination host s address and a filename as the following example illustrates This example copies configuration file from a router to a TFTP server Tokyo copy running config tftp Remote host 131 108 2 155 Name of configuration file to write tokyo confg Write file tokyo confg on host 131 108 2 155 confirm y Writing tokyo confg OK August 1997 Page 7 23 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Perform Startup Tasks The startup tasks in this section are optional Startup Task List You can perform these optional startup tasks e Partition Flash Memory Using Dual Flash Bank e Use Flash Load Helper to Upgrade Software on Run from Flash Systems Partition Flash Memory Using Dual Flash Bank Dual Flash bank allows you to partition banks of Flash memory into separate logical devices so that the router can hold and maintain two different software images A bank is a set of four chips No down time is required you can write software into Flash memory while run ning software in another bank of Flash memory Systems that Support Dual Flash Bank To use dual Flash bank you must have at least two banks of Flash memory The minimum partition size is the size of a bank Dual Flash bank is supported on low end systems that have at least two banks of Flash memory including systems that support a single SIMM that has two ba
366. s decnet Interface DECnet config commands delay Specify interface throughput delay description Interface specific description exit Exit from interface configuration mode frame relay Set frame relay parameters ip Interface Internet Protocol config commands ipx Novell interface subcommands isis IS IS commands iso igrp ISO IGRP interface subcommands no Negate a command or set its defaults ntp Configure NTP shutdown Shutdown the selected interfac Router Configuration Mode Router configuration commands configure an IP routing protocol Router config router bgp Border Gateway Protocol BGP egp Exterior Gateway Protocol EGP igrp Interior Gateway Routing Protocol IGRP isis ISO IS IS iso igrp IGRP for OSI networks ospf Open Shortest Path First OSPF rip Routing Information Protocol RIP static Static CLNS Routing August 1997 Page 4 15 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual rit This example displays how a router is configured to support the Rout ing Information Protocol RIP Router config router rip Router config router router configuration commands default information default metric distance distribute list exit help neighbor network no offset list passive interface redistribute timers Control distribution of default information Set metric of redistributed routes Define an administrative distance Filter networks in routing updates Exit from routing p
367. s Steps 1 2 and 3 are completed by the central administra tor Step 4 is completed by the person at the remote site 1 2 Modify the existing router s configuration to support Autolnstall Set up the TFTP server to support AutolInstall Set up the BOOTP or RARP server if needed A BOOTP or RARP server is required for AutoInstall using an Ethernet Token Ring FDDI or Frame Relay encapsulated serial interface With a Frame Relay encapsulated serial interface the existing router acts as the BOOTP server A BOOTP or RARP server is not required for AutoInstall using an HDLC encapsulated serial interface Connect the new router to the network Modify the Existing Router s Configuration You can use any of these interfaces An HDLC encapsulated serial line the default configuration for serial line An Ethernet Token Ring FDDI interface A Frame Relay encapsulated serial line Use an HDLC Encapsulated Serial Interface Connection To set up Autolnstall via a serial line with HDLC encapsulation the default you must configure the existing router Perform these steps beginning in global configuration mode 1 Configure the serial interface that connects to the new router with HDLC encapsulation the default and enter interface configura tion mode interface serial interface number Enter an IP address for the interface The host portion of the ad dress must have a value of or 2 AutoInstall over Frame Relay does
368. s 1 255 20 sending frames tries N2 Set the retrans lapb t1 milli 1 64000 3000 mission timer seconds millisec T1 onds Set the hard lapb inter 0 dis ware outage face outage abled period milliseconds Set the idle link lapb t4 seconds 0 dis period T4 abled August 1997 2524UM Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps e LAPB Modulo and LAPB K The LAPB modulo determines the operating mode Modulo 8 basic mode is widely available be cause it is required for all standard LAPB implementations and is sufficient for most links Modulo 128 extended mode can achieve greater throughput on high speed links that have a low er ror rate some satellite links for example by increasing the num ber of frames that can be transmitted before waiting for acknowledgment as configured by the LAPB window parameter k By its design LAPB s k parameter can be at most one less than the operating modulo Modulo 8 links can typically send seven frames before an acknowledgment must be received modulo 128 links can set k to a value as large as 127 By default LAPB links use the basic mode with a window of 7 LAPB N1 When connecting to an X 25 network use the N1 pa rameter value set by the network administrator This value is the maximum number of bits in an LAPB frame which determines the maximum size of an X 25 packet When you are using LAPB over leased lines the N1 parameter should be eight times the h
369. s are sent during call setup to prevent echo cancelers from damaging digital data The transmission of these cancelers may increase call setup times by 8 seconds on the 4 wire module Having echo cancellation enabled does not affect dat traffic This configuration command is ignored if the network type is DDS Use the no form of this command to enable the default service pro vider AT amp T is enabled by default on the 4 wire 56 64 module Sprint is enabled by default on the 2 wire switched 56 module Page 15 4 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 16 Basic Configuration Chapter 16 Basic Configuration Connecting to the Network Configuring Connecting to an Ethernet Network The AI2524 can be connected to an Ethernet network by e Using a straight through 10BaseT cable to connect the 10BaseT port to a 10BaseT hub e Using a crossover 10BaseT cable to connect the 10BaseT port to a PC network interface card Connecting toa WAN e If you have a 4 wire 56K 64K DSU CSU module use a straight through RJ 48S to RJ48S cable to connect the RJ 48S port to an RJ48S jack e If you have a FT1 T1 DSU CSU module use a straight through RJ 48C to RJ48C cable to connect the RJ 48C port to an RJ48C jack e If you have asynchronous serial module use a transition cable to connect the synchronous serial port to a modem or DSU CSU This chapter describes how to configure the AI2524 router and de scribes the following Booting the Router
370. s chapter contains a link to the AI2524 Cisco IOS v 11 2 documen tation Command References Refer to the Cisco Command Reference chapters on the AI2524 Cisco IOS v 11 2 documentation CD Security Command Referenc Wide Area Networking Command Reference Network Protocols Command Reference Part 1 Network Protocols Command Reference Part 2 Network Protocols Command Reference Part 3 Bridging and IBM Networking Command Reference August 1997 2524UM Page 17 1 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Page 17 2 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 18 System Error Messages Chapter 18 System Error Messages Introduction This chapter contains a link to the AI2524 Cisco IOS v 11 2 documen tation System Error Messages Refer to the Cisco Command Reference chapters on the AI2524 Cisco IOS v 11 2 documentation CD August 1997 2524UM Page 18 1 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Page 18 2 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 19 Debug Command Reference Chapter 19 Debug Command Reference Introduction This chapter contains a link to the AI2524 Cisco IOS v 11 2 documen tation Debug Command Reference Refer to the Cisco Command Reference chapters on the AI2524 Cisco IOS v 11 2 documentation CD August 1997 2524UM Page 19 1 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Page 19 2 August 1997 2524UM Appendix A Release Notes Appendix A Release Notes August 1997 2524UM Page A 1 AI2524 R
371. s flow control values to be defined if they differ from the interface defaults Each XOT connection relies on a TCP session to carry traffic If you do not enable TCP keepalives XOT PVCs might encounter problems if one end of the connection is reloaded When the reloaded host at tempts to establish a new connection the other host refuses the new connection because it has not been informed that the old session is no longer active Recovery from this state requires the other host to be in formed that its TCP session is no longer viable so that it attempts to reconnect the PVC Example Remote PVC Tunneling In the more complex example shown in Figure 12 5 the connection between points A and B is switched and the connections between Page 12 36 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps point C and points A and B are tunneled Keepalives are enabled to maintain connection notification Figure 12 5 Local Switching and Remote Tunneling PVCs Ethemet PLAN 172201 1 T i Configuration for Router X service tcp keepalives in service tcp keepalives out interfac ip address 172 20 1 1 255 255 255 0 f interface serial 0 x25 ltc 5 x25 pvc 1 interface serial 1 pvc 1 x25 pve 2 tunnel 172 20 1 2 interface serial 0 pvc 1 interface x25 lte 5 x25 pvc 1 interface serial 0 pve 1 x25 pve 2 tunnel 172 20 1 2 interface serial 0 pve 2 August 1997 Page 12 37 2524UM AI2524 Router C
372. s of a point to point connection Frames from the remote users are accepted by the ISP POP stripped of any linked framing or transparency bytes encapsulated in L2F and forwarded over the appropriate tunnel The customer s home gateway accepts these L2F frames strips the L2F encapsulation and processes the incoming frames for the appropriate interface Note This implementation of VPDN supports PPP dial up only To configure virtual private dial up networks complete these tasks e Understand VPDNs e Beginning in global configuration mode configure a virtual tem plate for interfaces on a home gateway access server e Configure Incoming VPDN Connections on the Home Gateway e Configure Outgoing VPDN Connections on the Network Access Server Understand Virtual Private Dial up Networks VPDN enables users to configure secure networks that take advantag of internet service providers that tunnel the company s remote access traffic through the ISP cloud Remote offices or mobile users can connect to their home network using local dial up services of third parties The dial up service pro vider agrees to forward the company s traffic from the ISP POP to a company run home gateway Network configuration and security re main in the control of the client The dial up service provider provides a virtual pipe between the company s sites Page 11 26 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps No
373. scribes how to configure synchronous serial interfaces p g y Configure the The synchronous serial interfaces are configured to allow connection y g Synchronous to WANs Once the Ethernet or Token Ting port on your router has been configured complete these steps to configure the synchronous Serial Interfaces serial interfaces 1 Press lt Enter gt or type yes to configure serial port 0 Configuring interface Serial0 Is this interface in use yes 2 Determine which protocols you want on the synchronous serial interface and enter the appropriate responses Configure IP on this interface yes Configure IP unnumbered on this interface no IP address for this interface 172 16 73 1 Number of bits in subnet field 8 Class B network is 172 16 0 0 8 subnet bits mask is 255 255 2595 0 Configure AppleTalk on this interface no yes Extended AppleTalk network yes AppleTalk starting cable range 2 4 AppleTalk ending cable range 3 4 AppleTalk zone name myzone ZZ Serial AppleTalk additional zone name Configure IPX on this interface no yes IPX network number 2 B002 August 1997 Page 10 1 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 3 Configure the second synchronous serial interface for example Configuring interface Serial 1 Is this interface in use yes Configure IP on this interface yes Configure IP unnumbered on this interface no IP address for this interf
374. se redistribution between areas Re distribution only occurs for Le vel2 routing 1 In global configuration mode configure the router to redistribute routing information into the ISO IGRP domain August 1997 2524UM Page 9 45 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit e Specify the routing protocol and tag if applicable into which you want to distribute routing information router iso igrp tag e Specify one or more ISO IGRP routing protocol and tag if appli cable you want to redistribute redistribute iso igrp tag route map map tag e Specify the IS IS routing protocol and tag if applicable you want to redistribute redistribute isis tag route map map tag e Specify the static routes you want to redistribute redistribute static clns ip 2 Beginning in global configuration mode configure the router to redistribute routing information into the IS IS domains e Specify the routing protocol and tag if applicable into which you want to distribute routing information router isis tag e Specify the IS IS routing protocol and tag if applicable you want to redistribute redistribute isis tag route map map tag Warning By default static routes are redistributed into IS IS You can conditionally control the redistribution of routes between routing domains by defining route maps between the two domains Route maps allow you to use tags in routes to influence route redistri bution 3 I
375. serrissresrssresresreseserrrereerse 11 3 Example CHAP with an Encrypted Password escescesecseecsseceeceeeesaeees 11 5 Enable Link Quality Monitoring LQM ceeccceescessseceeseeceeceeceaeeeeaeceeaeeceeeeeeeeeaees 11 6 Configure Automatic Detection of Encapsulation Type cccecssseceseceteceneeeseeeeees 11 7 Configure Compression Of PPP Dat 0 ceeccceecceesscceeseeceeneeceeeeeeaeceeaaeceeeeeeseesteeeaes 11 7 Configure IP Address Pooling 0 ee eeeeecesseeesceescecsseceseceaecnaecneeeaaecsaecaeceseceaeesesenee 11 8 Peer Address Allocation eee eeeesesseesscecsseceseceaeceseceseeeseeeeeeseeeeseceeceneeeaees 11 8 Preced nce Rules i sehen l chee nis coda eee nd ee 11 9 Interfaces Affected isc siccsecvadedes inst actoneaeiebicz cahesvee aat epii dens alean Ea d ees 11 10 Choose the IP Address Assignment Method 0 ce eeeesceseceteceseceseeeeeeeseens 11 10 Define the Global Default Mechanism 0 ee eeceeeeeseeeseeeneeeneeenaeceaecnaeeneens 11 10 Corifigure PPP Call Back s s6steesci ai sesieceveidat E onan digiti waite E E E cea 11 13 Configure a Router as a Callback Client 0 ec cceeccceecceeeteceeneeceeeeeetneeeeaeeas 11 14 Example PPP Callback Client ceccescescsseceseceeeeseeeeeeeesaeesseecaaecsaesneeeaees 11 14 Configure a Router as a Callback Serve oo eee eeeeseessecseceeceeceeceseeeseeeaeens 11 15 Example PPP Callback Servera aeie nnion a aa E 11 16 Disable or Reenable Peer Neighbor Routes
376. server does not find a valid system image or if you interrupt the boot sequence the system might enter ROM mon itor mode From ROM monitor mode you can boot the device or per form diagnostic tests Page 4 8 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 4 Understanding the User Interface You can also enter ROM monitor mode by entering the reload EXEC command and then pressing lt Break gt during the first 60 sec onds of system startup To save changes to the configuration file us the copy running config startup config command be fore issuing the reload command gt state Toggle cache state for help B filename TFTP Server IP address TFTP Server Name Load and execute system image from ROM or from TFTP server C address Continue execution optional address D S MLV Deposit value V of size S into location L with modifier E SML Examine location L with size S with modifier M G address Begin execution H Help for commands T Initialize K Stack trace L filename TFTP Server IP address TFTP Server Name Load system image from ROM or from TFTP server but do not begin execution O Show configuration register option settings P Set the break point S Single step next instruction T function Test device for help Deposit and Examine sizes may be B byte L long or S short Modifiers may be R register or S byte swap Register names are D0 D7 A0 A6 SS US SR and PC To return to user EXEC m
377. sh command The RE ADME file is copied to the network server automatically when you in stall the system software image on the server Note If the checksum value does not match the value in the README file do not reboot the router Instead issue the copy command and compare the checksums again If the checksum is repeatedly wrong copy the original system software image back into Flash memory before you reboot the router from Flash memory If you have a corrupted image in Flash memory and try to boot from Flash the router will start the system image contained in ROM assuming that booting from a network server is not configured If ROM does not contain a fully functional system image the router will not function and must be reconfigured through a direct console port connection Display System Image and Configuration Information Perform these tasks in EXEC mode to display information about sys tem software system image files and configuration files 1 List information about Flash memory including system image filenames and amounts of used and remaining memory show flash August 1997 Page 7 9 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit 2 List information about Flash memory including system image filenames amounts of memory used and remaining and Flash par titions show flash all chips detailed err partition number all chips detailed err summary 3 View the console output generated during
378. shold 255 balanced interface BRI1 no ip address encapsulation ppp dialer idle timeout 500 dialer rotary group 0 dialer load threshold 255 balanced interface BRI2 no ip address encapsulation ppp dialer idle timeout 500 dialer rotary group 0 dialer load threshold 255 balanced I interface Dialer0 ip address 99 0 0 2 255 0 0 0 encapsulation ppp dialer in band dialer idle timeout 500 dialer map ip 99 0 0 1 name atlanta broadcast 81012345678901 dialer load threshold 255 balanced dialer group 1 ppp authentication chap ppp multilink August 1997 2524UM Page 11 25 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Configure Virtual Private Dial up Networks Virtual private dial up networks VDPN allow separate and autono mous protocol domains to share common access infrastructure includ ing modems access servers and ISDN routers VPDN uses the Level 2 Forwarding protocol L2F which permits the tunneling of link level frames Using L2F tunneling an Internet Service Provider ISP or other ac cess service can create a virtual tunnel to link a customer s remote sites or remote users with corporate home networks In particular a net work access server at the ISP s Point of Presence POP exchanges PPP messages with the remote users and communicates by L2F re quests and responses with the customer s home gateway to set up tun nels L2F passes protocol level packets through the virtual tunnel between endpoint
379. sion Frame Relay maps will have to b configured individually to support TCP IP header compression Configure an Individual IP Map for TCP IP Header Compression TCP IP header compression requires Cisco encapsulation If you need to have IETF encapsulation on an interface as a whole you can still configure a specific IP map to use Cisco encapsulation and TCP header compression In addition even if you configure the interface to perform TCP IP header compression you can still configure a specific IP map not to compress TCP IP headers You can specify whether TCP IP header compression is active or pas sive Active compression subjects every outgoing packet to TCP IP header compression Passive compression subjects an outgoing TCP IP packet to header compression only if the packet had a compressed TCP IP header when it was received Page 13 40 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps In interface configuration mode configure an IP map to use Cisco encapsulation and TCP IP header compression frame relay map ip ip address dlci broadcast cisco tcp headercompression active passive The default encapsulation is cisco Note An interface that is configured to support TCP IP header compression cannot also support priority queuing or custom queuing Configure an Interface for TCP IP Header Compression You can configure the interface with active or passive TCP IP header compression Activ
380. sks if an interface is in use If so the facility prompts you to provide an IP ad dress and subnet mask bits for the interface Enter the subnet mask bits as a decimal value such as 5 This example shows the portion of the streamlined setup command fa cility that prompts for interface parameters In the example the facility is prompting for Ethernet0 interface parameters and Serial0 interface parameters Configuring interface Ethernet0 Is this interface in use yes Configure IP on this interface yes IP address for this interface 192 195 78 50 Number of bits in subnet field 0 5 Class C network is 192 195 78 0 5 subnet bits mask is 255 255 255 248 Configuring interface Serial0 Is this interface in use yes Configure IP on this interface yes IP address for this interface 192 195 78 34 Number of bits in subnet field 5 Class C network is 192 195 78 0 5 subnet bits mask is 255 255 255 248 The configuration information you provide on this screen is temporary and exists only so you can boot your system When you reload the sys tem your original configuration remains intact If your startup config uration is corrupted enter the setup command facility and configur the basic parameters Then issue the copy running config startup config command to write this configuration to NVRAM Page 5 28 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 6 Using the System Configuration Dialog Chapter 6 Using the System Conf
381. sre A iavecn ied REEE E E acess 9 8 Intermediate Systems IS and End Systems ES eecceeecceesseceeneeeeeeeeeteees 9 8 Static ROUN G 33 5 sone eG die ee ee i ee a 9 9 Routing Decisions s cc ciseccesnedie adie aed edoi a e e eia aE E e TE 9 9 Configure ISO IGRP Dynamic Routing 2 0 0 cee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseesece ceeeeeeseneesaeeeaenes 9 10 Enable SO IGRP ienai ae ae A ah cee aa oas 9 10 Example Dynamic Routing within the Same Area eeeeeeeeeeeeeererrereree 9 11 Example Dynamic Routing in More Than One Are oo eee eeeeseceecrteeneeeeee 9 12 TOC 4 August 1997 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Example Dynamic Routing in Overlapping Areas 200 0 ce eeeeeseceseceteceteeeeee 9 13 Example Dynamic Interdoma inRouting cece ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeees 9 15 Configure ISO IGRP Parameters 0 ccc seesssecssecseceeceeeeseeeseeeseeeeneeeaeeeaeenes 9 17 Configure IS IS Dynamic Routing oc eee eeeeseeeseeeseeeseecneeceaeceseceaeceseesseesseeeeeesaeeaes 9 19 Enable IS IS e aa areae saeevihs aA E E e E Aa T 9 19 Examples IS IS Routing Configuration eseeseeeseseesesresresresresreesesrrssrsrrerssrs 9 20 Assign Multiple Area Addresses to IS IS Areas 9 23 Examples NETs Configuration s seeesseeeeseertsseserssererestssrrsresresreesesrrsseseeeree 9 24 Example Router in Two Areas eeseeeeeeresrieresriesereresetsrssrerseseeressesreeseeeree 9 25 Configure IS IS Parameter osuenonsinicioini
382. sresesrrssesrrssresrssrentseesesees 7 37 Use the System Image Instead of Reloading 0 00 eee eeeeseeesecnteceeceeeeeneeees 7 37 Chapter 8 AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps ccccssccssssccsssscsssssccssssssssscees 8 1 IntrOdUction vissst eee weve Suit oA a tert oe eae an eae 8 1 Priable OS PRe ash stents teat ee a atte a a E Reid eas 8 2 Configure OSPF Interface Parameters 0 cee esceeseesseeececaeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeeaeeaes 8 2 Configure OSPF over Different Physical Networks 0 0 0 eeeeeseceseceteeeseeeee 8 3 Configure OSPF Area Parameters cceescessceeseeesseceseceeeeseeeaeesaeeesaecaeeeaenes 8 4 Configure OSPF Not So Stubby Area NSSA ou eeeeeeeeeneeereeeeeeeeenaeeees 8 5 Configure Route Summarization between OSPF Areas ceseesceteceteeeeee 8 6 Configure Route Summarization When Redistributing Routes into OSPF 8 6 Create Virtua CINKS isein entenen piad enr oratii iae a p at Ghee ees 8 7 August 1997 TOC 3 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Generate 4 Default Rottens iascict agents ag cidt aes he tin igiteeete dence ented ogenets 8 7 Configure Lookup of DNS Names 00 eeecceeceeseeseeeseeceeeceaeceseceseeesecneeeeaeenes 8 7 Force the Router ID Choice with a Loopback Interface 0 i e ee eeeeeeeeeeeees 8 8 Disable Default OSPF Metric Calculation Based on Bandwidth 8 8 Configure OSPF on Simplex Ethernet Interfaces ee eee eeeeeeeneeeneeeneeeees 8 8 Co
383. sresssreeresrsresrs 2 7 Chapter 3 Configuration Overview sseessecsssocssocssscessoecsocecocesoccssocceocoscocssoosssseesseee 3 1 Introduction esee onenen e a a a aee e e senas 3 1 Boot Router for First TMe neien a nesteen nade aa edp io ae aeo ieies 3 1 Configure the Router sansin e a AL el ins ane eed ee 3 2 Using Configuration Mod ooo eeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeaeceaeceaeeaeeeseesaaecsaecaeeaeenaes 3 2 SHOW Configurations cocsc iedustescieeees eee RERNA fects cd dee ec este leven vedanta added eevee 3 3 Save the Configuration aenep aeniea des re a Ea ten pect cates ncveclevyie eataa a taikaha p Te 3 4 Configuration Overviews i ceccisies leads teehee edad is ee dd Senet ee 3 4 Use Configuration Builder cece eeeceeeseeeseeeneecssecnaeceaeceseceseensecaaecnaeeaeeeaes 3 4 Use the Command Interpreter ceeeseceseceneceeceseceseeeseeseeesseeeeneeeaeeeaeenes 3 4 Use the Web Browser Interface ceecceceecceesseceeececececeeeeeeaeceeaeeceeeeeeeaeesaees 3 6 Configuration Storage and Hot Swap uo ces eseesecsseceseceeceeceeceeeeeseesseeeeeeesecneeeeseenaes 3 6 Always Modify the Configuration Using Menu 4 18 00 eeeceseceseeeeeeeees 3 6 Store the Configuration on the AI198 Card oo eeeceeeeeeneeeneeeneecnaeenaeenees 3 6 Chapter 4 Understanding the User Interface ssscssssccssssccssssccssseccsssscsssecces 4 1 Introduction eneee teehee ae cea EA SR ens 4 1 Command Line Interfaces urei to ai E dives neti ode EEA O
384. ssscssssscssssccsssscssssssssseees 12 1 Introduction enn hiai ane toneph aid a ind r lated badayend e s ari iais 12 1 X29 CONT UrAUON aeo ae a a a a aa a a aa a O A 12 1 X25 Configuration Task Listrier cernita a oeri E RAE 12 1 Conti g re Interac i erer ae an EEn N AE EO E E 12 2 Set the X 25 M0d vais niat ek eine Adele ERE Wine etl ete ees 12 2 Set the Virtual Circuit Ranges cee eee eeceeseeeneeeneeeseecnseceaecesecsseeeeeeseesaeees 12 3 Example Virtual Circuit Ranges cc eiceeceecesceseeseeeeeeeeeaeeeseecsaecaecneseeees 12 4 Set the Packet Numbering Modulo oe ecesseessecsseceeceeceeeceseceseeeseeeaeenes 12 5 Set the X 12 1 Addressee erise ieni i ER EAEE TE R E 12 5 Set the Default Flow Control Values 0 ccc eeceessecsseceseceteceeceneceseeeeeeeaeenes 12 6 Example Typical X 25 Configuration eecseseeseeeseeeseeeneeenaeceaeceaeeaeens 12 7 Configure Additional X 25 Interface Parameters 0 0 0 0 ceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeneeeeseens 12 9 Configure the X 25 Level 3 Timers cc ceccesceseceneceseceeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeaeesaeeeees 12 9 Configure X 25 Addresses rererere npt e ir a S 12 10 Establish a Default Virtual Circuit Protocol eseseeeeseeeereereeresrresrerrssrsees 12 12 Disable Packet Level Protocol PLP Restarts cccccccccessceceesteseeeeneeeeees 12 13 Configure an X 25 Datagram Transport sssesseseereesesetesesesreesessresresrrsteeerrrssereresrssees 12 13 Config re S binterfac Sso s oiire e
385. st 1997 2524UM Page 3 1 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Configure the Router If a valid configuration file is not found in NVRAM the router runs the System Configuration Dialog so you can configure it manually For normal router operation there must be a valid Cisco IOS image in Flash memory and a configuration file in NVRAM The first time you boot your router you will need to configure the router interfaces and then save the configuration to a file in NVRAM You can configure the router using one of these procedures Configuration mode Recommended if you are familiar with Cisco IOS software commands Refer to the Understanding the User In terface chapter AutoInstall Recommended for automatic installation if another router running Cisco IOS software is installed on the network This configuration method must be set up by someone with expe rience using Cisco IOS software Refer to the Use AutoInstall chapter System Configuration Dialog Recommended if you are not famil iar with Cisco IOS commands Refer to th Using the System Con figuration Dialog chapter Use the procedure that best fits the needs of your network configura tion and level of Cisco IOS software experience Using Configuration Mode You can configure the router manually if you prefer not to use Auto Install or the System Configuration Dialog Take these steps to config ure the router manually 1 Would you like to nter
386. st name and minimal configuration automatically Use Tel August 1997 2524UM Page 5 15 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit net to connect to the new router from the existing router and use the setup facility to configure the rest of the interfaces For example th line in the network confg or cisconet cfg file could be similar to ip host newrouter 131 108 170 1 This host configuration file contains the minimal set of commands needed for AutolInstall using SLARP or BOOTP enable password letmein I line vty 0 password letmein end The preceding example shows a minimal configuration for connecting from a router one hop away From this configuration use the setup fa cility to configure the rest of the interfaces If the router is more than one hop away you also must include routing information in the mini mal configuration This example minimal network configuration file maps the new router s IP address 131 108 10 2 to the host name newrouter The new router s address was learned via SLARP and is based on the exist ing router s IP address of 131 108 10 1 ip host newrouter 131 108 10 2 Set Up the BOOTP or RARP Server If the new router is connected to the existing router using an Ethernet Token Ring or FDDI interface you must configure a BOOTP or RARP server to map the new router s MAC address to its IP address If the new router is connected to the existing router using a serial line with HDLC encapsul
387. st route to group Name an existing telnet connection Open a X 29 PAD connection Send echo messages Resume an active telnet connection Show running system information Display information about terminal lines Open a telnet connection Set terminal line parameters Open a tn3270 connection Trace route to destination List active telnet connections Set X 3 parameters on PAD Enter XRemote mod Privileged EXEC Mode Commands Because many of the privileged commands set operating parameters privileged access should be password protected to prevent unautho rized use If the system administrator has set a password you are prompted to enter it before being allowed access to privileged EXEC mode Th password is not displayed on the screen and is case sensitive If a pass word has not been set privilege EXEC mode can be accessed only from the router console The system administrator uses the enable password global configuration command to set the password that restricts access to privileged EXEC mode The privileged command set includes those commands contained in user EXEC mode as well as the configure command through which you can access the remaining command modes Privileged EXEC mode also includes high level testing commands such as de bug August 1997 2524UM Page 4 7 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Router gt enable Password Router Exec commands
388. stall process fails over HDLC the Cisco IOS software auto matically configures Frame Relay encapsulation Note For Token Ring interfaces only those that set ring speed 1 with physical jumpers support AutoInstall AutoInstall does not work with Token Ring interfaces for which the ring speed must be set with software configuration commands If the ring speed is not set the interface is set to shutdown mode You must complete Step 1 and either Step 2 or 3 A configuration file for the new router must reside on a TFTP server This file can contain the minimum or full configuration needed for the administrator to Telnet into the new router for con figuration In addition make sure to complete one of the next two procedures A file named network confg also must reside on the server The file must have an Internet Protocol IP host name entry for the new router The server must be reachable from the existing router Page 5 2 August 1997 2524UM Cid Chapter 5 Using AutoInstall 3 An IP address to host name mapping for the new router must be added to a Domain Naming System DNS database file e Ifthe existing router is to help automatically install the new route via an HDLC encapsulated serial interface using Serial Line Ad dress Resolution Protocol SLARP that interface must be config ured with an IP address whose host portion has the value 1 or 2 AutolInstall over Frame Relay does not have this address con strain
389. subinterface x25 map protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address option And or establish an encapsulation PVC for the subinterface x25 pve circuit protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address option August 1997 2524UM Page 12 15 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Note When configuring IP routing over X 25 you might need to make adjustments to accommodate split horizon effects Refer to the Configuring IP Routing Protocols chapter in the Network Protocols Configuration Guide Part I for details about how the Cisco IOS software handles possible split horizon conflicts By default split horizon is enabled for X 25 networks Example Point to Point Subinterface Configuration This example creates a point to point subinterface and maps IP to a re mote host interface Serial0 1 point to point x25 map ip 172 20 170 90 170090 broadcast Map Protocol Addresses to X 121 Addresses This section describes the X 25 single protocol and multiprotocol en capsulation options that are available and describes how to map proto col addresses to an X 121 address for a remote host This section also includes reference information about how protocols are identified Understand Protocol Encapsulation for Single Protocol and Mutltiprotocol Virtual Circuits The AI2524 supports encapsulation of a number of datagram protocols across X 25 using a standard method
390. t Subnet masks of any size are supported e Ifthe existing router is to help automatically install the new route using a Frame Relay encapsulated serial interface that interface must be configured with An IP helper address pointing to the TFTP server In this example 171 69 2 75 is the address of the TFTP server ip helper 171 69 2 75 A Frame Relay map pointing back to the new router In this exam ple 172 21 177 100 is the IP address of the new router s serial in terface and 100 is the PVC identifier frame relay map ip 172 21 177 100 100 dlci e Ifthe existing router is to help automatically install the new route via an Ethernet Token Ring or FDDI interface using BOOTP o Reverse Address Resolution Protocol RARP a BOOTP or RARP server also must be set up to map the new router s Media Access Control MAC address to its IP address e IP helper addresses should be configured to forward the TFTP and DNS broadcast requests from the new router to the host providing those services August 1997 Page 5 3 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Use a DOS Based TFTP Server AutoInstall over Frame Relay and other WAN encapsulations support downloading configuration files from UNIX based and DOS based TFTP servers Other booting mechanisms such as RARP and SLARP also support UNIX based and DOS based TFTP servers The DOS format of the UNIX network confg file that must reside on the server must be eight characters
391. t when you configure IS IS dynamic routing You can specify only one IS IS pro cess per router In global configuration mode configure IS IS dynamic routing on the router 1 Enable IS IS routing and enter router configuration mode router isis tag August 1997 2524UM Page 9 19 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit router isis 2 Configure the NET for the routing process net network entity title You can assign a meaningful name for the routing process by using the tag option You can also specify a name for a NET in addition to an address For information on how to assign a name see Specify Short cut NSAP Addresses In interface configuration mode specify the interfaces that should be actively routing IS IS clns router isis tag Warning For IS IS multiple NETs per router are allowed with a maximum of three However only one ISIS process is al lowed whether you run it in integrated mode ISO CLNS only or IP only Examples IS IS Routing Configuration These examples illustrate the basic syntax and configuration command sequence for IS IS routing Levell and Level2 Routing This example illustrates using the IS IS protocol to configure a single area address for Lev ell and Le vel2 routing 1 Route dynamically using the IS IS protocol 2 Configure the NET for the process in area 47 0004 004d 0001 net 47 0004 004d 0001 0000 0c00 1111 00 interfac 3 Enable IS IS routing on ethe
392. ta service DDS lines The subrate line speeds are determined by the ser vice provider Only the 56 kbps line speed is available in switched mode Switched mode is the default on the 2 wire CSU DSU and is enabled by the service module 56k network type interface configuration command on the 4 wire CSU DSU The auto linespeed setting enables the CSU DSU to decipher current line speed from the sealing current running on the network Becaus back to back DDS lines do not have sealing current use the auto set ting only when transmitting over telco DDS lines and using the line clock as the clock source Do not use any form of this command to enable a network line speed of 56 kbps which is the default Warning If the console line speed is changed and saved to NVRAM and the router is reloaded the router displays this mes sage Failed to change lineO speed The ne line speed is stored in the start up configuration but notin the running configuration In addition changing the line speed on the router prevents connections to the console in terface via the AII8S5DP the line speed on the router and the AI185 must be set to 9600 bps The default consol speed for the Cisco router is also set at 9600 bps Page 15 2 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 15 56 64 kbps Switched and Digital Data Services DDS Interface Enable Scrambled Data Coding Change between DDS and Switched Dial Up Modes In interface configuration mode prev
393. ta link checksum be purged by the receiver which causes the initiator of the LSP to regenerate it However if a network has a link that causes data corruption while still delivering LSPs with correct data link checksums a continuous cycle of purging and regenerating large numbers of LSPs can occur rendering the network nonfunc tional In router configuration mode allow the router to ignore LSPs with an internal checksum error ignore lsp errors Page 9 28 August 1997 2524UM oA o Qaa LNS 5 ADJCHANG LNS 5 ADJCHANG pired Fl El ISIS ISIS Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps Log Adjacency State Changes You can configure IS IS to generate a log message when an IS IS ad jacency changes state up or down This may be useful when monitor ing large networks Messages are logged using the system error message facility Messages are in this form Adjacency to 0000 0000 0034 Serial0 Up new adjacency Adjacency to 0000 0000 0034 Serial0 Down hold time In router configuration mode generate log messages when an IS IS adjacency changes state log adjacency changes Change IS IS LSP MTU Size Under normal conditions the default maximum transmission unit MTU size should be sufficient However if the MTU of a link is low ered to less than 1500 bytes the LSP MTU must be lowered accord ingly on each router in the network If this is not done routing will become unpredictable The MTU
394. tatically mapped X 25 hosts 1 Restrict PAD access x25 pad access 2 Configure a host for PAD access x25 map pad x121 address option You can configure outgoing PAD access using the optional features of the x25 map pad command without restricting incoming PAD con nections to the configured hosts Establish an Encapsulation PVC Permanent Virtual Circuits PVCs are the X 25 equivalent of leased lines they are never disconnected You do not need to configure an ad dress map before defining a PVC an encapsulation PVC implicitly de fines a map In interface configuration mode establish a PVC x25 pve circuit protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address option The x25 pvc command uses the same protocol keywords as the x25 map command Encapsulation PVCs also use a subset of the options defined for the x25 map command Page 12 20 August 1997 2524UM interface serial 2 ip address 172 20 1 x25 map ip 172 20 1 x25 pve 4 ip 172 20 interface serial 3 ip address 172 20 1 x25 map ip 172 20 1 x25 pve 3 ip 172 20 3 4 4 3 L Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps Example PVC Used to Exchange IP Traffic This example illustrated in Figure 12 2 demonstrates how to use the PVC to exchange IP traffic between Router X and Router Y Figure 12 2 Establishing an IP Encapsulation PVC through an X 25 Network a S44 Configuration for Router X 2
395. te The MMP feature uses VPDN to connect multiple PPP sessions for which individual dial in calls have arrived on different stack group members VPDN provides speed and reliability for the setup and shutdown of Multilink PPP Complete these steps to create aa VPDN connection between a remote user and the home LAN 1 The remote user initiates a PPP connection to the ISP using the an alog telephone system or ISDN The ISP network access server accepts the connection The ISP network access server authenticates the end user with CHAP or PAP The username is used to determine whether the user is a VPDN client If the user is not a VPDN client the client accesses the Internet or other contacted service The tunnel endpoints the network access server and the home gateway authenticate each other before any sessions are at tempted within a tunnel If no L2F tunnel exists between the network access server and the remote user s home gateway a tunnel is created Once the tunnel exists an unused slot within the tunnel is allocated The home gateway accepts or rejects the connection Initial setup can include authentication information required to allow the home gateway to authenticate the user The home gateway sets up a virtual interface Link level frames can now pass through this virtual interface through the L2F tunnel Figure 11 2 illustrates a VPDN connection from a remote user who makes a local call to the corporate netw
396. ter is accidentally or intentionally rebooted or you are attempting to load a system image from a network server after e You issued an erase startup config command thereby deleting the startup configuration file e You have bit 6 ignore NVRAM configuration set in the config uration register e Your startup configuration has been corrupted e You configured the router to boot from a network server the last four bits of the configuration register are not equal to 0 or 1 and there is no Flash or no valid image in Flash e You configured the router to boot the RXBOOT image The streamlined setup command facility differs from the standard setup command facility because the streamlined facility does not ask you to configure global router parameters You are prompted only to configure interface parameters which permit your router to boot This example shows a router entering the streamlined setup command facility System Configuration Dialog Default settings are in square brackets Configuring interface IP parameters for netbooting August 1997 Page 5 27 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Note The message Configuring interface IP parameters for netbooting only appears if you are booting over a network server and your configuration has insufficient IP information The streamlined setup command facility continues prompting you fo interface parameters for each installed interface The facility a
397. ter B for static interdomainrouting router iso igrp pleiades 1 Configure the network entity title for the routing process net 47 0007 0200 0200 1112 1314 1516 00 2 Define the name sid to be used in place of Router A s NSAP clns host sid 47 0006 0200 0100 0001 0102 0304 0506 00 3 Specify iso igrp routing using the specified tag pleiades interfac thernet 0 clns router iso igrp pleiades 4 Pass ISO CLNS traffic to end systems without routing interface serial 0 clns enable Page 9 40 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps 5 Pass packets bound for sid in dom ain47 0006 0200 through serial 0 clns route 47 0006 0200 sid CLNS routing updates will not be sent on the serial link however CLNS packets will be sent and received over the serial link Configure Variations of the Static Route These tasks include variations of the clns route global configura tion command e Bind the next hop to a specified interface and media address when you do not know the NSAP address of your neighbor Note that this version of the clns route command is not literally applied to a specific interface clns route nsap prefix type number snpa address e Tell the Cisco IOS software to discard packets with the specified NSAP prefix clns route nsap prefix discard e Specify a default prefix clns route default nsap prefix type number Map NSAP Addresses to Media Addresses Conceptually each
398. terface Create one or more local IP address pools ip local pool poolname low ip address high ip address Specify the interface and enter interface configuration mode interface type number Specify the pool for the interface to use peer default ip address pool poolname In global configuration mode define DHCP as the IP address mechanism for an interface Specify the interface and enter interface configuration mode interface type number Specify DHCP as the IP address mechanism on this interface peer default ip address pool dhcp Beginning in global configuration mode define a specific IP ad dress to be assigned to all dial in peers on an interface Specify the interface and enter interface configuration mode interface type number Specify the IP address to assign peer default ip address ip address Beginning in global configuration mode make temporary IP ad dresses available on a per interface basis for dial in asynchronous clients using Serial Line Internet Protocol SLIP or Point to Point Protocol PPP Specify that the access server use a local IP address pool on all asynchronous interfaces ip address pool local Page 11 12 August 1997 2524UM Configure PPP Callback Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps e Create one or more local IP address pools ip local pool default poolname begin ip address range end ip address range e Optional Enter interfac
399. tering n at the erasure prompt This example demonstrates the process of copying a system image named gs7 k into the current Flash configuration when a file named gs7 k already exists env chassis copy tftp flash IP address or name of remote host 131 108 13 111 Name of file to copy gs7 k File gs7 k already exists it will be invalidated Copy gs7 k from 131 108 13 111 into flash memory confirm 2287500 bytes available for writing without erasure Erase flash before writing confirm n OK 1906676 2287500 bytes Verifying via checksum VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV Flash verification successful Length 1902192 checksum 0x12AD The exclamation point indicates that the copy process is taking place Each exclamation point indicates that 1Opackets have been transferred successfully A series of V characters indicates that a checksum verification of the image is occurring after the image is writ ten to Flash memory In this example the Flash security jumper is not installed so you can not write files to Flash memory Also be sure to set the write protect switch on the Flash memory card to unprotected Router copy tftp flash Flash embedded flash security jumper 12V must be strapped to modify flash memory
400. ters e Configure LAPB Priority and Custom Queuing e Configure Transparent Bridging over Multiprotocol LAPB e Monitor and Maintain LAPB and X 25 Configure a LAPB Datagram Transport Set the appropriate LAPB encapsulation to run datagrams over a serial interface One end of the link must be DTE the other must be DCE 1 Specify a serial interface interface serial number Page 12 48 August 1997 2524UM interface serial 3 encapsulation lapb dce lapb t1 4000 Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps 2 In interface configuration mode select an encapsulation and pro tocol if using a single protocol or select the multiple protocol op eration by performing one or more of these tasks e Enable encapsulation of a single protocol on the line using DCE operation encapsulation lapb dce protocol eEnable encapsulation of a single protocol on the line using DTE operation encapsulation lapb dte protocol eEnable use of multiple protocols on the line using DCE opera tion encapsulation lapb dce multi eEnable use of multiple protocols on the line using DTE opera tion encapsulation lapb dte multi Single protocol LAPB defaults to IP encapsulation Multiprotocol LAPB does not support source route bridging or TCP IP header com pression but does support transparent bridging Only protocols sup ported by a single protocol encapsulation are supported by multiprotocol LAPB encapsulation Exam
401. ters and net works over serial lines to LANs or Wide Area Networks WANS It Page 2 2 August 1997 AI2524UM Pid Chapter 2 AI2524 Overview also provides network access to terminals printers workstations and other networks On LANs terminal services support Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP on UNIX machines with Telnet and rlogin connections You can use the router to make connections between hosts and resources running different protocols including router and access server connections to X 25 machines using X 25 Packet Assem bler Disassembler PAD The Cisco IOS software supports three types of server operation Remote Node Ser Connect devices over a telephone network vices Serial Line Internet Protocol SLIP com pressed SLIP CSLIP Point to Point Protocol PPP and X Windows terminal protocol See Figure 2 Terminal Service Connect asynchronous devices to a LAN or WAN through network and terminal emulation software including Telnet and rlogin Protocol Transla Convert one virtual terminal protocol into tion Services another protocol See Figure 2 1 August 1997 Page 2 3 AI2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Figure 2 1 Remote Access Functionality PC TCP PC LAT T Branch Office T Axes Sewer g Terminal LAT Terninal TCP Ances T Terminal Xifindoa sever m Terminal ASCII Tele
402. th Connect a console terminal to the AI2524 and power ON th router When you are prompted to enter the initial dialog type no to go into the normal operating mode of the router initial dialog yes no Page 3 2 August 1997 2524UM Router gt enable Router Chapter 3 Configuration Overview 3 After a few seconds you will see the user EXEC prompt Router gt Enter the enable command to enter enable mode You can only make configuration changes in enable mode The prompt changes to the privileged EXEC enable prompt 4 Enterthe configure terminal command at the enable prompt to enter configuration mode Router configure terminal Show Configuration You can now enter any changes you want to the configuration Refer to the appropriate sections of this manual for help with specific con figurations 5 Press lt Ctrl Z gt to exit configuration mode To see the current operating configuration enter the show run ning config command at the enable prompt Router show running config To see the configuration in NVRAM enter th show startup config command at the enable prompt Router show startup config The results of the show running config and show startup config commands will be different if you have made changes to the configuration but have not yet written them to NVRAM August 1997 2524UM Page 3 3 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Save the Configuration To make your cha
403. th an individual pro tocol address and subnet mask and the interface dlci command associates the subinterface with a specified DLCI Ad dresses of remote destinations for each multipoint subinterface will b resolved dynamically Page 13 22 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps interface Serial0 no ip address encapsulation frame relay frame relay lmi type ansi interface Serial0 103 multipoint ip address 172 21 177 18 255 255 255 0 frame relay interface dlici 300 interface Serial0 104 multipoint ip address 172 21 178 18 255 255 255 0 frame relay interface dici 400 Configure Static Address Mapping on Multipoint Subinterfaces A static map links a specified next hop protocol address to a specified DLCI Static mapping removes the need for Inverse ARP requests when you supply a static map Inverse ARP is automatically disabled for the specified protocol on the specified DLCI You must use static mapping if the router at the other end either does not support Inverse ARP at all or does not support Inverse ARP for a specific protocol that you want to use over Frame Relay To establish static mapping according to your network needs perform one of these tasks in interface configuration mode e Define the mapping between a next hop protocol address and the DLCI used to connect to the address frame relay map protocol protocol address dlci broadcast ietf cisco e Define a DLCI used
404. the Flash load helpe operation show flh log 4 List the configuration information in running memory show running config 5 List the startup configuration information The startup configura tion is usually NVRAM show startup config 6 List the system software release version configuration register setting and so on show version You can also use th o command in ROM monitor mode to list th configuration register settings on some models The Flash memory content listing does not include the checksum of in dividual files To recompute and verify the image checksum after th image is copied into Flash memory type the following in EXEC mode verify flash When you enter this command the screen prompts you for the file name to verify By default it prompts for the last most recent file in Flash Press lt Enter gt to recompute the default file checksum or enter the filename of a different file at the prompt Note that the checksum for microcode images is always 0x0000 Page 7 10 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images This example illustrates how to use this command Router verify flash Name of file to verify gsxx Verifying via checksum VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV Flash verification successful Length 1923712 checksum 0xA0C1 Router Reexecute the Configuration Commands in Startup Configuration You can reexecute the configuration commands stored in NVRAM
405. the address Area routing for a given domai nuses the area address System routing for a given area uses the system ID part The NSAP address is laid out as e The domai npart is of variable length and comes before the area address e The area address is the 2 bytes before the system ID August 1997 2524UM Page 9 3 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit e The system ID is the 6 bytes before the N selector e The N selector S is the last byte of the NSAP address Cisco s ISO IGRP routing implementation interprets the bytes from the AFI up to but not including the area field in the DSP as domai nidentifier The area field specifies the area and the system ID specifies the system Figure 9 3 illustrates the ISO IGRP NSAP addressing structure The maximum address size is 20 bytes Figure 9 3 SO IGRP NSAP Addressing Structure w Cc i 2 6 1 ISO IGRP Mea System domain address address address IS IS NSAP Address An IS IS NSAP address is divided into two parts an area address and a system ID Level 2 routing routing between areas uses the area ad dress Leve 11 routing routing within an area uses the system ID ad dress The NSAP address is laid out as e The area address is the NSAP address not including the system ID and N selector e The system ID is found between the area address and the N selec tor byte e The N selector S is the last byte of the NSAP address Page 9 4 August 1997 2524U
406. then for interface parameters The values shown in brackets next to each prompt are the default values last set using either the setup command facility or the configure command Note The prompts and the order in which they appear on the screen vary depending on the platform and the interfaces installed in the device You must run through the entire System Configuration Dialog until you find the item you intend to change To accept default settings fo items you do not want to change press lt Enter gt To return to the privileged EXEC prompt without making changes and without running through the entire System Configuration Dialog press lt Ctrl C gt The facility also provides help text for each prompt To access help text press the question mark key at a prompt When you complete your changes the setup command facility shows you the configuration command script created during the setup ses sion It also asks you if you want to use this configuration If you an swer Yes the configuration is saved to NVRAM If you answer No the configuration is not saved and the process begins again There is no default for this prompt you must answer either Yes or No Page 5 20 August 1997 2524UM Cif Chapter 5 Using AutoInstall Note If any problems exist with the configuration file pointed to in NVRAM or if the ignore NVRAM bit is set in th configuration register the router enters the streamlined setup command facility Refer
407. third line from the top in this display and configuration register set E ting at the end of this display Settings Router gt shovrsion Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS to XX00 Software XXX X X RELEASE SOFTWARE XX X XXXX XXX Copyright c 1986 1996 by Cisco Systems Inc Compiled Tue XX XXX XX 13 07 by XXXXX Image text base 0x03032810 data base 0x00001000 ROM System Bootstrap Version X X XXXX XXXXX RELEASE SOFTWARE ROM XX00 Bootstrap Softwar XXX BOOT X Version XX X XXXXX XXXXX Router uptime is 4 minutes System restarted by power on System image file is Rflash XXX XXX X X Novl4 booted via flash Cisco XXXX 68030 processor revision X with 4092K 2048K bytes of memory Processor board ID 00000000 Bridging software SuperLAT software copyright 199X by Meridian Technology Cord X 25 software Version X X NET2 BEE and GOSIP compliant TN3270 Emulation software copyright 199X by TGV Inc 1 Ethernet IEEE 802 3 interface 2 Serial network interfaces No module installed for Serial Interface 0 No module installed for Serial Interface 1 32K bytes of non volatile configuration memory 8192K bytes of processor board System flash Read ONLY Configuration register is 0x2102 Router gt Page 16 20 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 17 Command References Chapter 17 Command References Introduction Thi
408. tion Rate CLI Command Line Interface CLNS Connectionless Network Services CMNS Connection Mode Network Service CMNS Connection Mode Network Services CP Control Point CPU Central Processor Unit CSLIP Compressed Serial Line Internet Protocol CSNP Complete Sequence Numer PDU CSU Channel Service Unit CUD Call User Packet D bit Data Bit DCA Defense Communications Agency DCE Data Circuit Terminating Equipment DDN Defense Data Network DDN Defense Data Network DDR Dial on Demand Routing DDS Digital Data Service DE Discard Eligibility DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier DLUR Dependent LU Requester DNIC Data Network Identification Code DSO Digital Signaling 0 DSU Digital Service Unit Page B 2 August 1997 2524UM DTE Data Terminal Equipment EGP Exterior Gateway Protocol ESF Extended Superframe FDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interface FIFO First In First Out FRMR Frame Reject Frame HDLC High level Link Control HDLC High Level Data Link Control HSRP Hot Standby Router Protocol HSSI High Speed Serial Interface ICMP Internal Control Message Protocol IETF Internet Engineering Task Force IGRP Internet Gateway Routing Protocol IP Internet Protocol IPCP IP Control Protocol IPX Internet Packet Exchange IRDP ICMP Router Discovery Protocol ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network IS IS Intermediate System to Inter
409. tion Tasks You modify the boot field from the hardware configuration register or the software configuration register depending on the platform The hardware configuration register can be changed only on the pro cessor card or with dual in line package DIP switches located at the back of the router For information on modifying the hardware config uration register refer to the appropriate hardware installation guide To modify the software configuration register boot field complet these tasks 1 Obtain the current configuration register setting show version 2 Enter configuration mode selecting the terminal option configure terminal 3 Modify the existing configuration register setting to reflect the way in which you want to load a system image config register value 4 To exit configuration mode press lt Ctrl Z gt 5 Reboot the router to make your changes take effect reload Use the show version EXEC command to display the current con figuration register setting In ROM monitor mode use the o command to list the value of the configuration register boot field In this example the show version command indicates the current configuration register is set so the router does not automatically load an operating system image Instead it enters ROM monitor mode and waits for user entered ROM monitor commands The new setting in structs the router to a load a system image from commands in the star tup configuratio
410. tion is displayed in the Web browser window If the command requires a variable a form in which you can enter the variable is displayed August 1997 2524UM Page 4 29 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Enter Commands Using the Command Field Entering the command in the command field is just like entering it at a terminal console If you are uncertain of the options available for particular command type a question mark For example typing show in the command field displays the pa rameters for the show command The Web Browser interface displays the parameters as hypertext links To select a parameter click one of the links or enter the parameter in the command field Enter Commands Using the URL Window You can issue a command using the Universal Resource Locator URL window for the Web browser For example to execute a show configuration command ona router named example you would enter this in the URL window http example exec show configuration The Web browser then displays the configuration for the exampl router To save effort modify the URL in the URL window in the browser control bar instead of retyping the entire URL The difference between entering acommand in the command field and entering a command in the URL window is that in the URL window command modes and options should be separated by slashes not spaces Page 4 30 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 5 Using AutoInstall Chapter 5
411. tion mode enable LQM on the interface ppp quality percentage The percentage argument specifies the link quality threshold That per centage must be maintained or the link is deemed to be of poor quality and taken down Page 11 6 August 1997 2524UM Configure Automatic Detection of Encapsulation Type Configure Compression of PPP Data Chapter 11 AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps You can enable a serial or ISDN interface to accept calls and dynami cally change the encapsulation on the interface when the remote de vice does not signal the call type For example if an ISDN call does not identify the call type in the Lower Layer Compatibility fields and is using an encapsulation that is different from the one configured on the interface the interface can change its encapsulation type on the fly This feature enables interoperation with ISDN terminal adapters that use V 120 encapsulation but do not signal V 120 in the call setup mes sage An ISDN interface that by default answers a call as synchro nous serial with PPP encapsulation can change its encapsulation and answer such calls Automatic detection is attempted for the first 10 seconds after the link is established or for the first 5 packets exchanged over the link which ever is first In interface configuration mode enable automatic detection of encap sulation type autodetect encapsulation encapsulation type You can specify one or more encapsulations
412. to Use the Streamlined Setup Facility for more information This example shows how to use the setup command facility to config ure interface serial 0 and to add ARAP and IP IPX PPP support on the asynchronous interfaces Router setup System Configuration Dialog At any point you may enter a question mark for help Use ctrl c to abort configuration dialog at any prompt Default settings are in square brackets Continue with configuration dialog yes First would you like to see the current interface summary yes Interface IP Address OK Method Status Protocol Ethernet0 WIZ AGO AZ 6 2 YES manual up up Serial0 unassigned YE not set down down Seriall 17216 7252 YES not set up up Configuring global parameters Enter host name Router Th nable secret is a one way cryptographic secret used instead of the enable password when it exists Enter enable secret lt Use current secret gt The enable password is used when there is no enable secret and when using older software and some boot images Enter enable password ww Enter virtual terminal password ww Configure SNMP Network Management yes Community string public Configure DECnet no Configure AppleTalk yes Multizone networks no yes Configure IPX yes Configure IP yes Configure IGRP routing yes Your IGRP autonomous system number 15 August 1997 Page 5 21 2524UM A
413. to pings and traceroute packets Disable Fast Switching Through the Cache Fast switching through the cache is enabled by default for all sup ported interfaces In interface configuration mode disable fast switch ing no clns route cache Warning The cache still exists and is used after the no clns route cache interface configuration command is used the software just does not do fast switching through the cache Page 9 54 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps Set the Congestion Threshold If a router configured for CLNS experiences congestion it sets the congestion experienced bit You can set the congestion threshold on a per interface basis By setting this threshold you cause the system to set the congestion experienced bit if the output queue has more than the specified number of packets in it In interface configuration mode set the congestion threshold clns congestion threshold number Transmit Error Protocol Data Units ERPDUs When a CLNS packet is received the routing software looks in the routing table for the next hop If it does not find one the packet is dis carded and an error protocol data unit ERPDU is sent You can set an interval between ERPDUs Doing so reduces band width if this feature is disabled When you set the minimum interval between ERPDUs the Cisco IOS software does not send ERPDUs more frequently than one per interface per ten milliseconds In i
414. tocols e IP e OSI Connectionless Network Services CLNS and Connection Mode Network Services CMNS IP Routing Protocols The Cisco IOS software supports IP routing protocols including inte rior gateway protocols and exterior gateway protocols Interior Gateway Protocols e Internet Gateway Routing Protocol IGRP e Enhanced IGRP Open Shortest Path First OSPF e Routing Information Protocol RIP and RIP Version 2 e Intermediate System to Intermediate System IS IS Exterior Gateway Protocols e Exterior Gateway Protocol EGP e Router Discovery Protocols e ICMP Router Discovery Protocol IRDP e Hot Standby Router Protocol HSRP Page 2 6 August 1997 AI2524UM Connections Chapter 2 AI2524 Overview External Connection Requirements The AI2524 provides LAN and WAN access in a modular router plat form The router includes an Ethernet AUI or 10BaseT LAN connec tion and accommodates two synchronous serial modules The synchronous serial WAN modules include these external connec tors e Four wire 56 64 kbps DSU CSU WAN module with an RJ 48S connector e Fractional T1 T1 DSU CSU WAN module with an RJ 48C con nector e Five in one synchronous serial WAN module with a DB 60 serial connector The five in one synchronous serial interface supports the following signaling standards EIA TIA 232 EIA TIA 449 V 35 X 21 and EIA 530 August 1997 AI2524UM Page 2 7 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual
415. tree algorithm views each PVC as a sep arate bridge port and a frame arriving on the PVC can be relayed back out a separate PVC Be sure that routing is not enabled when config uring transparent bridging using subinterfaces encapsulation frame relay interface serial 0 1 point to point bridge group 1 relay inter relay inter face serial 0 frame relay inter face dlici 42 face serial 0 2 point to point face dici 64 3 point to point face dlci 73 Configure a Backup Interface for a Subinterface Both point to point and multipoint Frame Relay subinterfaces can be configured with a backup interface This approach allows individual PVCs to be backed up in case of failure rather than depending on th entire Frame Relay connection to fail before the backup takes over You can configure a subinterface for backup on failure only not for backup based on loading of the line If the serial interface has a backup interface it will have precedenc over the subinterface s backup interface in the case of complete loss o connectivity with the Frame Relay network As a result a subinterface backup is activated only if the serial interface is up or if the serial in terface is down and does not have a backup interface defined If a sub interface has failed while its backup is in use and then the serial interface goes down the subinterface backup stays connected Beginning in global configuration mode configure
416. try encapsulation frame relay frame relay map ip 131 108 123 2 48 broadcast ietf August 1997 2524UM Page 13 47 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Interoperability is provided by IETF encapsulation frame relay map ip 131 108 123 3 49 broadcast ietf frame relay map ip 131 108 123 7 58 broadcast This line allows the router to connect with a device running an older version of software frame relay map decnet 21 7 49 broadcast Configure IETF based on map entries and protocol for more flexibil ity Use this method of configuration for backward compatibility and interoperability Example Booting from a Network Server over Frame Relay When booting from a Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP serve over Frame Relay you cannot boot from a network server via a broad cast You must boot from a specific TFTP host Also frame relay map command must exist for the host that you will boot from For example if file gs3 bfx is to be booted from a host with IP address 131 108 126 2 these commands would need to be in the configuration boot system gs3 bfx 131 108 126 2 interface Serial 0 encapsulation frame relay frame relay map IP 131 108 126 2 100 broadcast The frame relay map command is used to map an IP address into a DLCI address To boot over Frame Relay you must explicitly give the address of the network server to boot from and a frame relay map entry must exist for that site For example if fil gs3 bfx 83 2
417. ult Packet Sizes X 25 networks have a default maximum input and output packet siz the preset value is 128 that is defined by your network administrator You must set the Cisco IOS software default input and output maxi mum packet sizes to match those of the network These defaults are the values that an SVC uses if it is set up without explicitly negotiating its Page 12 6 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps maximum packet sizes PVCs also use these default values unless dif ferent values are configured In interface configuration mode set the default input and output max imum packet sizes 1 Set the default input maximum packet size x25 ips bytes 2 Set the default output maximum packet size x25 ops bytes To send a packet larger than the agreed on X 25 packet size over an X 25 virtual circuit the Cisco IOS software must break the packet into two or more X 25 packets with the M bit More data bit set The re ceiving device collects all packets in the M bit sequence and reassem bles them into the original packet It is possible to define default packet sizes that cannot be supported by the lower layer see the LAPB N1 parameter However the router will negotiate lower maximum packet sizes for all SVCs so the agreed on sizes can be carried The Cisco IOS software will also refuse a PVC configuration if the resulting maximum packet sizes cannot be sup ported by the lower layer Ex
418. ult answer press lt Enter gt otherwise enter your re sponse This section gives an example configuration using the System Config uration Dialog When you are configuring your router respond as ap propriate for your network At any time during the System Configuration Dialog you can request help by typing a question mark at a prompt Before proceeding with the System Configuration Dialog obtain from your system administrator the node addresses and the number of bits in the subnet field if applicable of the Ethernet and synchronous se rial ports Take these steps to configure the router using the System Configura tion Dialog 1 Connect a console terminal to the console connector on the rear panel of your router and turn ON power to the router For mor information refer to the section Connecting the Console Terminal and Modem in the chapter Installing the Cisco 2524 Routers The default parameters for the console port are 9600 baud 8 data bits no parity and 2 stop bits 2 After about 30 seconds information similar to this is displayed on the console screen The messages displayed vary depending on the Cisco IOS releas and feature set you selected The screen displays in this section are for reference only and may not exactly reflect the screen displays on your console When you see this information you have successfully booted your router Page 16 6 August 1997 2524UM Cit Chapter 16 Basic Confi
419. um number of SVCs allowed for a map x25 map protocol address protocol2 address2 protocol9 address9 x121 address nvc count Configure the Ignore Destination Time Upon receiving a Clear Request for an outstanding datagram transport Call Request the X 25 encapsulation code immediately tries another Call Request if it has more traffic to send This action can overrun some X 25 switches To define the number of minutes the Cisco IOS software will prevent calls from going to a previously failed destination type this command in interface configuration mode Incoming calls will still be accepted x25 hold vc timer minutes Establish the Packet Acknowledgment Policy You can instruct the Cisco IOS software to send an acknowledgment packet when it has received a threshold of data packets it has not ac knowledged instead of waiting until its input window is full A value of 1 sends an acknowledgment for each data packet received if it can not be acknowledged in an outgoing data packet This approach im proves line responsiveness at the expense of bandwidth A value of 0 restores the default behavior of waiting until the input window is full To establish the acknowledgment threshold type in interface config uration mode x25 th delay count The packet acknowledgment threshold also applies to encapsulation PVCs August 1997 2524UM Page 12 25 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Configure X 25 User Faciliti
420. un the setup command to configure ne wrouter Refer to Use Setup for Configuration Changes for specific information about the setup command If the host configuration file is complete newrouter should be fully op erational You can enter the enable command with the system ad ministrator password at the system prompt on newrouter Then enter the copy running config startup config command to save the information in the recently obtained configuration file into nonvolatile random access memory NVRAM or to the location spec ified by the CONFIG_FILE environment variable If it must reload newrouter simply loads its configuration file from NVRAM If the TFTP request fails or if newrouter still has not obtained the IP addresses of all its interfaces and if those addresses are not contained in the host configuration file then newrouter enters setup mode auto matically Setup mode prompts you for manual configuration of the Cisco IOS software at the console The new router continues to issue broadcasts to attempt to learn its host name and obtain any unresolved interface addresses The broadcast frequency will dwindle to every 10 minutes after several attempts Refer to Use Setup for Configuration Change for specific information about th setup command Page 5 10 August 1997 2524UM Perform the AutoInstall Procedure Chapter 5 Using AutoInstall To dynamically configure a new router using AutoInstall complete these task
421. uration Steps Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps Introduction X 25 Configuration This chapter describes how to configure connections through X 25 networks and Link Access Procedure Balanced LAPB connections This section also describes how to create X 29 access lists and profile scripts For users who only want to configure a simple reliable serial encapsulation method se Configure LAPB X 25 Configuration Task List To configure X 25 complete the tasks in one or more of these sections depending upon the X 25 application or task required for your net work The interface datagram transport and routing tasks are divided into sections based generally on how common the feature is and how often it is used e Configure Interfac e Configure Additional X 25 Interface Parameters e Configure an X 25 Datagram Transport e Configure Additional X 25 Datagram Transport Features e Configure X 25 Routing e Configure Additional X 25 Routing Features e Configure CMNS Routing e Create X 29 Access Lists Create an X 29 Profile Script e Configure LAPB All these features can coexist on an X 25 interface Default parameters are provided for X 25 operation however you can change the settings to meet the needs of your X 25 network or as de fined by your X 25 service supplier The AI2524 also provides addi tional configuration settings to optimize your X 25 usage August 1
422. urce IP Addresses To disable the default function that validates the source IP addresses of incoming routing updates type this command in router configura tion mode no validate update source Network Illustration IGRP advertises three types of routes interior system and exterior as shown in Figure 8 1 Interior routes are routes between subnets in the network attached to a router interface If the network attached to a router is not subnetted IGRP does not advertise interior routes Figure 8 1 Interior System and Exterior Routes AUTOR System 2 Autonomous System 7 Rouler Anterior System routes are routes to networks within an autonomous system The Cisco IOS software derives system routes from directly connected network interfaces and system route information provided by other IGRP speaking routers or access servers System routes do not include subnet information Exterior routes are routes to networks outside the autonomous system that are considered when identifying a gateway of last resort Th Cisco IOS software chooses a gateway of last resort from the list of ex terior routes that IGRP provides The software uses the gateway router of last resort if it does not have a better route for a packet and the destination is not a connected network If the autonomous system has more than one connection to an external network different routers can choose different exterior routers as the gateway of last resort
423. ure TCP IP Header Compression csccescseeeeeseeereeeseeceeensecnaeenees 13 39 Example IP Map with Inherited TCP IP Header Compression 44 13 42 Example Using an IP Map to Override TCP IP Header Compression 13 42 Example Disabling Inherited TCP IP Header Compression ceeeeee 13 43 Example Disabling Explicit TCP IP Header Compression ceee 13 44 Configure Discard Eligibility 0 00 0 lee ceeceeeceseceeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeaeecaaessaesneeeeee 13 45 Configure DLCI Priority Levels cei ceeceecesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeecsaeeaesneseaees 13 45 Monitor the Frame Relay Connections ceeesceseceseceseceseceseeeeeeeeneeeeceseceseeesaeeaeens 13 47 Example Configuration Providing Backward Compatibility 13 47 Example Booting from a Network Server over Frame Relay 00 13 48 Chapter 14 T1 Interface Configuration Steps scccssscssssscssssccssssscsscsseesees 14 1 Introduction s icc s var inane ein eee ee Aas Gh a ee tie Gmelin aaeades 14 1 Configure Bractional Plinioren E E EE E E A tree 14 1 Configuration Overview neheni a a e aaea 14 1 Specify the Clock Sorc eaa a es lee ae a A E aaia 14 1 Enable Data Inversion Before Transmission cseeseeeereeeneeeneeeneeeeaeens 14 1 Specify the Frame Type of a FT T1 Line eseesesereeresreerrsreessserrreseresrsrees 14 2 Specify the CSU Line Build Out ee ceecseencecnaeceaecnaecnaesaeeseeesaeees 14
424. ust 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 4 Understanding the User Interface Warning When using context sensitive help the space or lack of a space before the question mark is significant Get Word Help To obtain a list of commands that begin with a particular character se quence type in those characters followed immediately by the question mark Do not include a space This is called word help because it completes a word for you Get Command Syntax Help To list keywords or arguments enter a question mark in place of a keyword or argument Include a space before the question mark This form of help is called command syntax help because it lists key words or arguments that are applicable based on the command key words and arguments you already have entered Get Help for Abbreviated Commands You can abbreviate commands and keywords to the number of charac ters that allow a unique abbreviation For example you can abbreviat the show command to sh Examples Enter the help command which is available in any command mode for a brief description of the help system Router help Help may be requested at any point in a command by entering a question mark If nothing matches the help list will be empty and you must back up until entering a shows the available options Two styles of help are provided 1 Full help is available when you are ready to enter a command argument e g show and describes each
425. ute ip 10 2 0 2 The routing table forwards calls for X 121 address 100 out interface serial 0 Otherwise calls are forwarded onto serial 1 if the X 121 ad dress contains 100 anywhere within it and contains no CUD Also if the CUD is not the string pad calls are forwarded to serial 1 If the X 121 address contains the digits 100 and the CUD is the string pad the call is forwarded onto serial 2 All X 121 addresses that do not match the first 3 routes are checked for a DNIC of 3306 as the first 4 digits If they do match they are forwarded over serial 3 All other X 121 addresses will match the fifth entry which is a match all pattern and will have a TCP connection established to the IP address 10 2 0 2 The router at 10 2 0 2 will then route the call according to its X 25 routing table This example configures a router that sits on a Tymnet PAD switch to accept calls and have them forwarded to a DEC VAX system This fea ture permits running an X 25 network over a generalized existing IP network thereby making another physical line for one protocol unnec essary The router positioned next to the DEC VAX system is config ured with X 25 routes vax x121 address interface serial 0 ip cisco on tymnet ipaddress These commands route all calls to the DEC VAX X 121 address out to serial 0 where the VAX is connected running PSI All other X 121 ad dresses are forwarded to the cisco on tymnet address through its IP ad
426. uter Card User s Manual Pit Example Hybrid DTE DCE PVC Switching Routers can also be configured as hybrid DTE DCE Frame Relay switches see Figure 13 6 Figure 13 6 Hybrid DTE DCE PVC Switching In this example Router B acts as a hybrid DTE DCE Frame Relay switch It can switch frames between the two DCE ports and between a DCE port and a DTE port Traffic from the Frame Relay network can also be terminated locally In the example three PVCs are defined as e Serial 1 DLCI 102 to serial 2 DLCI 201 DCE switching e Serial 1 DLCI 103 to serial 3 DLCI 301 DCE DTE switching e Serial 2 DLCI 203 to serial 3 DLCI 302 DCE DTE switching DLCI 400 is also defined for locally terminated traffic Page 13 34 August 1997 2524UM Pil Chapter 13 AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps Configuration for Router B frame relay switching interfac thernet 0 ip address 131 108 123 231 255 255 255 0 interface ethernet 1 ip address 131 108 5 231 255 255 255 0 interface serial 0 no ip address shutdown interface serial 1 no ip address encapsulation frame relay frame relay intf type dce frame relay route 102 interface serial 2 201 frame relay route 103 interface serial 3 301 interface serial 2 no ip address encapsulation frame relay frame relay intf type dce frame relay route 201 interface serial 1 102 frame relay route 203 interface serial 3 302 interface serial 3 ip address 131 10
427. ve this message appears There are active users logged into the system Proceed confirm y System flash directory File Length Name status 1 2251320 abc igs kf 914 2251384 bytes used 1942920 available 4194304 total Enter the IP address or the name of the remote host you are copying from Address or name of remote host 255 255 255 255 131 108 1 111 Enter the name of the file you want to copy Source file name abc igs kf 914 Page 7 32 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 7 Manually Loading System Images Enter the name of the destination file Destination file name default source name Accessing file abc igs kf 914 on 131 108 1 111 Loading from 131 108 13 111 Erase flash device before writing confirm If you choose to erase Flash memory the dialog continues The copy tftp flash operation verifies the request from the running image by trying to copy a single block from the remote TFTP server Then the Flash load helper is executed causing the system to reload to th ROM based system image Erase flash device before writing confirm y Flash contains files Are you sure confirm y If the file is not a valid image for the system a warning appears and the system requests a separate confirmation Copy abc igs kf 914 from TFTP server as abc igs kf 914 into Flash WITH erase y SSYS 5 RELOAD Reload requested SFLH rxboot igs kf 914r from 131 108 1 111 to flash If y
428. vents occurring during the download and is particularly useful if the download fails If your router does not find a valid system image or if its configuration file is corrupted at startup and if the configuration register is set to enter ROM monitor mode the system enters ROM monitor mode From this mode you can manually load a system image from Flash memory from a network server file or from ROM You can also enter ROM monitor mode by restarting the router and then pressing lt Break gt during the first 60 seconds of startup Manually Boot from Flash To manually boot from Flash memory 1 Restart the router reload 2 Press lt Break gt during the first 60 seconds of system startup 3 Manually boot the router from Flash boot flash filename August 1997 2524UM Page 7 35 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit In this example a router is manually booted from Flash memory Be cause the optional filename argument is absent the first file in Flash memory is loaded gt boot flash F3 1858656 45204 166896 at 0x1000 Booting gs7 k from flash memory RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR OK 1903912 13765276 bytes F3 1858676 45204 166896 at 0x1000 Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subje
429. ween the DHCP server and the DHCP client Th DHCP client proxy feature manages a pool of IP addresses avail able to dial in clients without a known IP address In global configuration mode enable DHCP as the global default mechanism 1 Specify DHCP client proxy as the global default mechanism ip address pool dhcp proxy client 2 Optional Specify the IP address of a DHCP server for the proxy client to use ip dhcp server ip address name You can provide up to ten DHCP servers for the proxy client the router or access server to use DHCP servers provide temporary IP ad dresses Define Local Address Pooling as the Global Default Mechanism In global configuration mode define local pooling as the global de fault mechanism 1 Specify local pooling as the global default mechanism ip address pool local 2 Create one or more local IP address pools ip local pool default poolname low ip address high ip address If no other pool is defined the local pool called default is used August 1997 2524UM Page 11 11 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual rit Configure Per Interface IP Address Assignment When you have defined a global default mechanism for assigning IP addresses to dial in peers you can then configure the few interfaces for which it is important to have a nondefault configuration You can do any of these 1 In global configuration mode define a nondefault address pool for use on an in
430. when available or a proprietary method when necessary These traditional methods assign a protocol to each virtual circuit If more than one protocol is carried between th router and a given host each active protocol will have at least one vir tual circuit dedicated to carrying its datagrams The AI2524 also supports RFC 1356 a standardized method for en capsulating most datagram protocols over X 25 It also specifies ho one virtual circuit can carry datagrams from more than one protocol The Cisco IOS software can be configured to use any of the available encapsulation methods with a particular host After you establish an encapsulation virtual circuit the Cisco IOS soft ware sends and receives a datagram by simply fragmenting it from and reassembling it into an X 25 complete packet sequence An X 25 com plete packet sequence is one or more X 25 data packets that have the M bit set in all but the last packet A virtual circuit that can carry mul tiple protocols includes protocol identification data as well as the pro tocol data at the start of each complete packet sequence Page 12 16 August 1997 2524UM Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps Understand Protocol Identification The various methods and protocols used in X 25 SVC encapsulation are identified in a specific field of the call packet this field is defined by X 25 to carry CUD Since PVCs do not use the X 25 call setup pro cedures only PVCs do not use CUD t
431. witched service substituting the correct addresses and host names as appropriate for your network Page 16 14 August 1997 2524UM Cit Chapter 16 Basic Configuration 1 Enter enable mode Router gt enable password enablepassword 2 Enter configuration mode Router config term Router config 3 Assign an IP address to the serial port on the module Router config interface serial port_number Router config if ip address ipaddress suLnetmask Router config if no keepalive 4 Set the network type to switched Router config if service module 56k network type switched 5 Set the carrier type where carrier can be ttt sprint or other Router config if service module 56k switched carrier carrier 6 Enter the dialer information Router config if dialer in band Router config if dialer string targetrouter_phonenumber Router config if dialer group groupnumber Router config if exit Router config dialer list groupnumber protocol protocol permit Router config 7 Return to user EXEC mode Router contlg exit Router exit Router gt August 1997 Page 16 15 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit Configuring DDS The 4 wire 56 64 kbps DSU CSU WAN module is configured for DDS which are leased or dedicated lines as the factory default but it can be configured for either switched 56 64 kbps service or DDS Th DDS configuration is described in this sectio
432. work Service Access Point NVRAM Nonvolatile Random Access Memory OSI Open System Interconnection OSPF Open Shortest Path First PAD Packet Assembler Disassembler PAP Password Authentication Protocol PDN Public Data Network PDU Protocol Data Unit PLP Packet Level Protocol POP Point of Presence POP Point of Presence PPP Point to point Protocol PRI Primary Rate Interface PSN Packet Switched Network PSNP Partial Sequence Number PDU PU Physical Unit PVC Permanent Virtual Circuits QLLC Qualified Logical Link Control QOS Quality of Service RIP Routing Information Protocol Appendix B Acronyms August 1997 2524UM Page B 5 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual RIP Routing Information Protocol ROM Read Only Memory RPOA Recognized Private Operation Agency RSRB Remote Source Route Bridging RTMP Routing Table Maintenance Protocol SAP Service Access Point SDLC Synchronous Data Link Control SF Superframe SGBP Stock Group Bidding SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol SMDS Switched Multimegabit Data Service SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SNA Systems Network Architecture SNAP Subnetwork Access Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SR TLB Source Route Translational Bridge SRB Source Route Bridging SRT Source Route Transport SVC Switched Virtual Circuit TAC Terminal Access Controller TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access C
433. writing confirm Erasing flash EPROMs bank 0 Zeroing bank ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Verify zeroed VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV Erasing bank Erasing flash EPROMs bank 1 Zeroing bank ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Verify zeroed VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV Erasing bank Erasing flash EPROMs bank 2 Zeroing bank ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Verify zeroed VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV Erasing bank Erasing flash EPROMs bank 3 Zeroing bank ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Verify zeroed VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV Erasing bank OK 1906676 4194240 bytes Verifying via checksum VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV Flash verification successful Length 1906676 checksum 0x12AD The exclamation point indicates that the copy process is taking place Each exclamation point indicates that 1Opackets have been August 1997 Page 7 5 2524UM AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit transferred successfully A series of V characters indicates that a checksum verification of the image is occurring after the image is writ ten to Flash memory Note If you enter n after the Erase flash before writing prompt the copy process continues If you enter y and confirm the erasure the erase routine begins Be sure you have enough Flash memory space before en
434. ws the Cisco IOS soft ware to advertise different addresses on each interface This is useful if you are doing static routing and need to control the source NET used by the router on each interface In interface configuration mode configure CLNS on an interface 1 Enable ISO CLNS for each interface clns enable 2 Optionally assign an NSAP address to a specific interface clns net nsap address name Examples Basic Static Routing Configuring FDDI Ethernets Token Rings and serial lines for CLNS can be as simple as enabling CLNS on the interfaces This is all that is ever required on serial lines using HDLC encapsulation If all systems on an Ethernet or Token Ring support ISO 9542 ES IS then nothing else is required Example 1 This example illustrates how an Ethernet and a serial line can be con figured 1 Enable clns packets to be routed clns routing 2 Configure this network entity title for the routing process clns net 47 0004 004d 0055 0000 0C00 BF3B 00 Page 9 34 August 1997 2524UM Pid Chapter 9 AI2524 OSI CLNP Configuration Steps 3 Pass ISO CLNS traffic on ethernet 0 to end systems without rout ing interfac thernet 0 clns enable 4 Pass ISO CLNS traffic on serial 0 to end systems without routing interface serial 0 clns enable 5 Create a static route for the interface clns route 47 0004 004d 0099 serial 0 clns route 47 0005 serial 0 Example 2 This is a more complet
435. x25 map cmns 38 8261 18 interface serial 1 encapsulation x25 x25 address 2095551000 x25 map cmns 38 8261 17 Chapter 12 AI2524 X 25 Configuration Steps 0800 4e02 1f 9f This configuration specifies that traffic from any other interface on Cisco Router C2 that is intended for any NSAP address with NSAP prefix 38 8261 18 will be switched to X 121 address 2095551000 through Serial 0 2095551000 Configuration for Router C1 This configuration specifies that any traffic from any other interface intended for any NSAP address with NSAP 38 8261 18 will be switched to MAC address 0800 4e02 2abc through Ethernet 0 0800 4e02 2abc This configuration specifies that traffic from any other interface on Cisco Router C1 that is intended for any NSAP address with NSAP prefix 38 8261 17 will be switched to X 121 address 4085551234 through Serial 1 4085551234 Example CMNS Switched over Leased Lines This example illustrates switching CMNS over a leased line Figur 12 7 illustrates the general network topology for a CMNS switching application where calls are being made by resources on the opposit August 1997 2524UM Page 12 43 AI2524 Router Card User s Manual Pit interface token 0 cmns enable sides of a remote link to Host C on an Ethernet and Host B on a Token Ring with a dedicated leased line providing the connection This configuration listing allows resources on either side of the leased line to call Host C

AIS Router AI2524 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents